WO2018235685A1 - Receiving device - Google Patents

Receiving device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018235685A1
WO2018235685A1 PCT/JP2018/022507 JP2018022507W WO2018235685A1 WO 2018235685 A1 WO2018235685 A1 WO 2018235685A1 JP 2018022507 W JP2018022507 W JP 2018022507W WO 2018235685 A1 WO2018235685 A1 WO 2018235685A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
broadcast
unit
data
application
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/022507
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
吉澤　和彦
清水　拓也
橋本　康宣
Original Assignee
マクセル株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017121606A external-priority patent/JP2019009532A/en
Priority claimed from JP2017121822A external-priority patent/JP2019009538A/en
Priority claimed from JP2017122719A external-priority patent/JP2019009580A/en
Application filed by マクセル株式会社 filed Critical マクセル株式会社
Publication of WO2018235685A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018235685A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H40/00—Arrangements specially adapted for receiving broadcast information
    • H04H40/18—Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/44—Processing of video elementary streams, e.g. splicing a video clip retrieved from local storage with an incoming video stream, rendering scenes according to MPEG-4 scene graphs
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
    • H04N21/462—Content or additional data management, e.g. creating a master electronic program guide from data received from the Internet and a Head-end, controlling the complexity of a video stream by scaling the resolution or bit-rate based on the client capabilities

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a receiver.
  • One of the extended functions of digital broadcasting service is data broadcasting which transmits digital data by airwaves and displays various information such as weather forecast, news, and recommended programs.
  • Many television receivers capable of receiving data broadcasting are already on the market, and a large number of techniques related to data broadcasting reception have been published, including Patent Document 1 below.
  • a television receiver compatible with digital broadcasting service can receive data broadcasting alone and can obtain / display various information.
  • it is difficult to obtain high-definition screen display and high-performance effects because data broadcasting is limited in the amount of data that can be transmitted due to the limitation of radio wave band. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute on a broadcast receiver.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a digital broadcast receiver capable of performing functions with higher added value.
  • a first data receiving unit that receives data of a first transmission channel that transmits video data associated with relative time information according to a first transport method, and an association with absolute time information
  • a second data receiving unit for receiving data of a second transmission path for transmitting the complement video data of the second transmission method different from the first transport method; and receiving the first data
  • a video processing unit for converting the video data received by the image processing unit into a high image quality using the complementary video data received by the second data receiving unit;
  • a receiving apparatus is used, which performs processing based on information on the correspondence between the relative time information and the absolute time information, which is transmitted through a second transmission path.
  • FIG. 7 is a system configuration diagram of a broadcast system according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of signal processing in a broadcast system according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of signal processing in a broadcast system according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a complementary signal generation process of the broadcast system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a complementation (image quality enhancement) process of the broadcast system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of application control information according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of application formats according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram of a data structure of an application identifier according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a view showing a list of application control codes according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an application descriptor according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a transmission protocol descriptor according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a selector area of a transmission protocol descriptor according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a simplified application location descriptor according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a location information descriptor according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of location types according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an address map table according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an address map table according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is an operation sequence diagram at the time of channel scanning of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an MPU time stamp descriptor according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an MPU extended time stamp descriptor according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram of a data structure of NTP according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of operation modes of the NTP according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram of a data structure of a UTC-PCR reference descriptor according to Example 2.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a conceptual diagram of signal processing in a broadcast system according to a third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the speaker arrangement
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an audio data generation process for addition of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing multi-channeling processing of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing multi-channeling processing of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a screen display diagram of an EPG display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram of a data structure of an event information table according to a fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram of a data structure of a short event descriptor according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a screen display diagram of a program information display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a screen display diagram of an expansion process execution control screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an operation list of extended process selection control of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
  • Example 1 First, an example of a digital broadcast service that can be received by the broadcast receiving apparatus of the present embodiment will be described.
  • a plurality of transport streams can be multiplexed and transmitted on one transponder (frequency channel).
  • TS is a predetermined length obtained by dividing a data stream such as video / audio elementary stream (ES), program specific information (PSI) / service information (SI), etc. and adding a TS header Is a sequence of TS packets.
  • ES video / audio elementary stream
  • PSI program specific information
  • SI service information
  • the PSI is a unique information table for identifying which program each ES included in the TS belongs to which is defined in the standard of the Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) -2 system.
  • the PSI is configured by a program association table (PAT), a program map table (PMT), a conditional access table (CAT), and the like.
  • the PAT defines a program list included in the TS by PID (Packet Identifier) of PMT.
  • the PMT defines the PIDs of the components of each program.
  • the CAT contains information on conditional access.
  • SI is an extension of PSI to include program information etc.
  • An electronic program guide Electronic Program Guide
  • the SI is configured of a BIT (Broadcaster Information Table), an SDT (Service Description Table), an EIT (Event Information Table), a TOT (Time Offset Table), and the like.
  • the BIT includes broadcast station identification information, sequence information, SI transmission information of the broadcast station, and the like.
  • the SDT includes information such as a network ID for identifying a network, a TS ID for identifying a TS, and a service ID (so-called channel number) for identifying an individual service (a so-called channel) in the network.
  • the EIT includes service IDs for identifying individual services in the network, and information on events such as the name of each event (so-called program), the date and time of broadcasting, and the contents of broadcasting.
  • the TOT contains information on the current date and time.
  • TS includes BML documents and the like subsetted based on PCR (Program Clock Reference) information as a reference of reproduction timing in the decoder, and BML (Broadcast Markup Language) specifications defined by ARIB STD-B24. .
  • PCR Program Clock Reference
  • BML Broadcast Markup Language
  • a user can use a broadcast program or a data broadcast screen produced using EPG or BML as a user by receiving and decoding the TS composed of the video / audio ES and various information etc. It is possible to provide
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus of the present embodiment links the function using the broadband network to the digital broadcasting service, acquires additional content via the broadband network, arithmetic processing in the server apparatus, and presentation processing in cooperation with the portable terminal apparatus Etc. can be compatible with a broadcast communication cooperation system that combines the above with digital broadcast services.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment is capable of executing an application described in HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) or the like.
  • AIT Application Information Table
  • the AIT is information for providing or disseminating various kinds of information necessary for activating an application such as an acquisition destination of the application, and control information for controlling activation / termination of the application and the like.
  • the above description is based on the digital broadcasting service in Japan, but is not limited to the application in Japan alone, including the broadcast communication cooperation system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an example of a communication system of the present embodiment for realizing a broadcast communication cooperation system.
  • the communication system of this embodiment includes a broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and an antenna 100a, a broadband network 200 such as the Internet and a router device 210, a radio wave tower 300t of a broadcasting station, a broadcasting station server 300, a service provider server 400, and other application servers 500.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a television receiver having a function corresponding to the broadcast / communication collaboration system in addition to the existing digital broadcast receiving function.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router apparatus 210, and can transmit and receive data by communication with each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
  • the router device 210 is connected to the Internet 200 by wireless communication or wired communication, and is connected to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by wireless communication or wired communication, and to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication.
  • each server device on the Internet 200, the broadcast reception device 100, and the portable information terminal 700 can mutually transmit and receive data via the router device 210.
  • Communication between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 may be directly performed by a method such as BlueTooth (registered trademark) or NFC (Near Field Communication) without passing through the router device 210.
  • the radio tower 300t transmits a broadcast wave including a digital broadcast signal, an AIT, control information on application presentation, and the like from a broadcast facility of a broadcast station.
  • the control information on application presentation is control information on overlaying of a broadcast program and an application on a television receiver and whether or not the application can be presented.
  • the broadcasting station is provided with a broadcasting station server 300.
  • the broadcast station server 300 stores metadata such as broadcast programs (video content etc.) and program titles of each broadcast program, program ID, program outline, performers, broadcast date and time, etc., and the video content and each metadata are It shall be possible to provide to the service provider based on the contract.
  • the provision of the moving image content and each metadata to the service provider may be performed through an application programming interface (API) provided in the broadcast station server 300.
  • API application programming interface
  • the service provider server 400 is a server device that a service provider prepares to provide a service by the broadcast communication cooperation system.
  • the service provider server 400 stores, manages, distributes, etc. the moving image content and metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, and the content and application produced for the broadcast / communication collaboration system. It also has a function to search for available applications and provide a list in response to an inquiry from the television receiver. Note that storage, management, and distribution of the content and metadata, and storage, management, and distribution of the application may be performed by different server devices.
  • the broadcasting station and the service provider may be the same or different providers.
  • a plurality of service provider servers 400 may be prepared for each different service.
  • the broadcast station server 300 may have the function of the service provider server 400.
  • the other application server 500 is a known server device that stores, manages and distributes general applications, operation programs, contents and data other than those related to the broadcast communication cooperation system.
  • the mobile telephone communication server 600 is connected to the Internet 200, and connected to the portable information terminal 700 via the base station 600b.
  • the mobile telephone communication server 600 manages telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via the mobile telephone communication network of the portable information terminal 700, and communicates data between the portable information terminal 700 and each server on the Internet 200. Enables transmission and reception. Communication between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be performed via the base station 600 b, the mobile telephone communication server 600, the Internet 200, and the router apparatus 210.
  • FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a main control unit 101, a system bus 102, a ROM 103, a RAM 104, a storage unit 110, a LAN communication unit 121, an expansion interface unit 124, a digital interface unit 125, a tuner / demodulation unit 131, a first separation unit 132, First video decoding unit 133, first audio decoding unit 134, first subtitle decoding unit 135, data broadcast reception processing unit 141, data broadcast engine 142, streaming reception processing unit 151, second separation unit 152, second video decoding unit 153, second audio decoding unit 154, second subtitle decoding unit 155, application control unit 161, application engine 162, video superposition unit 171, audio selection unit 172, video display unit 173, speaker 174, video output unit 175, audio output Unit 176, presentation synchronization control unit 181, terminal cooperation control 191, in constructed.
  • the main control unit 101 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 102 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 101 and each operation block in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • a ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored, and for example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) or a flash ROM is used. .
  • a random access memory (RAM) 104 serves as a work area when executing a basic operation program and other operation programs.
  • the ROM 103 and the RAM 104 may be integrated with the main control unit 101. Further, the ROM 103 may use a partial storage area in the storage unit 110 instead of the independent configuration as shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the storage unit 110 stores an operation program and operation setting values of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, personal information of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the like. In addition, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded from the network, various data created by the operation program, and the like. In addition, it is also possible to store contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds acquired from broadcast waves or downloaded from the network.
  • the partial or partial area of the storage unit 110 may be substituted for all or part of the functions of the ROM 103.
  • the storage unit 110 needs to hold stored information even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not supplied with power from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or a solid state drive (SSD), or a magnetic disk drive such as a hard disc drive (HDD) is used.
  • each of the operation programs stored in the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110 can be updated and function expanded by download processing from each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
  • a LAN (Local Area Network) communication unit 121 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 210, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device on the Internet 200.
  • the connection with the router device 210 may be a wired connection or a wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).
  • the LAN communication unit 121 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit, an NFC communication unit, an infrared communication unit, and the like.
  • the tuner / demodulator 131 receives a broadcast wave from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a, and tunes (selects) to a channel of the service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 101. Further, the tuner / demodulation unit 131 demodulates the received broadcast signal to acquire a TS.
  • the broadcast reception apparatus 100 may be configured as a tuner / demodulation unit for the purpose of simultaneously displaying a plurality of screens and reverse program recording. It is good also as composition equipped with two or more. Also, based on the control of the main control unit 101, control of access restriction to the demodulated TS may be performed.
  • the first separation unit 132 inputs the TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131, and each data such as a video data string, an audio data string, a caption data string, a program information data string, an AIT data string, a BML data string, etc. Separate into columns and output. These data strings may be, for example, ES format.
  • the first video decoding unit 133 decodes the video data sequence input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs video information.
  • the first speech decoding unit 134 decodes the speech data string input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs speech information.
  • the first subtitle decoding unit 135 decodes the subtitle data string input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs subtitle information.
  • the data broadcast reception processing unit 141 decodes the BML data string input from the first separation unit 132 and reproduces a BML document.
  • the data broadcast engine 142 is a BML browser that executes a BML document, executes the BML document reproduced by the data broadcast reception processing unit 141, and outputs data broadcast screen information.
  • the streaming reception processing unit 151 accesses moving image content and the like placed on each server device on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121, and Get Program Stream (PS). Further, based on the control of the main control unit 101, control of DRM (Digital Rights Management) processing on the acquired PS may be performed.
  • DRM Digital Rights Management
  • the second separation unit 152 receives the PS output from the streaming reception processing unit 151, separates the PS into data strings such as a video data string, an audio data string, and a subtitle data string, and outputs the data strings. These data strings may be, for example, ES format.
  • the second video decoding unit 153, the second audio decoding unit 154, and the second subtitle decoding unit 155 perform the same processing as the first video decoding unit 133, the first audio decoding unit 134, and the first subtitle decoding unit 135, respectively. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.
  • the two subtitle decoding unit 155 may be used in common.
  • the application control unit 161 operates the application engine 162 with respect to the application produced for the broadcast communication cooperation system based on the AIT data string input from the first separation unit or the AIT file acquired from each server apparatus on the Internet 200, Control and manage application-specific life cycles and events. Also, depending on the state of the application and the instruction of the AIT, control of functional restrictions of the application is performed as appropriate.
  • the application engine 162 is an HTML browser that acquires and executes the application produced for the broadcast communication cooperation system based on the control of the application control unit 161.
  • the video superimposing unit 171 includes the video information output from the first video decoding unit 133, the subtitle information output from the first subtitle decoding unit 135, the data broadcast screen information output from the data broadcasting engine 142, and the second video decoding unit
  • the video information output from 153, the subtitle information output from the second subtitle decoding unit 155, and the application execution screen information output from the application engine 162 are input, and processing such as selection and / or superposition is performed.
  • the video superimposing unit 171 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the video display unit 173 and the like are driven based on the video information input to the video RAM.
  • the video superimposing unit 171 superimposes the EPG screen information created based on the program information data string output from the scaling processing and the first separation unit 132 as needed based on the control of the main control unit 101. Perform processing etc.
  • the voice selection unit 172 receives voice information output from the first voice decoding unit 134, voice information output from the second voice decoding unit 154, and application execution voice information output from the application engine 162, and performs main control. According to the control of the unit 101, the voice information is appropriately selected and output.
  • the video display unit 173 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the video information selected and / or superimposed by the video superimposing unit 171.
  • the speaker 174 provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the audio information output from the audio selection unit 172.
  • the video output unit 175 is a video output interface that outputs the video information selected and / or superimposed by the video superimposing unit 171.
  • the audio output unit 176 is an audio output interface that outputs the audio information output from the audio selection unit 172. As described above, when the broadcast display apparatus 100 is a television receiver or the like, the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176 are not essential components of the present invention.
  • the presentation synchronization control unit 181 decodes video information and audio information obtained by decoding the TS acquired from the broadcast wave, and video information obtained by decoding the PS acquired from each server device on the Internet 200. Control of presentation synchronization on the video display unit 173 and the speaker 174, or on the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176 of the application execution screen information and the application execution audio information output from the application engine 162, and audio information, etc. Is performed based on, for example, PCR information and the like.
  • the terminal cooperation control unit 191 performs, for example, discovery and authentication of a cooperation device (mobile terminal device), connection of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation device, cooperation of applications, etc. when performing cooperation with an external mobile terminal device. Manage and control.
  • the extension interface unit 124 is an interface group for extending the function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the extension interface unit 124 includes an analog video / audio interface, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) interface, a memory interface, and the like.
  • the analog video / audio interface performs input of analog video signals / audio signals from an external video / audio output device, output of analog video signals / audio signals to an external video / audio input device, and the like.
  • the USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit and receive data.
  • the HDD may be connected to record a broadcast program or content. Also, a keyboard or other USB device may be connected.
  • the memory interface connects a memory card and other memory media to transmit and receive data.
  • the digital interface unit 125 is an interface that outputs or inputs encoded digital video data and / or digital audio data. It is assumed that the digital interface unit 125 can output the TS acquired by the tuner / demodulation unit 131 and the PS acquired by the streaming reception processing unit 151 as it is. Further, control may be performed so that the TS and PS input from the digital interface unit 125 are input to the first separation unit 132 and the second separation unit 152. Output of digital content stored in the storage unit 110 or storage of digital content in the storage unit 110 may be performed via the digital interface unit 125.
  • the digital interface unit 125 is a DVI terminal, an HDMI (registered trademark) terminal, or the like, and may output or input data in a format compliant with the DVI specification, the HDMI specification, or the like.
  • the data may be output or input in the form of serial data conforming to the IEEE 1394 specification or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be an optical disk drive recorder such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) recorder, a magnetic disk drive recorder such as an HDD recorder, a STB (Set Top Box), or the like in addition to a television receiver. It may be a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, a game machine or the like equipped with a digital broadcast reception function and a broadcast communication cooperation function.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a DVD recorder, an HDD recorder, an STB or the like, the video display unit 173 and the speaker 174 may not be provided.
  • an external monitor and an external speaker to the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176, an operation similar to that of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment can be performed.
  • FIG. 2B is a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, showing the software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110.
  • the basic operation program 1001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 103
  • the reception function program 1002 the BML browser program 1003, the HTML browser program 1004, and other operation programs are stored in the storage unit 110.
  • the storage unit 110 also includes a content storage area 1011 for storing contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds, an authentication information storage area 1012 for storing authentication information and the like used in cooperation with an external portable terminal device, etc. It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing other various information are provided.
  • the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 is expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 further executes the expanded basic operation program to configure a basic operation execution unit 1101.
  • the reception function program 1002, the BML browser program 1003, and the HTML browser program 1004 stored in the storage unit 110 are expanded on the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 executes the expanded operation programs to receive them.
  • a function execution unit 1102, a BML browser engine 1103, and an HTML browser engine 1104 are configured.
  • the RAM 104 is provided with a temporary storage area for temporarily holding data created at the time of execution of each operation program as needed.
  • the main control unit 101 executes the process of controlling each operation block by expanding the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 to the RAM 104 and executing the basic operation program.
  • the unit 1101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 controls each operation block of the broadcast reception apparatus 100 in order to realize the broadcast reception function and the broadcast / communication cooperation function.
  • the broadcast program reproduction unit 1102a includes a tuner / demodulation unit 131, a first separation unit 132, a first video decoding unit 133, a first audio decoding unit 134, a first subtitle decoding unit 135, a data broadcast reception processing unit 141, and data.
  • the broadcast engine 142 is mainly controlled.
  • the data broadcasting engine 142 may be replaced by the BML browser engine 1103 developed on the RAM 104.
  • the communication content reproduction unit 1102 b mainly controls the streaming reception processing unit 151, the second separation unit 152, the second video decoding unit 153, the second audio decoding unit 154, and the second subtitle decoding unit 155.
  • the cooperative application control unit 1102 c mainly controls the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162.
  • the application engine 162 may be replaced by the HTML browser engine 1104 developed on the RAM 104.
  • the terminal cooperation management unit 1102 d mainly controls the terminal cooperation control unit 191.
  • Each of the operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage unit 110 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121. In addition, the respective operation programs stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast station server 300.
  • the broadcast station server 300 includes a main control unit 301, a system bus 302, a RAM 304, a storage unit 310, and a LAN communication unit 321.
  • the main control unit 301 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast station server 300 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 302 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 301 and each operation block in the broadcast station server 300.
  • a RAM 304 serves as a work area when each operation program is executed.
  • the storage unit 310 stores a basic operation program 3001 and a content management / distribution program 3002, and further includes a moving image content storage area 3011 and a metadata storage area 3012.
  • the moving image content storage area 3011 stores moving image content and the like of each broadcast program broadcasted by the broadcast station.
  • the metadata storage area 3012 stores metadata such as a program title of each broadcast program, a program ID, a program summary, performers, and a broadcast date and time.
  • the basic operation program 3001 and the content management / distribution program 3002 stored in the storage unit 310 are expanded in the RAM 304, and the main control unit 301 executes the expanded basic operation program and the content management / distribution program.
  • the basic operation execution unit 3101 and the content management / distribution execution unit 3102 are configured.
  • the main control unit 301 executes processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 3001 stored in the storage unit 310 in the RAM 304 and executing the program
  • the operation execution unit 3101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the content management / distribution execution unit 3102 manages moving image content and the like stored in the moving image content storage area 3011 and the metadata storage area 3012 and each metadata, and the service business based on a contract on the moving image content etc and each metadata. Control when providing to people. Furthermore, the content management / distribution execution unit 3102 authenticates the service provider server 400 based on the contract, as needed, when providing the moving image content etc. and each metadata to the service provider. Perform processing etc.
  • the LAN communication unit 321 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the service provider server 400 or the like on the Internet 200.
  • the LAN communication unit 321 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the service provider server 400.
  • the service provider server 400 includes a main control unit 401, a system bus 402, a RAM 404, a storage unit 410, and a LAN communication unit 421.
  • the main control unit 401 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire service provider server 400 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 402 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 401 and each operation block in the service provider server 400.
  • a RAM 404 serves as a work area when each operation program is executed.
  • the storage unit 410 stores a basic operation program 4001, a content management / distribution program 4002, and an application management / distribution program 4003, and further includes a moving image content storage area 4011, a metadata storage area 4012, and an application storage area 4013.
  • the moving image content storage area 4011 and the metadata storage area 4012 store the moving image content and the like provided from the broadcast station server 300 and each metadata, the content produced by the service provider, the metadata regarding the content and the like.
  • the application storage area 4013 stores an application necessary for realizing each service of the broadcast-communication collaboration system for distributing in response to a request from each television receiver.
  • the basic operation program 4001 and the content management / distribution program 4002 and the application management / distribution program 4003 stored in the storage unit 410 are expanded on the RAM 404, and the main control unit 401 further expands the expanded basic operation program and content management.
  • the basic operation execution unit 4101, the content management / distribution execution unit 4102, and the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 are configured by executing the distribution program and the application management / distribution program.
  • the main control unit 401 performs processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 4001 stored in the storage unit 410 in the RAM 404 and executing the program.
  • the operation execution unit 4101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the content management / distribution execution unit 4102 acquires moving image content and the like and metadata from the broadcasting station server 300, manages moving image content and the like stored in the moving image content storage area 4011 and the metadata storage area 4012, and each metadata. And control of distribution of the said moving image content etc. and each metadata with respect to each television receiver. Also, the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 performs management of each application stored in the application storage area 4013 and control when distributing each application according to a request from each television receiver. Further, when distributing the respective applications to the respective television receivers, the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 also carries out an authentication process and the like of the respective television receivers as necessary.
  • the LAN communication unit 421 is connected to the Internet 200, and communicates with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 via the broadcast station server 300 on the Internet 200 and the router device 210.
  • the LAN communication unit 421 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • FIG. 5A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the portable information terminal 700 includes a main control unit 701, a system bus 702, a ROM 703, a RAM 704, a storage unit 710, a communication processing unit 720, an expansion interface unit 724, an operation unit 730, an image processing unit 740, an audio processing unit 750, and a sensor unit 760.
  • a main control unit 701 As shown in FIG.
  • the portable information terminal 700 includes a main control unit 701, a system bus 702, a ROM 703, a RAM 704, a storage unit 710, a communication processing unit 720, an expansion interface unit 724, an operation unit 730, an image processing unit 740, an audio processing unit 750, and a sensor unit 760.
  • the main control unit 701 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire portable information terminal 700.
  • a system bus 702 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 701 and each operation block in the portable information terminal 700.
  • the ROM 703 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system or the like and other operation programs are stored, and for example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM or a flash ROM is used.
  • a RAM 704 serves as a work area when executing a basic operation program and other operation programs.
  • the ROM 703 and the RAM 704 may be integrated with the main control unit 701. Further, the ROM 703 may use a partial storage area in the storage unit 710 instead of the independent configuration as shown in FIG. 5A.
  • Storage unit 710 stores an operation program and operation setting value of portable information terminal 700, personal information of the user of portable information terminal 700, and the like. In addition, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded from the network, various data created by the operation program, and the like. In addition, contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds downloaded from the network can also be stored. A partial area of the storage unit 710 may replace all or part of the functions of the ROM 703. In addition, the storage unit 710 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the portable information terminal 700 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a flash ROM, an SSD, or an HDD is used.
  • each of the operation programs stored in the ROM 703 and the storage unit 710 can be updated and function expanded by download processing from each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
  • the communication processing unit 720 includes a LAN communication unit 721, a mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and an NFC communication unit 723.
  • the LAN communication unit 721 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 210, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device on the Internet 200. It is assumed that the connection with the router device 210 is made by wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).
  • the mobile telephone network communication unit 722 performs telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception by wireless communication with the base station 600b of the mobile telephone communication network.
  • the NFC communication unit 723 performs wireless communication when in close proximity to the corresponding reader / writer.
  • the LAN communication unit 721, the mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and the NFC communication unit 723 each include an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, an antenna, and the like.
  • the communication processing unit 720 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit or an infrared communication unit.
  • the extension interface unit 724 is an interface group for extending the function of the portable information terminal 700, and in this embodiment, is configured by a video / audio interface, a USB interface, a memory interface, and the like.
  • the video / audio interface performs input of a video signal / audio signal from an external video / audio output device, output of a video signal / audio signal to an external video / audio input device, and the like.
  • the USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit and receive data. Also, a keyboard or other USB device may be connected.
  • the memory interface connects a memory card and other memory media to transmit and receive data.
  • the operation unit 730 is an instruction input unit for inputting an operation instruction to the portable information terminal 700.
  • the operation unit 730 includes a touch panel 730t disposed overlapping on the display unit 741 and an operation key 730k in which button switches are arranged. It shall be. Only one of them may be used.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 may be operated using a keyboard or the like connected to the extended interface unit 724.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 may be operated using a separate mobile terminal device connected by wired communication or wireless communication.
  • the touch panel function may be included in the display unit 741.
  • the image processing unit 740 includes a display unit 741, an image signal processing unit 742, a first image input unit 743, and a second image input unit 744.
  • the display unit 741 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the user of the portable information terminal 700 with the image data processed by the image signal processing unit 742.
  • the image signal processing unit 742 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the display unit 741 is driven based on the image data input to the video RAM.
  • the image signal processing unit 742 has a function of performing format conversion, superimposing processing of a menu or another OSD (On Screen Display) signal, and the like as necessary.
  • the first image input unit 743 and the second image input unit 744 convert the light input from the lens into an electric signal using an electronic device such as a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) sensor. , And a camera unit for inputting image data of surroundings and an object.
  • an electronic device such as a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) sensor.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • the audio processing unit 750 includes an audio output unit 751, an audio signal processing unit 752, and an audio input unit 753.
  • the audio output unit 751 is a speaker, and provides the audio signal processed by the audio signal processing unit 752 to the user of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the voice input unit 753 is a microphone, which converts a user's voice or the like into voice data and inputs the voice data.
  • the sensor unit 760 is a sensor group for detecting the state of the portable information terminal 700, and in the present embodiment, the GPS reception unit 761, the gyro sensor 762, the geomagnetic sensor 763, the acceleration sensor 764, the illuminance sensor 765, and the proximity sensor 766. Composed of With these sensors, it is possible to detect the position, tilt, direction, movement, and ambient brightness of the portable information terminal 700, the proximity of surrounding objects, and the like.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may further include another sensor such as an atmospheric pressure sensor.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may be a mobile phone, a smart phone, a tablet terminal or the like. It may be a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants) or a notebook PC. In addition, it may be a digital still camera, a video camera capable of capturing moving images, a portable game machine, or the like, or other portable digital devices.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistants
  • notebook PC Portable Computer System
  • the configuration example of the portable information terminal 700 shown in FIG. 5A includes many configurations that are not essential to the present embodiment, such as the sensor unit 760, the present embodiment is not limited to these configurations. There is no loss of the effect of Further, a configuration not shown, such as a digital broadcast reception function and an electronic money settlement function, may be further added.
  • FIG. 5B is a software configuration diagram of the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment, and shows the configuration of software in the ROM 703, the RAM 704, and the storage unit 710.
  • the basic operation program 7001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 703, and the storage control unit 710 stores the cooperation control program 7002, the HTML browser program 7003, and other operation programs.
  • the storage unit 710 includes a content storage area 7011 for storing contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds, an authentication information storage area 7012 for storing authentication information used in cooperation with a television receiver, etc. It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing various information are provided.
  • the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 is expanded on the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 further executes the expanded basic operation program to configure a basic operation execution unit 7101.
  • the cooperation control program 7002 and the HTML browser program 7003 stored in the storage unit 710 are expanded in the RAM 704 respectively, and the main control unit 701 further executes the expanded operation programs to thereby execute the cooperation control execution unit 7102 and The HTML browser engine 7103 is configured.
  • the RAM 704 is provided with a temporary storage area for temporarily holding data created at the time of execution of each operation program as needed.
  • the main control unit 701 executes the processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 in the RAM 704 and executing the basic operation program.
  • the unit 7101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 manages device authentication and connection, transmission and reception of each data, and the like when the portable information terminal 700 performs a cooperation operation with a television receiver.
  • the HTML browser engine 7103 is an HTML browser that executes an application created for the broadcast communication cooperation system on the portable information terminal 700.
  • the respective operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722. In addition, the respective operation programs stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
  • the application control information (AIT) is an application (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the present embodiment) that cooperates with the broadcast service in the broadcast communication cooperation function supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (the broadcast reception apparatus 100 in the present embodiment).
  • the presence of a broadcast cooperative application may be referred to) and the information is intended to instruct control thereof.
  • the broadcast cooperation application operates only in the broadcast reception state based on (1) control signals such as activation / termination included in the broadcast signal, and is a broadcast managed where access to the broadcast resource is permitted based on the control signal.
  • an outside-broadcast managed application in which access to the broadcast resource is permitted based on means such as application authentication in an operation form in which the broadcast signal is not controlled by the application and (2) activation / termination etc .; It may be distinguished from other general applications where access is not permitted.
  • AIT transmission method a method of transmitting AIT in the section format or XML (extensible Markup Language) format by broadcast wave by a data carousel (Data Carousel: DC) system, etc., and the AIT file of the section format or XML format in the Internet It is sufficient to use one of the methods of distributing data from the server apparatus on the server 200 using http (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) or https (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure). Other methods may be adopted.
  • http Hypertext Transfer Protocol
  • https Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
  • FIG. 6 is a data configuration diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the AIT.
  • the AIT mainly includes an application type 901, an application identifier 902, an application control code 903, an application profile 904, application acquisition destination information 905, application boundary and access authority setting 906, activation priority 907, cache control information 908, server access distribution parameter 909 and the like, each information. Furthermore, other information may be included.
  • the application type 901 defines a description method of the application.
  • the description system of the application is HTML.
  • the application identifier 902 is identification information configured to identify an application unit, and includes an organization identification identifying an enterprise and an application identification numbered for each enterprise. Note that the application unit is a set of HTML documents and reference resources thereof, with the HTML document existing in the location specified by the application acquisition destination information 905 as the entry document.
  • the application control code 903 defines operation control for the target application, and one of (1) automatic activation, (2) operation enable, (3) end, and (4) prefetch is described.
  • the application profile 904 is a value indicating the function of the television receiver required by the application, and indicates a combination of functions that the television receiver has as an option. The availability of the application is determined by referring to this value.
  • the application acquisition destination information 905 is information for specifying an acquisition destination of the application, and is location information for acquiring an HTML document to be referred to first when the application is started. Since it is assumed that the application is transmitted by broadcast and is placed on a server device on the communication network, the location information specified in the application acquisition destination information 905 also corresponds to the case of both broadcast acquisition and communication acquisition. A provision is made.
  • the application boundary and access right setting 906 is information indicating an operable range as a broadcast managed application as a set of one or more areas (URL: Uniform Resource Locator). Also, the access restriction to the broadcast resource for each area is set for each function.
  • Application boundary and access authority setting 906 specify the range of document transition to prevent transition to unexpected document or access to inappropriate broadcast resource by chain of document transition from the entry document at application startup. Do. In addition, it is possible to set an access right to a specific broadcast resource in area units within the range of the document transition.
  • the activation priority 907 defines which of the data broadcast by the broadcast service and the broadcast managed application by the HTML document is to be launched at the same time. Designating data broadcasting as top priority unconditionally on the PMT, designating activation priority of a specific application type on the PMT, designating activation priority of the target application in the activation priority 907, Shall be possible.
  • the cache control information 908 is information used for cache control when holding application resources in preparation for reuse of the application. This information makes it possible to cache application resources assuming reuse even after the end of the application.
  • the server access distribution parameter 909 is a parameter set for distributing access in order to reduce the load on the server where access is concentrated at the acquisition destination of the application or the like. The television receiver may operate to stochastically delay the application control code application according to the setting of this parameter.
  • FIG. 7A is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application in the case where the broadcast cooperation application is defined to be activated preferentially.
  • the figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
  • the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S101), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed.
  • the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S103), and the acquired AIT The application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S104).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S107). A known method may be used for the authentication process, and the detailed description will be omitted.
  • the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S108).
  • FIG. 7B is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application in the case where it is defined that the data broadcast by the broadcast service is preferentially activated.
  • the figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
  • the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S201), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed. In the process of S201, it is confirmed that the start priority of the data broadcast by the broadcast service is high (S202), the data broadcast reception processing unit 141 acquires the BML data string separated by the first separation unit 132, and the BML document is obtained. It reproduces (S203).
  • the data broadcasting engine 142 When the automatic start of data broadcasting is set by the BML document, and when the user makes a start request for data broadcasting using the operation terminal (the portable information terminal 700, the remote control, etc.) (S204), the data broadcasting engine 142 Then, the data broadcasting screen information is generated by executing the reproduced BML document, and displayed on the video display unit 173 (S205).
  • the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S206), and confirms the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string. (S207).
  • an entry button to the executable broadcast cooperation application is displayed on the data broadcast screen.
  • the entry button may always be displayed, and the color scheme may be changed from the inactive color to the active color only when the broadcast cooperation application can be executed.
  • the shape may be changed to switch between the inactive state and the active state of the entry button.
  • the data broadcasting engine 142 executes the BML document and ends the process of generating data broadcasting screen information (S209).
  • the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S210), and confirms the application acquisition destination information 905 of the acquired AIT data string. Furthermore, based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 confirmed in S210, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 (S211).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S212). Next, the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S213).
  • FIG. 7C is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application when no priority activation is defined. The figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
  • the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S301), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed.
  • the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S303), and the acquired AIT
  • the application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S304). In the process of S304, when the application control code 903 is not "automatic start” but “startable", the display of the broadcast program is continued without starting any of the data broadcasting by the broadcast service and the broadcast cooperation application.
  • the user selects a predetermined broadcast cooperation application from the broadcast cooperation application launcher displayed in S309 using the operation terminal (S310), and the application control unit 161 separates the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132.
  • Acquire (S311) and confirm the application acquisition destination information 905 of the acquired AIT data string. Furthermore, based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 confirmed in S311, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 (S312).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S313). Next, the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S314).
  • the predetermined server apparatus specified by the information description of the PMT or the like is described. You may acquire the AIT file from. Also, the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application may be performed from the broadcast wave, not from the server apparatus (service provider server 400) on the network. That is, when the location information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 of the AIT indicates a broadcast wave, the HTML data string transmitted by the application control unit 161 by the data carousel method or the like and separated and output by the first separation unit 132 The HTML document may be reproduced from the above, and the application engine 162 may execute the reproduced HTML document (broadcast cooperation application).
  • the activation is performed only by the information such as the application control code 903 of the AIT and the activation priority 907. You may check the priority. Similarly, even if acquisition of the information on the PMT fails, the activation priority may be confirmed only by information such as the application control code 903 of the AIT and the activation priority 907.
  • the AIT is periodically checked, and when there is a broadcast cooperation application specified by “automatic start” in the application control code 903 of the AIT, If priority is given to activation and no broadcast cooperation application designated by “automatic activation” is present in the application control code 903 of the AIT, activation of data broadcasting by the broadcasting service may be prioritized.
  • a message such as “Please wait for a while” is displayed on the image display section 173. It may be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message may be displayed asking the user to stop the execution of the broadcast cooperation application.
  • the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application is not limited to the above three patterns, and may be activated by different sequences.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment it is possible to extend the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service by the cooperation operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
  • an application cooperation control application
  • the portable information terminal 700 it is possible to use the portable information terminal 700 as a high-performance remote control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the broadcast cooperation application can be executed on the portable information terminal 700, and for example, services linked to the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be displayed on the portable information terminal 700.
  • the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700, and the operation on the portable information terminal 700.
  • the broadcast cooperative application to be operated is controlled by the cooperative control application to operate.
  • FIG. 8A is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700.
  • the figure shows a series of flows (first time) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible.
  • the cooperation control application is installed in advance in the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 as a cooperation control program 7002.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 searches for a television receiver capable of communication (cooperation) on the network ( S402)
  • the search result is displayed on the display unit 741 as a television receiver list. If a communicable television receiver can not be found, that effect is displayed and the process is ended.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 displays a login screen for connecting to the broadcast reception apparatus 100 on the display unit 741. Do.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 receives the input authentication information.
  • the transmission process of the authentication information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be performed via the LAN communication unit 721 and the router apparatus 210, or may be performed directly to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 via the NFC communication unit 723. .
  • the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S405). If it is confirmed in the process of S405 that the received authentication information is correct, the information of the portable information terminal 700 is stored in the authentication information storage area 1012 and the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S406).
  • the portable information terminal 700 that has acquired the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen (for example, the advanced remote control screen) of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S407). In S405, when the received authentication information is not confirmed to be correct, the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 returns an error to the portable information terminal 700.
  • the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is possible.
  • FIG. 8B is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700.
  • the figure shows a series of flows (from the second time on) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 searches for a communicable television receiver on the network, and searches the search result as a television It is displayed on the display unit 741 as a receiver list. If a communicable television receiver can not be found, that effect is displayed and the process is ended.
  • the user selects an arbitrary television receiver (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment) from the television receiver list (S502), and the selected broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has made a connection (cooperation operation) in the past If the device is a certain device, the cooperation control execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the authentication information storage area 7012 and transmits it to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S 503).
  • the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S504). If it is confirmed in the process of S504 that the received authentication information is correct, the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S505).
  • the portable information terminal 700 that has acquired the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S506).
  • FIGS. 7A to 7C may be performed after the processing of FIGS. 8A to 8B.
  • FIG. 8C is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700.
  • the figure shows a series of flows (from the second time on) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible.
  • an example is shown where activation of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 is requested by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that executes the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application.
  • the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S601), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed.
  • the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S603), and the acquired AIT The application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S604). In the process of S604, when the application control code 903 is "automatic start", the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string is further confirmed (S605).
  • the portable information terminal 700 is selected as a portable terminal device by referring to the information storage area 1012, and a cooperation control application activation request is transmitted to the selected portable information terminal 700 (S606).
  • the selection of the portable information terminal 700 by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012 is made based on the latest information of the authentication information storage area 1012 or based on the most frequently used information of the authentication information storage area 1012. You should do it.
  • the main control unit 701 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the cooperation control application (cooperation control execution unit 7102) in response to the cooperation control application activation request received via the LAN communication unit 721 (S607), and further performs cooperation control.
  • the execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the authentication information storage area 7012 and transmits it to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S 608).
  • the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S609). If it is confirmed by the process of S609 that the received authentication information is correct, the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S610).
  • the portable information terminal 700 that has obtained the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S611). By the above-described processing, the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is possible.
  • FIG. 9 is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
  • the application control unit 161 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S612), and the application of the acquired AIT data string
  • the acquisition source information 905 is confirmed.
  • the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121. (S613).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) performs the authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then the application. Delivery of the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (TV side) stored in the storage area 4013 is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S614).
  • the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (TV side) distributed from the service provider server 400, which is received through the LAN communication unit 121 under the control of the application control unit 161. It starts (S615).
  • the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires an acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) to be executed by the portable information terminal 700 acquired from the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) executed in AIT or S615.
  • the URL information and the like are transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S616).
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 performs predetermined service business via the LAN communication unit 721 based on the acquisition destination URL information etc. of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) received via the LAN communication unit 721.
  • the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) is transmitted to the user server 400 (S617).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) performs the authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 as necessary based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then the application. Distribution of a predetermined broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) stored in the storage area 4013 is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S618).
  • the HTML browser engine 7103 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) distributed from the service provider server 400, which is received via the LAN communication unit 721 (S619).
  • the broadcast reception apparatus 100 acquires the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) which should be performed with the portable information terminal 700 from a broadcast wave, The said acquired broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) ) May be transferred to the portable information terminal 700 via the communication unit 121.
  • the broadcast reception apparatus 100 acquires the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) to be executed on the portable information terminal 700 from the broadcast wave and stores it in the storage unit 110, and transmits it to the portable information terminal 700 in the process of S616 in FIG.
  • the location information of the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be transmitted as the URL information to be transmitted.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may acquire the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) from the broadcast wave, and the portable information terminal 700 may acquire the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) from the server apparatus on the network. Acquisition of the said broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) may be performed directly from a broadcast wave using the digital broadcast reception function which the portable information terminal 700 has.
  • FIGS. 7A to 7C, 8A to 8C, and FIG. 9 can be appropriately combined partially, and furthermore, some operation steps may be reordered as appropriate with other operation steps. , Simultaneous operation, etc. shall be possible.
  • FIG. 10A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a basic screen of a cooperation control application displayed by the process of S407 of FIG. 8A, the process of S506 of FIG. 8B, the process of S611 of FIG.
  • the basic screen 741 a of the cooperation control application has a function as a high-performance remote controller corresponding to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application includes a power key 741a1, a network selection key (terrestrial digital, BS, CS) 741a2, numeric keys (1 to 12) 741a3, volume UP / DOWN key 741a4, Channel UP / DOWN key 741a5, input switching key 741a6, program guide key 741a7, data key 741a8, cooperation application key 741a9, menu key 741aa, back key 741ab, cursor keys (up, down, left, right) 741ac, enter key 741ad , Color key (blue, red, green, yellow) 741ae, composed. Other operation keys may be further displayed.
  • the operation keys have the same key arrangement / operation as the dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. Further, the power key 741a1, the network selection key 741a2, the numeric key 741a3, and so on have the same functions as the operation keys of the known television remote control, and the detailed description will be omitted.
  • the cooperation application key 741a9 is an operation key prepared for the broadcast cooperation communication function of the present embodiment.
  • each broadcast cooperation application used in the broadcast cooperation system of the present embodiment can be easily selected. It becomes possible to start. Further, the cooperation application key 741 a 9 or another operation key having the same function may be provided in the dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • 10B is a screen display diagram showing an example of the basic screen of the cooperation control application displayed by the process of S407 of FIG. 8A, the process of S506 of FIG. 8B, the process of S611 of FIG. 8C, etc. It is a different example.
  • the basic screen 741b of the cooperation control application is composed of a cooperation control message 741b1 and a cooperation control application operation screen 741b2. Other objects may be further displayed.
  • the cooperation controlling message 741b1 is a message display for making the user recognize that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the cooperation control application operation screen 741 b 2 is an area in which an arbitrary screen display is performed by the cooperation control application, and the detailed description will be omitted in this embodiment.
  • the configuration in the cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 may be similar to the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application described above.
  • a subscreen or the like of a broadcast program displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be displayed.
  • the user of the portable information terminal 700 can easily grasp that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by displaying the cooperation controlling message 741b1.
  • the cooperation control message 741b1 is not limited to the character display, and may be a symbol display, a graphic display, or the like. It may be used as a substitute for the message 741b1 under cooperation control due to a difference in background color or the like.
  • FIG. 11 is a screen display diagram showing an example of the data broadcast screen displayed by the process of S205 of FIG. 7B.
  • three broadcast cooperative applications such as a cooperative application A, a cooperative application B, and a cooperative application C can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 based on the description of the AIT.
  • the entry button 173a2 of the cooperation application A, the entry button 173a3 of the cooperation application B, and the entry button 173a4 of the cooperation application C are displayed at an arbitrary position on the data broadcast screen 173a.
  • the entry button 173a2 When the entry button 173a2, the entry button 173a3, the entry button 173a4, etc. are selected using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the data broadcast screen 173a as shown in FIG. While the display of the screen 173a is ended, the cooperation application A, the cooperation application B, the cooperation application C, and the like are activated under the control of the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162.
  • the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blink status, etc. of each entry button may be changed appropriately according to the type of the broadcast cooperation application, security status, etc. You may For example, when the cooperation application A is a broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is blue, and when the cooperation application B is a non-broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 173a3 is yellow, When the cooperation application C is a general application, the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is changed to red, and the like.
  • the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is colored blue when it is determined that the linked application A can be trusted for security, and the entry button when it is determined that the linked application B is not necessarily trusted for security.
  • the frame color of 173a3 is set to yellow, and when it is determined that the cooperation application C is dangerous for security, the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is set to red, and the like.
  • the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blink status, etc. of each entry button May be changed as appropriate.
  • the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. of each entry button may be changed as appropriate depending on whether the broadcast cooperation application has been acquired from the network, etc. .
  • the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is set to blue
  • the entry The frame color of the button 173a3 is set to yellow
  • the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is set to red if the cooperation application C has not been acquired.
  • the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the type and security status of the broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • FIG. 12A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a notification screen for making the user recognize that there is a startable broadcast cooperation application in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the display of the broadcast program is continued without activating any of the data broadcast by the broadcast service and the broadcast cooperation application.
  • the icon 173b0 as shown in FIG. 12A is displayed to allow the user to recognize that there is a startable broadcast cooperation application, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is improved. That is, by displaying the icon 173b0, it is possible to prevent the user from missing the existence of the broadcast cooperative application which can be activated.
  • the display position of the icon 173b0 may be any position on the screen, it is desirable that the icon 173b0 not be in the way of viewing a broadcast program. For example, the four corners of the screen.
  • the icon 173b0 may be a character display as shown in FIG. 12A, or may be a symbol, a figure or the like.
  • the icon 173b0 may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the channel is switched. Alternatively, they may be simultaneously displayed when program information, channel numbers, etc. are displayed.
  • FIG. 12B is a screen display diagram showing an example of the broadcast cooperative app launcher displayed by the process of S306 of FIG. 7C.
  • three broadcast cooperative applications such as a cooperative application A, a cooperative application B, and a cooperative application C can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 based on the description of the AIT.
  • the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173b, and further, an entry button 173b2 of cooperation application A, an entry button 173b3 of cooperation application B, and cooperation application C in the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1.
  • the entry button 173b4 and the back button 173b5 are displayed.
  • the entry button 173b2 While the broadcast cooperative app launcher 173b1 as shown in FIG. 12B is displayed, the entry button 173b2, the entry button 173b3, and the entry button 173b4 using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application
  • the cooperative application A, the cooperative application B, the cooperative application C, and the like are activated under the control of the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162.
  • the back button 173b5 When the back button 173b5 is selected, the display of the broadcast cooperative application launcher 173b1 ends.
  • each entry button may be changed as appropriate.
  • the entry button of each broadcast cooperation application on the data broadcast screen 173a of FIG. Is the same as when displaying.
  • the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1 may not be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message such as “There is no usable application” may be displayed inside the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1.
  • FIG. 13A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. is there.
  • the broadcast cooperation application of the present embodiment is provided with graphics performance and effect performance by HTML description, etc., and can be overlaid on the broadcast program screen on the video display unit 173.
  • a broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 that displays information such as a weather forecast or news is overlay-displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 includes a first main object 173c2, a second main object 173c3, a third main object 173c4, a background object 173c5, and the like. Other objects may also be displayed.
  • Execution of the broadcast cooperation application is terminated by selecting the data key 741a8 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application in a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c, and the data broadcast screen is ended. It is possible to move to In addition, by selecting the cooperation application key 741a9 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, it is possible to end the execution of the broadcast cooperation application and return to the display of only the broadcast program screen 173c. The process may be realized by different operation keys.
  • the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is changed by operating each operation key of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application in a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c. Shall be possible.
  • the change processing of the transparency may be performed collectively for the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1, or the first main object 173c2, the second main object 173c3, the third main object 173c4, and the background object 173c5 It may be performed alone. It may be performed for each predetermined group (for example, a plurality of objects present in the same graphics layer).
  • the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application is used to select an object, and the transparency of the object is increased with the "blue" key of the color key 741ae, Reduce the transparency of the object with the "Yellow” key.
  • the process of changing the degree of transparency may be performed using different operation keys. If the entire broadcast cooperative application unit 173c1 is collectively made to have a transmittance of 100%, the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c1 can be temporarily hidden. For example, when an emergency broadcast is distributed by a broadcast wave, it is also possible to display only the broadcast program screen of the emergency broadcast on the video display unit 173 with the entire broadcast cooperation application unit being 100% transparent.
  • the CM detection unit detects that the broadcast program has changed from a main program video to a CM video, and collectively transmits 100% of the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 (or clears the broadcast program video) It may be controlled so as to be the transparency that can be confirmed in
  • FIG. 13B shows an example different from the above of the broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. It is a screen display figure which shows.
  • the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c6 introducing the recommended program is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c6 displays first recommended program information 173c7, second recommended program information 173c8, third recommended program information 173c9, and the like. Further, more recommended program information may be displayed by scrolling, page switching, or the like.
  • the recommended program information may be information of a program recommended in relation to a broadcast program (broadcast program screen 173c) being displayed, or information of a program recommended based on the user's viewing history. It may be information of a program that has become a topic on the Internet or the like. It may be information of a recommended program sent by a friend of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the user. Further, the recommended program may be a program transmitted by a broadcast wave of digital broadcasting service, or may be a VOD (Video On Demand) program etc. distributed from each server device on the Internet 200. good. It may be an information screen such as a home page prepared in a server device on the Internet 200.
  • the first recommended program information 173c7 and the second recommended program are displayed using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application.
  • Each program video image recommended by the first recommended program information 173c7, the second recommended program information 173c8, the third recommended program information 173c9, etc. is displayed by selecting the information 173c8, the third recommended program information 173c9, etc. Is displayed on.
  • FIG. 13C is a screen display diagram showing an example in the case where a program video recommended by the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c6 introducing a recommended program is displayed.
  • the display unit 173 is recommended by the first recommended program information 173c7.
  • the program video 173ca of the program to be displayed is displayed.
  • the program video 173 ca may be capable of being paused, jumping with a designated time, or the like by the user operating the operation terminal.
  • the original broadcast program screen 173c may be displayed at an arbitrary position in a PIP (Picture In Picture) format.
  • PIP Picture In Picture
  • which of the program video 173ca of the recommended program and the original broadcast program screen 173c is to be used as the main screen may be changed by the user's operation on the operation terminal.
  • the size of the window of the original broadcast program screen 173 c may be adjusted by the user's operation on the operation terminal.
  • an icon display 173cb indicating that the program video 173ca of the recommended program is a video displayed by selecting any of the recommended program information displayed on the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c6 is an arbitrary position on the screen The user's convenience can be improved by displaying in FIG. Further, it goes without saying that the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application section 173c6 may be changed in the same manner as described above on the broadcast cooperation application execution screen shown in FIG. 13B.
  • FIG. 13D shows an example different from the above of the broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. It is a screen display figure which shows.
  • the broadcast cooperative application unit 173cc serving as a portal of SNS (Social Networking Service) service is overlaid and displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 173cc displays an entry button 173cd for the first SNS service, an entry button 173ce for the second SNS service, an entry button 173cf for the third SNS service, and the like. Further more SNS service entry buttons may be displayed by scrolling, page switching, and the like.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 173cc In a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173cc is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c, the first SNS service entry button 173cd, the second SNS service using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application
  • the functions assigned to the respective entry buttons such as the chat function, the bulletin board function, and the Internet telephone function are activated.
  • the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 is changed to a voice input screen or the like for chat or bulletin board writing by a character input screen such as a software keyboard or voice input. good.
  • the cooperation function between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is used to further synchronize the broadcast timing with CM.
  • the related CM application may be presented to both the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
  • the broadcast cooperation application confirms whether the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 subscribes to the paid service, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and / or the portable information terminal 700 according to the result. It may be something that changes the display of. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to receive the effects described using FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, etc., regardless of which broadcast cooperation application is executed.
  • FIG. 14 shows the cooperation of broadcasting by confirming the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string, etc. by the processing of S105 of FIG. 7A, the processing of S207 of FIG. 7B, the processing of S308 of FIG. 7C, the processing of S605 of FIG.
  • FIG. 14 is a screen display diagram showing an example of an error display screen such as a case where it is determined that the application is not executable, a case where there is a deficiency in the AIT, or a case where acquisition of the AIT fails.
  • the reason why execution of the broadcast cooperation application such as the confirmation result of the application profile 904, is not possible when it is determined that execution of the broadcast cooperation application is not possible,
  • the error message 173d1 is displayed.
  • a message to that effect is displayed in the error message 173d1.
  • An error code and a guide (URL or the like) of a home page of the television receiver manufacturer in which the explanation of the error code is described may be displayed.
  • the connection status of the network is confirmed in advance.
  • the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application is performed due to a connection failure of the LAN cable. If this is not possible, the fact is displayed in the error message 173d1.
  • the error message 173d1 may be displayed also in the case where acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application can not be properly performed because the error status is poor.
  • the error message 173d1 may be displayed when acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application is in progress and the broadcast cooperative application can not be executed yet.
  • the error message 173d1 is displayed also when the information such as AIT can not be received halfway through good. In such a case, if the broadcast cooperation application acquired from each server apparatus is cached as it is, it can be used as it is after the reception condition recovery of the broadcast wave.
  • the error message 173d1 displays that the latest firmware for the television receiver is recommended to be confirmed or updated. You may do so. Alternatively, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may automatically check or update the latest firmware. Alternatively, if it is possible to execute the broadcast cooperation application by adding paid optional hardware or optional software to a television receiver, the guidance for the paid optional hardware or optional software may be displayed. good.
  • the error message 173d1 may be displayed not on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 but on the portable information terminal 700.
  • FIG. 15 is a screen display diagram showing an example of a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) execution screen displayed in the process of S619 in FIG.
  • the broadcast cooperation application execution screen 741c shown in FIG. 15 includes a main window 741c1, a subwindow 741c2, a selection marker 741c3, cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5, an explanation display portion 741c6, and an end button 741c7. Other objects may be further added.
  • the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) executed by the portable information terminal 700 is an application for confirming the details of the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the main window 741c1 the same video as the broadcast program screen displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is displayed, and in the subwindow 741c2, an enlarged video at a position designated by the selection marker 741c3 is displayed. It is assumed that the position of the selection marker 741c3 can be changed by selecting the cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5.
  • the end button 741c7 is a button for ending the operation of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side).
  • FIG. 16A is a screen display diagram showing an example of an electronic program guide (EPG) display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the EPG display screen 173 e is a distribution schedule of broadcast programs in the digital broadcast service of the present embodiment, which is created based on the program information data string output from the first separation unit 132 by the main control unit 101. It is assumed that the EPG display screen 173e is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting the program guide key 741a7 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application.
  • the EPG display screen 173e has a matrix shape in which the vertical axis represents time and the horizontal axis represents service ID (channel), and detailed information of each broadcast program broadcasted on each channel in each time zone is displayed. indicate.
  • the detailed information 173e1 of each broadcast program mainly includes a title area 173e2 and a detailed explanation area 173e3.
  • a program title of each broadcast program and a symbol representing an attribute of each broadcast program are displayed.
  • the symbol or the like representing the attribute of each broadcast program is, for example, a symbol obtained by symbolizing "New” which means that it is a new program, or a symbol which is symbolized “Replay” which means that it is a rebroadcast program. Etc.
  • it may be a mark or the like that symbolizes "data” which means that it supports data broadcasting by the broadcasting service.
  • a mark or the like may be used as "Linkage” indicating that.
  • the detailed explanation area 173e3 displays related information such as the program content and cast of each broadcast program, the URL of the homepage introducing each broadcast program, and the like.
  • the mark etc. which symbolized the said "Linkage” displayed on the title area 173e2 show an information display apparatus as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, even when the broadcast cooperation application is prepared for the said broadcast program. If the execution at 100 is not possible, it may not be displayed. Further, the symbol displayed on the title area 173e2 and indicating "Linkage” indicating that it is a broadcast program for which the above-mentioned executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared can further cooperate with the portable terminal device. Depending on whether or not, the color, shape, font, etc. may be changed. When the cooperative operation with the portable terminal device is possible, a mark in which “Mobile” is symbolized may be displayed together with the mark in which “Linkage” is symbolized.
  • the presence or absence of the display of the mark “Linkage” and the mark “Mobile” are described in advance in the EIT information including detailed information of each broadcast program. Whether it is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the embodiment is prepared, and whether or not the executable broadcast cooperation application can cooperate with a mobile terminal device, It may be controlled by acquiring information such as. Alternatively, the information acquired from program distribution information of a digital broadcast program prepared in a predetermined server device on the Internet 200 may be an electronic program guide created based on a program information data string acquired from a broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service. It may be added.
  • the EPG display screen 173e With a mark that symbolizes "Linkage” indicating that it is a broadcast program for which an executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared, and a cooperative operation with a mobile terminal device
  • the sign of “Mobile” indicating “” it is possible for the user to easily grasp the support situation of the broadcast program in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the broadcast communication cooperation service.
  • the mark obtained by symbolizing predetermined characters representing the attributes of each of the broadcast programs may be substituted for the characters themselves, sentences, and the like.
  • the support status of each broadcast program to the broadcast communication cooperation service may be indicated.
  • the mark “Linkage” and the mark “Mobile” are not usually displayed in the title area 173e2, and pop up only when each broadcast program is selected by the program selection cursor 173e4. It may be displayed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a function of performing viewing reservation and / or recording reservation for each broadcast program on the EPG display screen 173e. For example, while the EPG display screen 173e is displayed, the program selection cursor 173e4 on the EPG display screen 173e is moved using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and an arbitrary broadcast program is moved with the enter key 741ad. By selecting, the view reservation and / or the recording reservation of the selected broadcast program are performed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can grasp the information of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application prepared for each broadcast program when the broadcast program is selected by the program selection cursor 173e4. Become. Therefore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can start acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program.
  • the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been made is a broadcast program corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation service and is a broadcast program capable of cooperative operation with the mobile terminal device, for the mobile terminal device
  • the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared in the above may also be acquired and started before reaching the broadcast start time of the broadcast program by the same process as described above.
  • a two-dimensional bar code 173e5 or the like indicating information (location information such as a URL) of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device is displayed on the EPG display screen 173e. , And may prompt the user to download the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the portable terminal device.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 refers to the acquisition destination information of the broadcast cooperation application included in the EPG information, and starts the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program.
  • the load of the service provider server 400 storing the broadcast cooperation application can be dispersed. Also, even if the communication speed of the network between the service provider server 400 and the information display terminal 100 is insufficient, the broadcast cooperation application can be effectively used immediately after the start of the broadcast of the broadcast program. become.
  • FIG. 17 is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of the acquisition sequence of the broadcast cooperative application when the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation of the broadcast program are performed on the EPG display screen 173e.
  • the main control unit 101 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires a program information data string output from the first separation unit 132 (S701).
  • the EPG display screen 173e is displayed on the video display unit 173 (S703).
  • the main control unit 101 When the user selects an arbitrary broadcast program using the operation terminal on the EPG display screen 173e to make a viewing reservation and / or a recording reservation of the broadcast program (S704), the main control unit 101 performs the first separation
  • the program information data string acquired from the unit 132 is confirmed (S705), and the location of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperative application linked to the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been made is further confirmed (S706).
  • the application control unit 161 transmits a transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the confirmed URL (S707).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S 708).
  • the application control unit 161 caches the predetermined broadcast collaboration application distributed from the service provider server 400 and received via the LAN communication unit 121 in the RAM 104 or the storage 110 (S709).
  • Example 2 Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
  • the configuration, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as in Embodiment 1 unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication.
  • the current terrestrial digital broadcast service for delivering HD or lower broadcast programs to a new terrestrial digital broadcast service or the like for delivering UHD broadcast programs.
  • the frequency band that can be used for the terrestrial digital broadcasting service is limited, and in order to start a new terrestrial digital broadcasting service, the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service using the MPEG2-TS system has to be ended. You may not get In this case, the television receiver compatible with the current digital terrestrial broadcasting service currently owned by the user can not be used, which is not preferable.
  • the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcast service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and newly providing a UHD broadcast program etc.
  • a system of possible more preferable terrestrial digital broadcasting service is described.
  • FIG. 18A is a system configuration diagram showing an example of a broadcast system according to the present embodiment for realizing a broadcast communication cooperation system.
  • the broadcast system according to this embodiment includes a broadcast receiving apparatus 100S, an antenna 100a1, a broadcast receiving apparatus 100U and an antenna 100a2, a broadcast station 300B, and a radio wave tower 300t of the broadcast station.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S is a television receiver capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service using the MPEG2-TS system.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1.
  • the display unit (display panel) may have 4K resolution. It may also be able to receive the current BS / CS digital broadcast service.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is a television receiver having a function corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation system of this embodiment, in addition to the reception function of the current terrestrial digital broadcast service using the MPEG2-TS system.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a2.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U can be connected to the Internet (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a net in some cases) or the like through a router apparatus or the like (not shown), and each server apparatus (for example, the broadcasting station 300B) It is possible to transmit and receive data by communication with the server device.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is configured to be able to receive data transmitted via at least a plurality of different transmission paths (two in the example of FIG. 18A, the transmission path of the broadcast wave and the transmission path of the Internet). There is.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U may further be capable of receiving the current BS / CS digital broadcasting service or advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service.
  • the broadcast station 300B is provided with a broadcast facility that produces and distributes (provides a service) a broadcast program to be distributed by a terrestrial digital broadcast service.
  • the broadcast station 300B also includes a content server, an application server, and the like.
  • a content server (not shown) stores metadata such as broadcast programs (moving image content and the like) and program titles of each broadcast program, program IDs, program outlines, performers, broadcast dates and the like.
  • the application server (not shown) is a server device prepared to provide a service by the broadcast communication cooperation system, and stores an application and other data that cooperate with the moving image content and the like stored in the content server.
  • the content server and the application server may further have the functions of the broadcast station server 300 and the service provider server 400 described in the first embodiment.
  • the radio tower 300t transmits digital broadcast waves of a terrestrial digital broadcast service including digital broadcast signals, AIT, control information on application presentation, and the like from the broadcast facilities of the broadcast station 300B.
  • the control information on application presentation is control information on superposition of the broadcast program and the application on the television receiver and whether or not the application can be presented.
  • FIG. 18B is a conceptual diagram showing an example of (A) complementary signal generation processing performed by the broadcast station 300B and (B) complementary (image quality improvement) processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • a broadcast program is produced at 4K (8K) resolution using a UHD (SHD) compatible television camera or editing apparatus.
  • a downconversion + complementing signal generation process is performed to generate a 2K signal to be transmitted by a broadcast wave and a complementary signal to be distributed via a network from the 4K (8K) broadcast program.
  • a 2K signal generated by down-converting from a 4K (8K) broadcast program is transmitted as a broadcast wave similar to the current terrestrial digital broadcast service of the MPEG2-TS system via the radio wave tower 300t.
  • the complementary signal generated by the complementary signal generation process is converted into a complementary data stream, stored in the application server, and distributed via a network such as the Internet.
  • the 2K signal generated by the down conversion may have 1440 pixels ⁇ 1080 pixels or less.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcasting service transmitted from the radio tower 300t and reproduces a 2K signal. Also, processing such as decoding is performed on the complementary data stream acquired via a network such as the Internet, and a complementary signal is reproduced. Furthermore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U generates a 4K (8K) video signal by performing complementation (image quality improvement) processing using the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal.
  • FIG. 18C is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a specific process of the complementary signal generation process performed by the broadcast station 300B.
  • a broadcast program is produced at 4K resolution using a UHD compatible television camera and editing apparatus.
  • the 4K broadcast program is a video signal having 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction ⁇ 2160 pixels in the vertical direction.
  • a complementary signal generation process is performed to generate a 2K signal to be transmitted by a broadcast wave and a complementary signal to be distributed by a net from the 4K broadcast program.
  • the 2K signal transmitted by the broadcast wave selects one pixel from among four adjacent pixels of the 4K broadcast program as one unit area (in FIG. 18C, one unit area of four pixels P00, P01, P10 and P11). (In FIG. 18C, select the pixel P00) to generate by down conversion processing.
  • the down conversion process may be performed by taking the average value of each pixel in the unit area.
  • the down conversion process may be performed by another arithmetic process.
  • the unit area may be a combination of pixels different from those shown in the figure.
  • the down conversion process is performed on each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or on each of the RGB signals.
  • the number of pixels is reduced by the down conversion process, and the 2K signal becomes a video signal having 1920 pixels in the horizontal direction ⁇ 1080 pixels in the vertical direction.
  • the 2K signal is stored in the content server described above.
  • the video signal of the 2K signal is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, addition of various control signals, modulation, etc. in the same manner as the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system, and digital broadcasting from the radio tower 300t of FIG. 18A. It is delivered as a wave. This digital broadcast wave can also be received by a television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service.
  • the complementary signal distributed via the network is generated by the difference operation of the 4K broadcast program and the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q00 of the complementary signal is the difference (that is, "0") between the pixel P00 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q01 is the difference between the pixel P01 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q10 is the difference between the pixel P10 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q11 is the difference between the pixel P11 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal.
  • the complementary signal has data of 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction ⁇ 2160 pixels in the vertical direction.
  • the pixel Q00 of the complementary signal is the difference between the pixel P00 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q01 is the difference between the pixel P01 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q10 is the difference between the pixel P10 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal.
  • the pixel Q11 is the difference between the pixel P11 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal.
  • the difference calculation process is performed on each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or on each of the RGB signals.
  • the complementary signal is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, addition of various control signals, and the like as necessary, and converted into a complementary data stream.
  • the complementary data stream is stored in the above-mentioned application server and distributed via the Internet or the like. Since the complementary signal has a small DC component, high compression efficiency can be expected in the compression coding process.
  • the compression encoding method when compression encoding the complementary signal may be the same as the current terrestrial digital broadcast system. However, it is more preferable to use a compression encoding method having a compression rate higher than that of the compression encoding method used in the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system, because the transmission efficiency is higher.
  • a compression encoding method having a compression rate higher than that of the compression encoding method used in the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system because the transmission efficiency is higher.
  • a 265 / HEVC compression encoding scheme may be used.
  • the MPEG2-TS method may be used
  • the MPEG2-PS Program Stream
  • the MMT MPEG Media Transport
  • Other transmission methods may be used.
  • the MMT (MPEG Media Transport) method is the most preferable in consideration of the easiness of the correspondence to the network distribution of IP transmission and the affinity with the broadcast service.
  • FIG. 18D is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the complementation (image quality improvement) processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio wave tower 300t through the antenna 100a2. Furthermore, the received digital broadcast wave is subjected to processing such as demodulation, channel selection, and decoding to reproduce a 2K signal.
  • the processing such as demodulation, tuning, decoding, etc. may be the same processing as the current television receiver compatible with terrestrial digital broadcasting service.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U acquires the complementary data stream from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet, a router device, etc. (not shown). Further, processing such as decoding is performed on the acquired complementary data stream to reproduce a complementary signal.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U generates a 4K video signal by performing complementation (image quality improvement) processing using the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal.
  • the pixel P00 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q00 (that is, “0”) of the complementary signal.
  • the pixel P01 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q01 of the complementary signal.
  • the pixel P10 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q10 of the complementary signal.
  • the pixel P11 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q11 of the complementary signal.
  • the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are respectively composed of continuous images of about 60 frames (50 frames, 120 frames, etc. may be sufficient) per second.
  • the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are subjected to synchronization processing based on predetermined synchronization information, and complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed between the pixels of each corresponding frame.
  • the complementation (image quality improvement) processing is applied to each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or to each signal of RGB.
  • the 4K video signal generated by the complementation (image quality improvement) processing is further subjected to predetermined image processing and displayed on the display unit (display panel).
  • the complementary data stream distributed via the Internet or the like may have only the complementary signal for the luminance signal and no complementary signal for the color difference signal.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U can reduce the volume of data acquired via the Internet or the like.
  • the 4K video signal generated by the complementation (image quality improvement) processing has a slight reduction in color difference resolution, the luminance resolution is sufficiently secured, and there is no problem in viewing.
  • the complementary data stream distributed via the Internet or the like has both of the complementary signal for the luminance signal and the complementary signal for the color difference signal, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U performs the luminance according to the communication status of the network, etc.
  • the complementary signal related to the signal may be acquired preferentially. In this case, if the communication condition on the Internet is good, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U acquires both the complementary signal for the luminance signal and the complementary signal for the color difference signal, performs the complementary (image quality improvement) processing, and communicates on the Internet etc. If the situation etc. is not good, only the complementary signal related to the luminance signal is acquired and the complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed.
  • the complementary signal generation process shown in FIG. 18C and the complementary (image quality improvement) process shown in FIG. 18D are applicable even if the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 8K resolution. However, in this case, one unit area is composed of 16 pixels, and the complementary signal has data for 7680 pixels in the horizontal direction ⁇ 4320 pixels in the vertical direction, as in the 8K broadcast program.
  • the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t can be received by a television receiver (broadcast receiver 100S) capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1, and demodulates, selects, decodes, etc. the received digital broadcast wave. Process and reproduce the 2K signal.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S can perform predetermined image processing on the reproduced 2K signal and display it on a display unit (display panel).
  • a television receiver that supports only the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can receive only digital broadcast waves and can display 2K video signals.
  • the television receiver (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U) having a function corresponding to the cooperation system can display the 4K video signal and the 8K video signal by receiving the digital broadcast wave and acquiring the complementary data stream.
  • FIG. 19A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the first embodiment, but a video complement / overlap unit 171U is prepared instead of the video superimposing unit 171.
  • the video complementing / superimposing unit 171U complements the 2K signal output from the first video decoding unit 133 and the complementary signal output from the second video decoding unit 153 ( It has a function of generating a 4K (8K) video signal by performing image quality improvement processing.
  • the complementary data stream used for the complementary (image quality improvement) processing is acquired from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the control of the application control unit 161 and / or the application engine 162.
  • the video display unit 173 is a device having a panel resolution of at least 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction ⁇ 2160 pixels in the vertical direction.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U has an operation input unit 170.
  • the operation input unit 170 is an instruction input unit for inputting an operation instruction to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, and in the present embodiment, a remote control receiving unit for receiving a command transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) and a button switch are arranged. It shall be composed of operation keys. Only one of them may be used. Further, the operation input unit 170 may be replaced by a touch panel disposed overlapping the image display unit 173. Alternatively, a keyboard connected to the expansion interface unit 124 may be used. The remote control whose illustration is omitted may be replaced by a portable information terminal 700 or the like having a remote control command transmission function.
  • FIG. 19B is an example of a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, showing a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110.
  • the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is basically the same as the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the first embodiment, but when the receiving function program 1002 stored in the storage unit 110 is expanded in the RAM 104, the broadcast program
  • a complementation (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102u is configured.
  • the complementation (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102 u mainly controls the complementation (image quality improvement) processing executed by the image complementation / superimposition unit 171 U.
  • the above-mentioned complementation (image quality improvement) processing can be executed only by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment, and can not be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S that supports only the current terrestrial digital broadcast service. That is, acquisition of a complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application (complementary data stream or the like) is an effective process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, but an invalid process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S.
  • the application corresponding to the conventional broadcast communication cooperation system can also be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S. Therefore, it is useful if it is possible to identify in advance whether the application to be acquired is a complementary (high image quality processing) processing related application or an application corresponding to a conventional broadcast communication cooperation system.
  • a method of identifying the complement (high image quality) processing related application any one of the following may be performed. The following methods may be combined as appropriate.
  • FIG. 20A shows an example of a data structure of application control information (AIT).
  • AIT contains data carrying additional application information to identify and control the application.
  • the data structure shown in the figure is an example when AIT is described in section format.
  • AIT may be described in XML format.
  • Table_id in the data structure of the AIT shown in the figure is a parameter indicating that this table is an application information table.
  • the application to be controlled by AIT is Whether the application is the complement (high image quality) processing related application of the present embodiment may be identified. That is, a table for specifying and controlling an application corresponding to a conventional broadcast communication cooperation system and a table for specifying and controlling a complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application may be separately prepared.
  • FIG. 20A shows an example of the data structure of the application identifier.
  • Organization_id indicates a business entity (organization) identification number.
  • Application_id indicates an application identification number.
  • the application to be controlled is a complement (high image quality enhancement) of the present embodiment. It may be identified as a processing related application.
  • the predetermined bit of the application identification number is “1”
  • the application to be controlled may be identified as the complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application of the present embodiment.
  • a predetermined flag (“uhd_data_flag” or the like in the figure)
  • whether the application to be controlled is the complement (high image quality processing) processing related application of the present embodiment You may make it identify whether or not.
  • the predetermined flag may be described in a different identifier or descriptor.
  • FIG. 20E shows an example of the data structure of the application descriptor.
  • the application descriptor is placed in the application information descriptor loop of the AIT, and basic information for each application is described.
  • “Application_profile” in the data structure of the application descriptor shown in the figure is a parameter corresponding to the application profile 904 of FIG. 6, and indicates a receiver profile required to execute the application to be controlled by the AIT.
  • this parameter it is possible to confirm whether the application requires the implementation of the complement (high image quality) processing function. That is, when the application requires the implementation of the complementary (image quality improvement) processing function, the application to be controlled may be identified as the complement (image quality improvement) processing related application of this embodiment.
  • the parameters such as “reserved” or “reserved_for_future_use” in the AIT data structure shown in FIG. 20A are preliminary parameters reserved for future use. By assigning a flag to this preliminary parameter, it may be possible to identify whether the application to be controlled by the AIT is a complementary (high image quality) processing related application. A flag may be assigned to a spare parameter of a descriptor placed in the common descriptor loop of the AIT or the application information descriptor loop.
  • the complementary data stream is stored in a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet, such as an application server of the broadcast station 300B.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U accesses the predetermined server apparatus based on the location information acquired from the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service, and acquires a complementary data stream.
  • location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is designated by AIT transmitted by digital broadcast waves
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is designated by the location information based on control of the cooperative application control unit 1102c.
  • Location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be designated in the following format in control information or the like transmitted by digital broadcast waves. The following forms may be combined as appropriate.
  • (1) Format 1 directly specified by AIT When the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is directly specified by AIT, it may be specified using a transmission protocol descriptor in the common descriptor loop of the AIT or in the application information descriptor loop.
  • FIG. 21A shows an example of the data structure of the transmission protocol descriptor.
  • “Protocol_id” in the figure indicates a protocol for transmitting an application, and is “0x0003 (HTTP / HTTPS transmission)” when acquiring a complementary data stream from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet.
  • “Selector_byte” in the figure stores supplementary information defined for each protocol identification.
  • the selector area that describes the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream has a data structure shown in FIG. 21B in the case of HTTP / HTTPS transmission.
  • URL_base_byte shown in the figure, the base part of the URL for acquiring the application is described.
  • “URL_extension_byte” shown in the figure an extension part of a URL for acquiring an application is described. Therefore, the location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be specified by a combination of the above-mentioned "URL_base_byte” and "URL_extension_byte”.
  • FIG. 21C shows an example of the data structure of the simplified application location descriptor.
  • "Initial_path_bytes" in the figure describes the URL of the entry point of the corresponding application.
  • the URL is described as a relative path whose root is the obtainable location of the application specified by the transmission protocol descriptor. That is, the location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be specified by a combination of a transmission protocol descriptor and a simplified application location descriptor.
  • FIG. 21D shows an example of the data structure of the location information descriptor.
  • “Location_type” in the figure indicates the type of location information and the method of specification.
  • FIG. 21E shows a list of location types. When this parameter is "0x05", it is possible to describe a URL that can obtain the corresponding application in "URL_byte”. That is, location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream can be designated by "URL_byte”.
  • the HTML5 application is acquired from the URL specified in the same format as the above (1) to (3), and the complementary data is acquired from the link destination based on the acquired link information of the HTML5 application. You may make it acquire a stream.
  • the HTML5 application or other application is acquired from the specified URL in the same format as the above (1) to (3), and the HTML5 application or other application is executed to execute the complement from the predetermined location A data stream may be acquired.
  • FIG. 21F shows an example of the data structure of the address map table.
  • Network_id in the figure is a network identification for specifying to which network a broadcasting station belongs, which is defined by NSI (Network Information Table) of PSI.
  • Service_id is a service identification for identifying a broadcast service, which is defined by PSI's NIT.
  • “Src_address_32 / 128” and “src_address_mask_32 / 128” are parameters for specifying the transmission source IP address of the IP packet that configures the service, and “dst_address_32 / 128” and “dst_address_mask_32 / 128” configure the service. It is a parameter for defining the destination IP address of the IP packet. In the AMT shown in the figure, the network identification and the service identification and the transmission source / destination IP address of the IP packet constituting the service are described, thereby obtaining an acquisition destination of the complementary data stream related to each broadcasting station (service). Can be specified.
  • AMT illustrated in FIG. 21F is an example of a data structure in the case where a plurality of acquisition destinations of the complementary data stream related to each broadcasting station (service) are simultaneously designated by a loop description.
  • a data structure as shown in FIG. 21G may be used. That is, when each broadcast station (service) prepares an AMT for its own station (service), there is no need to describe the number of service identifications, network identification and service identification in the table, and its own station (service) It is sufficient to indicate only the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream related to.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is not connected to the network at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U does not refer to the AMT even when there is an AMT in the broadcast wave, and thus the acquisition destination It may operate so as not to create an address list. Alternatively, at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is not connected to the network, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U creates the acquisition destination address list with reference to the AMT of the broadcast wave. , And may be stored in a non-volatile memory.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is connected to the network at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U refers to the AMT of the broadcast wave and refers to each broadcast designated by the AMT.
  • the acquisition destination address list may be created and stored in the non-volatile memory only when the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream associated with the station (service) is accessible.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an operation sequence at the time of initial scanning (re-scanning) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 sets an initial frequency value to the tuner / demodulation unit 131, and instructs tuning to the frequency value (S801).
  • the tuner / demodulator 131 succeeds in locking to the set frequency value (S802: Yes)
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires NIT from the reception signal (S803).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires information such as transport stream identification, network identification, etc. from the acquired NIT (S805). Furthermore, distribution system information on the physical conditions of the broadcast channel corresponding to each transport stream identification / network identification is acquired from the distribution system descriptor of the NIT (S806), and a list of service identifications is acquired from the service list descriptor. (S807). If the NIT has a plurality of different data such as transport stream identification, network identification, distribution system information, and a list of service identifications, the processing of S805 to S807 is repeated.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 creates a service list based on data such as transport stream identification, network identification, distribution system information, list of service identification, etc. acquired in the processing of S805 to S807,
  • the service list is stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated at the time of rescanning) (S808).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires an AMT from the reception signal (S809), and further acquires a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams regarding each network identification and service identification stored in the service list ( S810). If the AMT has a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams related to a plurality of network identifications and service identifications, the processing of S810 is repeated. If there are a plurality of AMTs having a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams regarding different network identification and service identification, the processing of S809 to S810 is repeated.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 associates the list of information on the supplemental data stream acquisition destination acquired in the process of S810 with the network identification and the service identification as an acquisition destination address list, in the ROM 103, the storage unit 110, etc. It is stored (updated at the time of rescanning) (S811).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 ends the process.
  • the set frequency value is not the final frequency value of the channel scan range (S812: No)
  • the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulation section 131 is increased (S813), and the processing of S802 to S811 is performed. repeat. In the repetitive process, the process of S808 and the process of S811 are additional writing.
  • one NIT can acquire network identification and service identification related to all services constituting the broadcast network, and can further acquire AMT having a list of information on acquisition destination of complementary data stream related to the network identification and service identification. In the case, the processing of S812 to S813 is unnecessary.
  • the service list and the acquisition destination address list may be one integrated list.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment displays a list of services (service list) that constitute the broadcast network at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change.
  • service list a list of services
  • create / update a list of information (acquisition destination address list) of complementary data stream acquisition destinations corresponding to each service, and further store them in nonvolatile memory such as the ROM 103 or storage unit 110 etc. Is possible.
  • the rescanning for changing the setting is automatically performed when it is detected that the information in the table has been changed by referring to the “version_number” parameter of the NIT or AMT. good.
  • the “version_number” parameters of the NIT and the AMT When a change in one of the "version_number" parameters of the NIT and the AMT is detected, only the information on the table in which the change of the parameter is detected may be automatically updated.
  • the user may be notified that there is a change in the information in the table, and the user may select whether to perform the rescanning.
  • the 2K signal reproduced by receiving the digital broadcast wave and the complementary signal reproduced from the complementary data stream acquired through the Internet or the like are respectively composed of continuous images of about 60 frames per second.
  • the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are subjected to synchronization processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U based on predetermined synchronization information, and complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed between respective pixels of corresponding frames.
  • the synchronization process may be performed by the following method.
  • FIG. 23A is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (System Target Decoder: STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • STD System Target Decoder
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1301 in the figure corresponds to the demultiplexing unit 132 in FIG. 19A.
  • the TS buffer 1311, the multiplexing buffer 1312, the video ES buffer 1313, the video decoder 1314, the reorder buffer 1315, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 correspond to the video decoding unit 133.
  • the TS buffer 1321, the audio buffer 1323, and the audio decoder 1324 correspond to the audio decoding unit 134.
  • the TS buffer 1331, the system buffer 1333, the system decoder 1334, and the system control unit 1335 are not shown in FIG. 19A, but are controlled by the main control unit 101 (or reception function execution unit 1102), and various system information Process (header information etc.)
  • the MPEG2-TS (Transport Stream) output from the tuner / demodulator 131 is input to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1301.
  • the MPEG2-TS is composed of a TS header and a payload.
  • the TS header may include an adaptation field, and a PCR (Program Clock Reference) may be described in the adaptation field.
  • An STC (System Time Clock) unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of PCR that is a relative time based on a reference set on the broadcast side.
  • the STC unit 1336 includes a 33-bit high-order counter and an extension counter that counts 0 to 299 by 9 bits.
  • Each configuration of STD corresponding to MPEG2-TS operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. That is, the STC value of the system clock has a cycle of about 26.5 hours.
  • the payload is composed of PES and sections.
  • PES presentation time information
  • DTS decoding time information
  • the presentation time information and the decoding time information are information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR. That is, video data and audio data transmitted by the MPEG2-TS system are transmitted in a state associated with relative time.
  • the video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 compare the values of PTS (T) and DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1341 corresponds to the demultiplexing unit 152 in FIG. 19A.
  • the video ES buffer 1353, the video decoder 1354, the reorder buffer 1355, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1356 correspond to the video decoding unit 153.
  • the audio buffer 1363 and the audio decoder 1364 correspond to the audio decoding unit 154.
  • the system control unit 1375 is controlled by the main control unit 101 (or the reception function execution unit 1102) to process various system information (header information and the like).
  • the MPEG2-PS Program Stream
  • the MPEG2-PS is composed of a PS pack header, a system header and a PES packet.
  • SCR System Clock Reference
  • the STC unit 1376 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of the SCR.
  • the STC unit 1376 includes a 33-bit high-order counter and an extension counter that counts 0 to 299 by 9 bits.
  • Each configuration of STD corresponding to MPEG2-PS operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. That is, the STC value, which is the relative time of the system clock, has a cycle of about 26.5 hours.
  • the PES packet is composed of a PES header, a video ES and an audio ES, and may be described with presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS).
  • the presentation time information and the decoding time information are information of relative time set based on the value of the SCR. That is, video data and audio data transmitted by the MPEG2-PS system are transmitted in a state associated with relative time.
  • the video decoder 1354 and the audio decoder 1364 compare the values of PTS (P) and DTS (P) with STC (P) under the control of the system control unit 1375 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
  • the difference detection unit 1381 controls the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (PC) of the STC unit 1376 based on the control of the main control unit 101 (or the reception function execution unit 1102). )) To detect differences.
  • the complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 corresponds to the video complement / superimposition unit 171U.
  • a complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 outputs the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 (that is, 2K signal) based on the difference between STC (T) and STC (P) detected by the difference detection unit 1381.
  • the synchronization processing (frame-by-frame timing adjustment) of the output (that is, the complementary signal) of the separation unit 1356 is performed.
  • the selection / multiplexing unit 1383 corresponds to the voice selection unit 172, and performs synchronization processing similar to that of the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382.
  • the difference detection unit 1381, the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382 and the selection / multiplexing unit 1383 may operate with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock of the STC unit 1336.
  • the 2K signal transmitted in the form of MPEG2-TS via broadcast waves and the complementary signal transmitted in the form of MPEG2-PS via the Internet are data streams originally generated from the same 4K broadcast program. Therefore, at the time of data transmission from the broadcasting station 300B, basically, the frame timing of the MPEG2-TS and the frame timing of the MPEG2-PS coincide with each other, and the same reference value indicates each data stream as PCR and SCR. Given to On the other hand, at the data acquisition time of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, the acquisition timing of the MPEG2-PS becomes undefined due to the data transmission delay on the Internet etc., and the frame timing of the MPEG2-TS and the frame timing of the MPEG2-PS are limited. Absent.
  • the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (P)) of the STC unit 1376 do not always match.
  • the difference detection unit 1381 by performing timing compensation processing based on the difference between the STC value (STC (T)) and the STC value (STC (P)) detected by the difference detection unit 1381, the corresponding frame of the 2K signal and the complement signal It is possible to synchronize the output timing of
  • FIG. 23B A block diagram of an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in this case is shown in FIG. 23B.
  • STD virtual decoder
  • difference detection section 1381 detects the difference between the STC value (STC1) of STC section 1336 and the STC value (STC2) of STC section 1436.
  • the complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 outputs the output (that is, 2K signal) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 and the output (multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1416) based on the difference between STC1 and STC2 detected by the difference detection unit 1381. That is, synchronous processing of the complementary signal is performed.
  • FIG. 23C is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. Basically, the configuration is the same as that of the STD example shown in FIG. 23A.
  • STD virtual decoder
  • the STC unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of PCR that is the relative time of the MPEG2-TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131. Also, the whole configuration of FIG. 6 operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described when the payload of the MPEG2-TS is PES is information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR. Further, presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described in the PES packet of MPEG2-PS are also information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR.
  • PTS Presentation time information
  • DTS decoding time information
  • the video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 control the output timing of the video data and the audio data by comparing the value of PTS (T) or DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335. Do. Also, the video decoder 1354 and the audio decoder 1364 compare the values of PTS (P) and DTS (P) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1375 to output video data and audio data. Control.
  • the system control unit 1335 and the system control unit 1375 may be integrated.
  • the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1392 does not need to perform synchronization processing based on the difference in STC value such as the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382, and It is possible to synchronize the output of the separating unit 1316 (ie, 2K signal) and the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1356 (ie, the complementary signal). The same applies to the selection / multiplexing unit 1393.
  • FIG. 23D is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
  • STD virtual decoder
  • the complementary data stream is transmitted from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet as a stream of IP (Internet Protocol) packets using, for example, the MMT method as the transport method.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the IP packet buffer 1441 is included in the configuration of the streaming reception unit 151 of FIG. 19A.
  • the multiplexing / separation unit 1442 corresponds to the separation unit 152.
  • the MMTP buffer 1451, the pre-decoding buffer 1453, the video decoder 1454, the reorder buffer 1455, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 correspond to the video decoding unit 153.
  • the MMTP buffer 1461, the pre-decoding buffer 1463 and the audio decoder 1464 correspond to the speech decoding unit 154.
  • the MMTP buffer 1471, the pre-decoding buffer 1473, the system decoder 1474, and the system control unit 1475 are not shown in FIG. 19A, but are controlled by the main control unit 101 (or reception function execution unit 1102). Process information (header information etc.).
  • the IP packet output from the streaming reception processing unit 151 is input to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1442.
  • the IP packet in NTP (Network Time Protocol) format separated by the multiplexing / separation unit 1442 is input to the STC unit 1476.
  • an MMTP (MMT Protocol) packet is stored in the payload of the IP packet.
  • the MMTP payload of the MMTP packet includes control information such as MFU (Media Fragment Unit) / MPU (Media Processing Unit) of video and audio signals, MFU / MPU such as data content, and MMT-SI (Signaling Information).
  • the STC unit 1476 is a system clock that operates with reference to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is an absolute time described in the NTP.
  • the STC unit 1476 is composed of a 32-bit high-order counter that counts seconds and a 24-bit low-order count that counts seconds or less.
  • Each configuration of STD corresponding to MMT operates with a basic clock of about 16.8 M (2 to the power of 24) Hz synchronized with the system clock (when the number of bits of the lower counter is n, the basic clock is (2 N) may be Hz).
  • Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) of video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU may be described in MMT-SI or the like of the MMTP payload.
  • the presentation time information and the decoding time information are the "mpu_presentation_time” parameter of the MPU time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 23E, the "mpu_decoding_time_offset” parameter and the "dts_pts_offest" parameter of the MPU extended time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 23F, and "pts_offset”. It is absolute time information calculated from parameters and the like.
  • the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter is information set in the 64-bit NTP timestamp format.
  • video data and audio data transmitted by the MMT method are transmitted in a state associated with absolute time.
  • the video decoder 1454 and the audio decoder 1464 compare the values of PTS (M) and DTS (M) with STC (M) under the control of the system control unit 1475 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
  • deviation detection unit 1481 determines the STC value (STC (T)) of STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (MTCC) of STC unit 1476. And) to detect the deviation between the 2K signal and the complementary signal.
  • the complement (image quality improvement) unit 1482 corresponds to the video complement / superimposition unit 171U.
  • the complement (image quality improvement) unit 1482 outputs the output (that is, 2K signal) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 and the output (that is, complementation) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 based on the shift amount detected by the shift detection unit 1481. Synchronization processing).
  • the selection / multiplexing unit 1483 corresponds to the voice selection unit 172, and performs the same synchronization processing as the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1482.
  • the shift detection unit 1481, the complement (high image quality formation) unit 1482 and the selection / multiplexing unit 1483 may operate with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock of the STC unit 1336.
  • the STC unit 1336 is composed of a 33-bit + 9-bit counter and has a cycle of about 26.5 hours.
  • the counter value of the STC unit 1336 indicates relative time based on the standard set on the broadcast side.
  • the STC unit 1476 is configured of a 32 + 24-bit counter and has a cycle of about 1193046.5 hours (about 136 years).
  • the counter value of the STC unit 1476 indicates an absolute time. Therefore, the deviation detecting unit 1481 can simply compare the STC value (STC (T)) output from the STC unit 1336 with the STC value (STC (M)) output from the STC unit 1476. It is not possible to detect the amount of deviation of the and complementary signals.
  • an IP stream is delivered from the server of the broadcasting station 300 B that indicates the correspondence between the UTC value, which is the absolute time described in NTP, and the PCR, which is the relative time based on the criteria set on the broadcast side.
  • the receiver can detect the amount of deviation by further referring to the information. Specifically, according to a method of storing information indicating the correspondence of PCR which is relative time in NTP itself transmitting absolute time, or a UTC value which is absolute time described in NTP, and a standard set on the broadcasting side.
  • time correspondence relationship information information indicating the correspondence of counter values based on PCR, which is relative time based on
  • the system control unit 1475 reads “time correspondence relationship information” from the NTP acquired via the STC unit 1476, and the deviation detection unit 1481 reads “time correspondence relationship information”.
  • the control information may be transmitted on the basis of the content itself or the content.
  • the system control unit 1475 acquires “time correspondence relationship information” via the system decoder 1474, and the shift detection unit 1481 selects “time correspondence”.
  • the content itself of the relationship information or control information based on the content may be transmitted.
  • the configuration of the MMT-SI for transmission in the IP stream is the same as that of the MMT-SI employed in the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcast service except for the part described in the embodiment of the present invention. good.
  • FIG. 23G shows an example of the data structure of NTP. Further, “mode” in the data structure of the NTP shown in the figure is a parameter indicating the operation mode of the NTP as shown in FIG. 23H.
  • the operation mode is set to "5 (broadcast)”. Furthermore, the time when the system time was last corrected is described in “reference_timestamp” in NTP long format, and the time of the server that has sent the response to the client is described in “NTP long format” in “transmit_timestamp”. “Origin_timestamp” and “receive_timestamp” store "0".
  • the operation mode of NTP is set to "7 (reserved for private use)” or "0 (reserved)” etc.
  • the system clock that operates based on PCR at "origin_timestamp” has a predetermined reference value (for example, 33 + 9 bits) It is sufficient to describe the time of the timing when all become “0”) in the NTP long form.
  • this information is information indicating a correspondence between a predetermined reference value of PCR and an absolute time, and is an example of “time correspondence information” in the present embodiment.
  • the “time correspondence information” is stored in the “origin_timestamp” portion as an example, but may be stored in other unused parameter portions of the NTP.
  • the deviation detection unit 1481 may convert the STC value (STC (M)) of the STC unit 1476, which is an absolute time, into a relative time based on PCR by referring to the "time correspondence relationship information". It becomes possible. Note that the deviation detection unit 1481 refers to the correspondence information between the reference value of the relative time and the absolute time, depending on the processing configuration of the latter stage, to obtain the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336, which is the relative time. May be converted to an absolute time.
  • the deviation detection unit 1481 refers to the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 that is relative time and the STC value (STC (M)) of the STC unit 1476 that is absolute time, and further, the above-mentioned “origin_timestamp By referring to “time correspondence information” described in (for example, “the time of the timing when the system clock (STC (T) operating based on PCR becomes a predetermined reference value”) It becomes possible to detect the amount of deviation of the complementary signal.
  • time at which the system clock operating based on PCR becomes a predetermined value which is an example of “time correspondence information” is described using one parameter of NTP data structure. Described the method.
  • FIG. 23I is a diagram for describing a configuration of the new descriptor (UTC-PCR reference descriptor).
  • UTC_Reference in the figure is a parameter that describes the value of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is an absolute time corresponding to the value of “PCR_Reference”.
  • PCR_Reference is a parameter that describes the value of PCR, which is the relative time when Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) reaches the value indicated in “UTC_Reference”. That is, at the broadcast station side, the receiver side is described by describing each time of a combination of an absolute time and a relative time in the UTC-PCR reference descriptor to which the time is to correspond, in “UTC_Reference” and “PCR_Reference”. Thus, it becomes possible to grasp the correspondence between the absolute time and the relative time as intended by the broadcasting station.
  • the 56-bit data of “PCR_Reference” is composed of 40-bit upper data and 16-bit lower data.
  • the upper 33 bits of the PCR value may be described in the 40-bit upper data, and the remaining 7 bits may be a fixed value of “0” or “1”.
  • the lower 9 bits of the PCR value may be described in the lower 16 bits of data, and the remaining 7 bits may be a fixed value of “0” or “1”.
  • “UTC_PCR_leap_indicator” inserts Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) reference time from 9:00:00 am on the day before the leap second insertion day in Japan time when leap second adjustment to the transmission system clock is performed.
  • NTP When “time correspondence relationship information” is transmitted using a new descriptor such as a UTC-PCR reference descriptor, NTP does not need to describe “time correspondence relationship information”. In this case, the same NTP as that employed in the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service may be used.
  • the UTC-PCR reference descriptor may be included in any of the tables that make up the MMT-SI.
  • the "time correspondence relationship information" may be described using a private section (a parameter such as "private_data_byte") of a predetermined table. For example, if it is stored in one MPT (MMT package table) of the table of MMT-SI, the correspondence between relative time and absolute time can be set on the broadcast station side on a program basis. Further, for example, if it is stored in one MH-SDT (MH-service description table) of the table of MMT-SI, the correspondence between relative time and absolute time can be set in service unit on the broadcast station side. However, in MH-SDT, since the frequency of update processing on the broadcast station side and the receiver side may not be high, there is a method of storing in MPT (MMT package table) that requires update processing on a program basis. Is more preferred.
  • a parameter indicating the “time correspondence relationship information” may be added to the MPU time stamp descriptor, the MPU extended time stamp descriptor, and the like.
  • the “time correspondence information” may be an H. H. MMU that constitutes the MFU / MPU of the video signal of the MMTP payload.
  • FIG. 23J is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. Basically, the configuration is the same as that of the STD example shown in FIG. 23D.
  • STD virtual decoder
  • the STC unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the PCR value of the MPEG2-TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131. Also, the whole configuration of FIG. 6 operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described when the payload of the MPEG2-TS is PES is information set based on the value of the PCR.
  • PTS Presentation time information
  • DTS decoding time information
  • presentation time information (PTS (M)) of the video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU described in the MMT-SI etc. of the MMTP payload, and decoding time information
  • PTS (H) presentation time information of video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU and decoding time information
  • the presentation time information (PTS (M)) and the decoding time information (DTS (M)) are time information set based on the UTC value, while the presentation time information (PTS (H)) and the decoding time Information (DTS (H)) is information set based on the value of the PCR.
  • the video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 control the output timing of the video data and the audio data by comparing the value of PTS (T) or DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335. Do. In addition, the video decoder 1454 and the audio decoder 1464 compare the values of PTS (H) and DTS (H) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1475 to output video data and audio data. Control. In this case, it is not necessary to refer to the values of PTS (M) or DTS (M) and STC (T) (that is, the respective parameters of the MPU timestamp descriptor and the MPU extended timestamp descriptor). You can also ignore NTP.
  • the system control unit 1335 and the system control unit 1475 may be integrated.
  • the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1492 does not need to perform synchronization processing based on the difference of STC values like the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1482, and It is possible to synchronize the output of the separating unit 1316 (ie, 2K signal) and the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 (ie, the complementary signal). The same applies to the selection / multiplexing unit 1493.
  • the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and can provide the UHD broadcast program.
  • System of various digital terrestrial broadcasting services can be realized. That is, it is possible to execute functions with higher added value.
  • Example 3 The third embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the configuration, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as in Embodiment 2 unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, the difference between the present embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication.
  • the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal has been described, but in the present embodiment, the extension processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal is described.
  • FIG. 24A is a conceptual diagram showing an example of (A) additional audio data generation processing performed by the broadcast station 300B and (B) multi-channeling processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2.
  • the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 22.2 channels of audio data.
  • downmix + additional audio data generation processing is performed to generate 5.1ch audio data to be transmitted by broadcast waves and additional audio data to be distributed by net from the 22.2ch audio data.
  • the 5.1 ch audio data generated by downmixing 22.2 ch audio data is transmitted as a broadcast wave via the radio wave tower 300t.
  • the additional audio data generated in the additional audio data generation process is converted into an additional audio data stream, stored in the application server, and distributed via the Internet or the like.
  • the broadcast reception apparatus 100U2 receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t, and reproduces 5.1 ch audio data.
  • processing such as decoding is performed on the additional audio data stream acquired via the Internet or the like to reproduce additional audio data.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 generates 22.2 ch audio data by performing multi-channel processing using the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and additional audio data.
  • the screen 100s in the figure may be a television receiver or the like. That is, the television receiver or the like is the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 of this embodiment.
  • the screen 100s may be a monitor apparatus or the like for displaying an output image of the DVD recorder, STB or the like.
  • 24 speakers are three-dimensionally arranged in three layers.
  • left side (SiL) speaker 841, right side (SiR) speaker 845, rear left side (BL) speaker 851, rear center (BC) speaker 853 and rear right side (BR) speaker 855 Is placed.
  • a speaker 861 at the front left (BtFL), a speaker 863 at the front center (BtFC), and a speaker 865 at the front right (BtFR) are disposed, and further for low frequency effects (LFE1 and LFE2) Speakers 872 and 874 are arranged.
  • FIG. 24C is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a specific process of the additional sound data generation process performed by the broadcast station 300B.
  • the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 22.2 channels of audio data.
  • the video resolution may be 2K or 4K (8K).
  • the broadcasting station 300 B From the audio data of 22.2 ch, the broadcasting station 300 B generates 5.1 ch of audio data to be transmitted by broadcast wave and additional audio data to be distributed by net.
  • the 5.1 ch audio data to be transmitted by broadcast waves is calculated by an arithmetic processing (downmix processing) using 22.2 ch audio data.
  • An example of an arithmetic expression for calculating 5.1ch audio data is shown below.
  • Front left ch: L FL + ⁇ FLc + ⁇ SiL + ⁇ (TpFL + ⁇ TpSiL + BtFL)
  • Front right ch: R FR + ⁇ FRc + ⁇ SiR + ⁇ (TpFR + ⁇ TpSiR + BtFR)
  • Front center ch: C FC + ⁇ FLc + ⁇ FRc + ⁇ (TpFC + ⁇ TpC + BtFC)
  • Low range effect ch: LFE ⁇ (LFE1 + LFE2)
  • Rear left ch: LS BL + ⁇ BC + ⁇ SiL + ⁇ ( ⁇ TpC + TpBL + ⁇ TpSiL + ⁇ TpBC)
  • Rear right ch: RS BR + ⁇ BC + ⁇ SiR + ⁇ ( ⁇ TpC + TpBR + ⁇ TpSiR + ⁇ TpBC) ( ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ : downmix coefficient)
  • the additional audio data distributed via the net is audio data for 17.1 ch excluding audio data of a position corresponding to the calculated 5.1 ch audio data and the speaker arrangement among the 22.2 ch audio data . That is, it excludes the sound data of 5.1ch (L / R / C / LFE / LS / RS) and 22.2ch of voice data (FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR) corresponding to the speaker arrangement 17 It is the audio data of 1ch (FLc / FRc / BC / SiL / SiR / TpFL / TpFC / TpC / TpBL / TpBR / TpSiL / TpSiR / TpBC / BtFC / BtFL / BtFR / LFE2).
  • the audio data for addition is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, various control signals, addition of the downmix coefficient used for the above-described operation, etc., as necessary, and converted into an audio data stream for addition.
  • the additional audio data stream is stored in the above-mentioned application server and distributed via the Internet or the like.
  • the distribution via the Internet or the like may be performed in the form of MPEG2-TS or MPEG2-PS, or may be performed in the MMT form.
  • the additional audio data may be delivered as it is all of the 22.2 ch audio data of the broadcast program.
  • FIG. 24D is a conceptual diagram showing an example of multi-channeling processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a2. Further, the received digital broadcast wave is subjected to processing such as demodulation, channel selection, and decoding to reproduce 5.1 ch audio data.
  • the processing such as demodulation, tuning, decoding, etc. may be the same processing as the current television receiver compatible with terrestrial digital broadcasting service.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 acquires the additional audio data stream from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet, a router device, etc. (not shown). Furthermore, processing such as decoding is performed on the acquired additional audio data stream to reproduce additional audio data.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 further generates 22.2 ch audio data by performing multi-channel processing using the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and additional audio data.
  • voice data (voice data for 5.1 ch: voice data for 5.1 ch: FL / FR / FC) is lacking in voice data (voice data for 17.1 ch) delivered as voice data for addition via the Internet etc.
  • / LFE1 / BL / BR) is calculated by arithmetic processing (mixing processing) using 5.1ch of audio data reproduced from the broadcast wave and the additional audio data.
  • the sound data of 22.2 ch is generated by combining the sound data of 5.1 ch calculated by the calculation processing (mixing processing) and the sound data of 17.1 ch of the addition sound data.
  • An example of an arithmetic expression for calculating FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR of 22.2 ch audio data is shown below.
  • Rear left ch: BL LS- ⁇ BC + ⁇ SiL + ⁇ ( ⁇ TpC + TpBL + ⁇ TpSiL + ⁇ TpBC) ⁇
  • Rear right ch: BR RS- ⁇ BC + ⁇ SiR + ⁇ ( ⁇ TpC + TpBR + ⁇ TpSiR + ⁇ TpBC) ⁇ ( ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ : down
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 may be configured not to calculate each audio data of FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR by mixing processing calculation.
  • 5.1ch of audio data (L / R / C / LFE / LS / RS) is output as it is as an alternative to each 22.
  • 2ch of FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR audio data You may do so.
  • the remaining channels of 22.2 ch are acquired as additional audio data, and the multi-channeling process is performed to convert it to audio data of 22.2 ch using the original 5.1 ch audio data and the additional audio data. It is good.
  • the audio data of 5.1 ch reproduced from the broadcast wave and 22 acquired via the net may be performed by selecting which of the 2ch audio data is to be used.
  • the synchronization process between the 5.1ch audio data sent out by broadcast wave and the additional audio data delivered via the Internet is performed based on predetermined synchronization information. It is good.
  • the acquisition destination of the additional audio data stream may be designated as in the second embodiment.
  • the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t can be received by a television receiver (broadcast receiver 100S) capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1, and demodulates, selects, decodes, etc. the received digital broadcast wave.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S can perform predetermined audio processing on the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and can output it from a speaker or the like. That is, even a broadcast receiving apparatus that is not compatible with the output of audio data of 22.2 ch can receive the digital broadcast wave of the broadcast system of this embodiment.
  • FIG. 25A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in the second embodiment, but a voice mixing / selection unit 172M is prepared instead of the voice selection unit 172.
  • the voice mixing / selection unit 172M adds the 5.1ch voice data output from the first voice decoding unit 134 and the additional voice data output from the second voice decoding unit 154 in addition to the function of the voice selection unit 172.
  • the additional audio data stream used for multi-channel processing is acquired from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the control of the application control unit 161 and / or the application engine 162.
  • the audio output unit 176 may be a digital interface capable of outputting 22.2 ch audio data to a digital amplifier or the like.
  • FIG. 25B is an example of a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110.
  • the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 is basically the same as the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in the second embodiment, but when the receiving function program 1002 stored in the storage unit 110 is expanded in the RAM 104, the broadcast program
  • the reproduction unit 1102a, communication content reproduction unit 1102b, cooperation application control unit 1102c, terminal cooperation management unit 1102d (not shown), complementary (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102u, multichannel processing unit 1102m is configured.
  • the multi-channeling processing unit 1102 m mainly controls multi-channeling processing that is executed by the audio mixing / selection unit 172 M.
  • the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and the height by the 22.2 ch audio data is high. It is possible to realize a terrestrial digital broadcast service system capable of providing high quality sound effects. That is, it is possible to execute functions with higher added value.
  • Example 4 The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the configuration, effects, and the like in the present embodiment are the same as in the second embodiment and the third embodiment unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, differences between the present embodiment and the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication.
  • the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal and the extension processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal have been described, but in the present embodiment, regarding the user interface when performing each processing described above explain.
  • FIG. 26A is a screen display diagram showing an example of an electronic program guide (EPG) display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2).
  • the EPG display screen 173 f is a distribution schedule of broadcast programs in digital broadcasting service created based on the program information data string acquired by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 U (100 U 2).
  • the EPG display screen 173f is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting (pressing) the program guide key 741a7 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application shown in FIG. 10A or the EPG key of the dedicated remote controller (not shown). .
  • the EPG display screen 173f has a matrix shape in which the vertical axis represents time and the horizontal axis represents service ID (channel) as in FIG. 16A, and detailed information of each broadcast program broadcasted on each channel in each time zone is displayed. indicate.
  • the detailed information 173f1 of each broadcast program mainly includes a title area 173f2 and a detailed explanation area 173f3.
  • In the title area 173f2 in the case where each broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal described in the second embodiment, "4K (8K) Available" is encoded to mean that.
  • the mark 173f4 may be displayed.
  • the mark 173f5 etc. which symbolizes "22.2CH Available” May be displayed.
  • the mark 173f4 obtained by symbolizing the "4K (8K) Available” displayed in the title area 173f2 and the mark 173f5 obtained by symbolizing "22.2CH Available” are various data for addition (the above-described complementary data stream , Even if an additional audio data stream, etc.) is prepared on the application server, as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, the complementation (image quality improvement) processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) or many It may be controlled not to display when the execution of the channelization process is not possible. In addition, even when the above-described respective processes can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2), display is not performed when there is no network connection (that is, various data for addition can not be acquired). You may control it.
  • the program information data string may be distributed in the form of an EIT (Event Information Table).
  • FIG. 26B shows an example of the data structure of the event information table (EIT).
  • Event_id is an identification number of an event (broadcast program), and is event identification information uniquely assigned within the same service.
  • EIT can describe multiple pieces of information on different events of “event_id”, and furthermore, information on each event can be divided into multiple descriptions such as short-form event descriptors and extended-form event descriptors (not shown). May be composed of children.
  • FIG. 26C shows an example of the short event descriptor data structure.
  • Event_name_char in the figure is a parameter in which a program title (title) is described, and "text_char” is a parameter in which a program description (detailed description) is described. A detailed description for each item may be made using an extended event descriptor.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U when each broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal, it is possible to execute the complementation (image quality improvement) process or not Depending on whether or not the network connection is established, the presence or absence of the display of the mark 173f4 or the like that is obtained by symbolizing "4K (8K) Available” may be controlled. Similarly, if each broadcast program is a program compatible with audio signal expansion processing (multi-channeling), whether multi-channeling processing can be performed or if it is network-connected, etc. Accordingly, the presence or absence of the display of the mark 173f5 or the like which is obtained by symbolizing "22.2CH Available" may be controlled. The control of the presence or absence of the display of each mark may be performed by acquiring the program information data string by any of the following methods.
  • the EIT is, for example, A short form event descriptor and a second short form event descriptor are provided.
  • the first short-form event descriptor describes the program title including the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 in "event_name_char”
  • the second short-form event descriptor does not include the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 in "event_name_char”
  • the name is described.
  • the other descriptors may also be provided with a first descriptor and a second descriptor, respectively.
  • the first descriptor group is a first data structure of EIT
  • the second descriptor group is a second data structure of EIT.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can execute the respective processes, or is connected to a network, etc., according to the first descriptor group (the first data structure of the EIT) Interprets one short event descriptor etc.) and generates / displays an EPG, or interprets the second descriptor group (second short event descriptor etc.) which is a second data structure of EIT It may be controlled to generate / display an EPG.
  • the first descriptor group the first data structure of the EIT
  • the second descriptor group second short event descriptor etc.
  • the broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of a video signal or the expansion processing (multichannelization) of an audio signal
  • One EIT may be distributed via a network, and a second EIT used when the broadcast program is not a program corresponding to each of the above processes may be transmitted by broadcast wave.
  • the first EIT has a first data structure, and is composed of the above-described first descriptor group.
  • the first EIT is provided with a first short-form event descriptor in which a program name including a mark 173 f 4 and a mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”.
  • the second EIT includes a second short event descriptor in which a program title not including the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U acquires from the network according to whether or not each of the above processes can be performed or whether it is connected to the network. Is the first descriptor group of the first EIT interpreted to generate / display an EPG, or is the second descriptor group of the second EIT acquired from the broadcast wave generated / displayed the EPG? , May be controlled.
  • a method of adding a mark by the broadcast receiving apparatus A second EIT used when the broadcast program is not a program compatible with the extension processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the extension processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal. Transmit only on the airwaves.
  • the second EIT includes a second short event descriptor in which a program title not including the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”.
  • the broadcast reception apparatus 100U (100U2) stores the ROM 173, the storage 110, and the like in the form of an external character, etc., and the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 and the like, which are symbols "4K (8K) Available" and "22.2CH Available". Keep it.
  • the marks 173f4 and the marks 173f5 may be downloaded in advance via a broadcast wave or a network and stored in the ROM 103, the storage 110, or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) always interprets the second descriptor group of the second EIT acquired from the broadcast wave to generate / display an EPG.
  • the broadcast program is a program corresponding to each of the above processes, for example, from the second short form event descriptor, depending on whether or not each of the above processes can be executed or connected to a network. It may be controlled whether or not the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 read from the ROM 103 or the storage 110 is appropriately added to the acquired program name.
  • FIG. 27 is a screen display diagram showing an example of a program information display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2).
  • the program information display screen 173 g is displayed on the video display unit 173 by pressing a screen display key or the like of a dedicated remote controller (not shown) while viewing a broadcast program.
  • the program information display 173g1 is superimposed and displayed on the viewing screen of the broadcast program.
  • the program information display 173g1 may display a title of a broadcast program, a broadcast start / end time, a service ID (channel), a broadcast station logo, and the like. Furthermore, if the broadcast program is a program compatible with video signal expansion processing (image quality improvement), audio signal expansion processing (multichannelization), etc., the video signal expansion processing (image quality improvement) is applied. "Extended 4K” which means that the displayed video signal is being displayed as a symbol, or that the audio signal to which the extension processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal is applied is being output, "Extended A mark (not shown) obtained by symbolizing “Audio” may be displayed.
  • Extension 4K symbolized marks and “Extended Audio” symbolized marks, etc. are for broadcast programs such as video signal extension processing (high image quality) and audio signal extension processing (multichannel) Even if the program is compatible with the above, as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, display is not performed if execution of complementation (image quality improvement) processing or multichannelization processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is not possible. You may control it. In addition, even when the above-described respective processes can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2), display is not performed when the network connection is not made (that is, various data for addition can not be acquired). You may control it.
  • FIG. 28A is a screen display diagram showing an example of the extended process execution control screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2).
  • the extended process execution control screen 173 h is a data key 741 a 8 of the basic screen 741 a of the cooperation control application shown in FIG. 10A, a d key of a dedicated remote controller (not shown), etc. Is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting (pressing).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) immediately receives the broadcast program corresponding to the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal, the expansion process (multichannelization) of the audio signal, etc.
  • the execution of each process is not started, and the output of normal video and audio signals not subjected to each process is continued.
  • the extended processing execution control box 173h1 is displayed on the video display unit 173.
  • extension process image quality improvement
  • audio expansion expansion processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal
  • video / audio expansion the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal and the expansion processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal are started.
  • data key is selected (pressed) while the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal is being performed
  • the expansion processing execution control box 173h2 is displayed. In the extension process execution control box 173h2, "image extension” is displayed to indicate that it is being executed.
  • extension process execution control box 173h2 When "image extension” is selected again in the extension process execution control box 173h2, the execution of the extension process (image quality improvement) of the image signal is stopped. Similarly, when the data key is selected (pressed) while the expansion processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal and the expansion processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal are being performed, the expansion processing execution control box 173h3 is displayed. In the expansion process execution control box 173h3, “video expansion”, “audio expansion”, and “video / audio expansion” are displayed to indicate that execution is in progress.
  • a normal data broadcast screen may be displayed.
  • the broadcast program being received corresponds to Hybridcast broadcast and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) can display the Hybridcast broadcast screen
  • the video display unit 173 is displayed.
  • the extended process execution control box 173h4 may be displayed.
  • “Hybridcast broadcast” is displayed in place of “data broadcast”. If "Hybridcast broadcast” is selected, the Hybridcast broadcast screen may be displayed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) supports only the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal, “audio extension” and “video / audio extension” are displayed in the extension processing execution control box 173h1. It may not be or may be invalidated. If the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) supports only audio signal expansion processing (multichanneling), "video expansion” and “video / audio expansion” may not be displayed or may be disabled.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U does not correspond to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the expansion processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal, or the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal And even if it is compatible with audio signal expansion processing (multichanneling), when it is not connected to the network, the normal data broadcast screen or Hybridcast is not displayed without displaying the expansion processing execution control box 173d1. The display of the broadcast screen may be started.
  • FIG. 28B shows an operation list of extended process selection control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) when the data key is selected (pressed).
  • the expansion process execution control box 173h1 is displayed by selection (depression) of the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with video / audio extension processing but a program compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, the display of the Hybridcast broadcast screen is started by selecting (pressing) the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with video / audio expansion processing but a program not compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, display of a data broadcast screen is started by selecting (pressing) the data key.
  • the display of the Hybridcast broadcast screen is started by selection (depression) of the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, the data broadcast screen is displayed by selecting (pressing) the data key.
  • the user can select whether to execute the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the expansion process (multichanneling) of the audio signal each time the data key is selected (pressed).
  • the user may select whether to execute each process in advance by setting a menu or the like.
  • the functions and the like of the present invention described above may be realized in hardware by designing part or all of them, for example, by an integrated circuit.
  • the program may be realized by software by the microprocessor unit or the like interpreting and executing an operation program for realizing the respective functions or the like.
  • Hardware and software may be used together.
  • the software for controlling the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after product shipment. Also, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disc, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like. Similarly, the software for controlling the portable information terminal 700 may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 at the time of product shipment. After product shipment, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722 or the like. In addition, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
  • control lines and information lines shown in the drawing indicate those which are considered to be necessary for explanation, and not all control lines and information lines on the product are necessarily shown. In practice, almost all of the configurations may be considered to be mutually connected.
  • 100, 100S, 100U, 100U2 broadcast receiver, 100a, 100a1, 100a2: antenna, 101: main control unit, 102: system bus, 103: ROM, 104: RAM, 110: storage unit, 121: LAN communication unit, 124: extended interface unit 125: digital interface unit 131: tuner / demodulator 132: first separator 133: first video decoder 134: first audio decoder 135: first subtitle decoder 141: data broadcast reception processing unit 142: data broadcast engine 151: streaming reception processing unit 152: second separation unit 153: second video decoding unit 154: second audio decoding unit 155: second subtitle decoding Part 161: Application control part 162: Application engine 171: Video superimposing part 171 U: video complementation / superimposition unit 172: audio selection unit 172 M: audio mixing / selection unit 173: video display unit 174: speaker 175: video output unit 176: audio output unit 181: presentation synchronization control unit , 191 terminal cooperation control unit, 200:

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

This receiving device is provided with: a first data receiving unit that receives data on a first transmission line through which image data corresponding to relative time information is transmitted in a first transport manner; a second data receiving unit that receives data on a second transmission line through which a complementary image data corresponding to absolute time information is transmitted in a second transport manner that is different from the first transport manner; and an image processing unit which improves the image quality of the image data, which has been received by the first data receiving unit, by using the complementary image data received by the second data receiving unit, wherein the image quality improvement in the image processing unit is executed on the basis of information on a correspondence relationship between the relative time information and the absolute time information.

Description

受信装置Receiver
　本発明は、受信装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a receiver.
　デジタル放送サービスの拡張機能の１つに、放送波でデジタルデータを送信し、天気予報やニュース、おすすめ番組等の各種情報を表示するデータ放送がある。データ放送を受信可能なテレビ受信機は既に多数市販されており、また、データ放送受信に関する技術も下記特許文献１をはじめ多数が公表されている。 One of the extended functions of digital broadcasting service is data broadcasting which transmits digital data by airwaves and displays various information such as weather forecast, news, and recommended programs. Many television receivers capable of receiving data broadcasting are already on the market, and a large number of techniques related to data broadcasting reception have been published, including Patent Document 1 below.
特開２００１－１８６４８６公報JP, 2001-186486, A
　データ放送の特徴として、デジタル放送サービスに対応しているテレビ受信機では、単体でデータ放送の受信が可能であり、さまざまな情報を取得／表示することが可能であることが挙げられる。一方、データ放送は電波帯域の制限により送信可能なデータ量が限られるため、高精細な画面表示や高機能なエフェクトを得ることが難しく、このため、付加価値の高い有用な機能を現行のデジタル放送受信機で実行することが難しいという課題があった。 As a feature of data broadcasting, a television receiver compatible with digital broadcasting service can receive data broadcasting alone and can obtain / display various information. On the other hand, it is difficult to obtain high-definition screen display and high-performance effects because data broadcasting is limited in the amount of data that can be transmitted due to the limitation of radio wave band. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute on a broadcast receiver.
　本発明の目的は、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能なデジタル放送受信機を提供することである。 An object of the present invention is to provide a digital broadcast receiver capable of performing functions with higher added value.
　前記課題を解決するための手段として、特許請求の範囲に記載の技術を用いる。 As a means for solving the above-mentioned subject, art indicated in a claim is used.
　一例を挙げるならば、相対時刻情報と対応付けられた映像データを第１のトランスポート方式で伝送する第１の伝送路のデータを受信する第１のデータ受信部と、絶対時刻情報と対応付けられた補完映像データを、前記第１のトランスポート方式とは異なる第２のトランスポート方式で伝送する第２の伝送路のデータを受信する第２のデータ受信部と、前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した映像データを、前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した補完映像データを用いて高画質化する映像処理部と、を備え、前記映像処理部での該高画質化処理は、前記第２の伝送路で伝送される、前記相対時刻情報と前記絶対時刻情報の対応関係に関する情報に基づいて処理が実行される受信装置、を用いる。 As an example, a first data receiving unit that receives data of a first transmission channel that transmits video data associated with relative time information according to a first transport method, and an association with absolute time information A second data receiving unit for receiving data of a second transmission path for transmitting the complement video data of the second transmission method different from the first transport method; and receiving the first data A video processing unit for converting the video data received by the image processing unit into a high image quality using the complementary video data received by the second data receiving unit; A receiving apparatus is used, which performs processing based on information on the correspondence between the relative time information and the absolute time information, which is transmitted through a second transmission path.
　本発明によれば、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能なデジタル放送受信技術を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a digital broadcast reception technology capable of executing functions with higher added value.
実施例に係る通信システムのシステム構成図である。It is a system configuration figure of the communication system concerning an example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のブロック図である。It is a block diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成図である。It is a software block diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送局サーバのブロック図である。It is a block diagram of the broadcasting station server which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係るサービス事業者サーバのブロック図である。It is a block diagram of the service enterpriser server concerning an example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末のブロック図である。It is a block diagram of a portable information terminal concerning an example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末のソフトウェア構成図である。It is a software block diagram of the portable information terminal which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係るアプリケーション制御情報のデータ構成図である。It is a data block diagram of application control information concerning an example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of application start of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of application start of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of application start of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of cooperation of the portable information terminal which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of cooperation of the portable information terminal which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of cooperation of the portable information terminal which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置および携帯情報端末のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of application start of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example, and a portable information terminal. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリの基本画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal concerning an example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリの基本画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal concerning an example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のデータ放送画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the data-broadcasting screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の報知画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the alerting | reporting screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のエラー表示画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the error display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the portable information terminal which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ取得時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of the broadcast cooperation application acquisition of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on an Example. 実施例２に係る放送システムのシステム構成図である。FIG. 7 is a system configuration diagram of a broadcast system according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送システムにおける信号処理の概念図である。FIG. 7 is a conceptual diagram of signal processing in a broadcast system according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送システムの補完信号生成処理を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a complementary signal generation process of the broadcast system according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送システムの補完（高画質化）処理を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a complementation (image quality enhancement) process of the broadcast system according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成図である。FIG. 7 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアプリケーション制御情報のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of application control information according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアプリケーション形式の一覧を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of application formats according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアプリケーション識別子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram of a data structure of an application identifier according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアプリケーション制御コードの一覧を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a view showing a list of application control codes according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアプリケーション記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an application descriptor according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る伝送プロトコル記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a transmission protocol descriptor according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る伝送プロトコル記述子のセレクタ領域のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a selector area of a transmission protocol descriptor according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a simplified application location descriptor according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るロケーション情報記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of a location information descriptor according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るロケーションタイプの一覧を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of location types according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアドレスマップテーブルのデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an address map table according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るアドレスマップテーブルのデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an address map table according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のチャンネルスキャン時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 8 is an operation sequence diagram at the time of channel scanning of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置の仮想デコーダのブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置の仮想デコーダのブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置の仮想デコーダのブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置の仮想デコーダのブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an MPU time stamp descriptor according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram of a data structure of an MPU extended time stamp descriptor according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るＮＴＰのデータ構造の図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram of a data structure of NTP according to a second embodiment. 実施例２に係るＮＴＰの動作モードの一覧を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a list of operation modes of the NTP according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係るＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram of a data structure of a UTC-PCR reference descriptor according to Example 2. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置の仮想デコーダのブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a virtual decoder of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to a second embodiment. 実施例３に係る放送システムにおける信号処理の概念図である。FIG. 14 is a conceptual diagram of signal processing in a broadcast system according to a third embodiment. 実施例３に係る２２．２ｃｈ音声出力のスピーカ配置を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the speaker arrangement | positioning of 22.2 ch audio | voice output which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送システムの追加用音声データ生成処理を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an audio data generation process for addition of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment. 実施例３に係る放送システムの多チャンネル化処理を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing multi-channeling processing of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment. 実施例３に係る放送システムの多チャンネル化処理を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing multi-channeling processing of the broadcast system according to the third embodiment. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a third embodiment. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成図である。FIG. 10 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to a third embodiment. 実施例４に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の画面表示図である。FIG. 16 is a screen display diagram of an EPG display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 実施例４に係るイベント情報テーブルのデータ構造の図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram of a data structure of an event information table according to a fourth embodiment. 実施例４に係る短形式イベント記述子のデータ構造の図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram of a data structure of a short event descriptor according to the fourth embodiment. 実施例４に係る放送受信装置の番組情報表示画面の画面表示図である。FIG. 16 is a screen display diagram of a program information display screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 実施例４に係る放送受信装置の拡張処理実行制御画面の画面表示図である。FIG. 18 is a screen display diagram of an expansion process execution control screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 実施例４に係る放送受信装置の拡張処理選択制御の動作一覧を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an operation list of extended process selection control of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
　以下、本発明の実施形態の例を、図面を用いて説明する。 Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be described using the drawings.
　（実施例１）
　まず、本実施例の放送受信装置で受信可能なデジタル放送サービスの一例を説明する。 Example 1
First, an example of a digital broadcast service that can be received by the broadcast receiving apparatus of the present embodiment will be described.
　例えば、本実施例の放送受信装置で受信可能なＢＳ／地上デジタル放送の一例では、１つのトランスポンダ（周波数チャンネル）に複数のトランスポートストリーム（Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ：ＴＳ）を多重化して伝送可能である。ＴＳは、映像／音声エレメンタリストリーム（Ｅｌｅｍｅｎｔａｒｙ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ：ＥＳ）やプログラム固有情報（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｃ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ：ＰＳＩ）／サービス情報（Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ：ＳＩ）等のデータ列を分割してＴＳヘッダを付加した所定長のＴＳパケットの連続である。 For example, in an example of BS / terrestrial digital broadcasting that can be received by the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment, a plurality of transport streams (TS) can be multiplexed and transmitted on one transponder (frequency channel). TS is a predetermined length obtained by dividing a data stream such as video / audio elementary stream (ES), program specific information (PSI) / service information (SI), etc. and adding a TS header Is a sequence of TS packets.
　ＰＳＩは、ＭＰＥＧ（Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ　Ｅｘｐｅｒｔｓ　Ｇｒｏｕｐ）－２システムの規格で規定された、ＴＳに含まれる各ＥＳがどのプログラムに属するかを識別するための固有情報テーブルである。ＰＳＩは、ＰＡＴ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ａｓｓｏｃｉａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、ＰＭＴ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｍａｐ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、ＣＡＴ（Ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、等で構成される。ＰＡＴは、ＴＳ内に含まれるプログラム一覧をＰＭＴのＰＩＤ（Ｐａｃｋｅｔ　Ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｅｒ）で規定する。ＰＭＴは、各プログラムの構成要素のＰＩＤの規定等を行う。ＣＡＴは、限定受信に関する情報を含む。 The PSI is a unique information table for identifying which program each ES included in the TS belongs to which is defined in the standard of the Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) -2 system. The PSI is configured by a program association table (PAT), a program map table (PMT), a conditional access table (CAT), and the like. The PAT defines a program list included in the TS by PID (Packet Identifier) of PMT. The PMT defines the PIDs of the components of each program. The CAT contains information on conditional access.
　また、ＳＩはＰＳＩを拡張して番組情報等を含めたものであり、社団法人電波産業会（Ａｓｓｏｃｉａｔｉｏｎ　ｏｆ　Ｒａｄｉｏ　Ｉｎｄｕｓｔｒｉｅｓ　ａｎｄ　Ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓｅｓ：ＡＲＩＢ）がＡＲＩＢ　ＳＴＤ－Ｂ１０で規定した電子番組表（Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｇｕｉｄｅ：ＥＰＧ）に関する情報を備える。ＳＩは、ＢＩＴ（Ｂｒｏａｄｃａｓｔｅｒ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、ＳＤＴ（Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ　Ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、ＥＩＴ（Ｅｖｅｎｔ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、ＴＯＴ（Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｏｆｆｓｅｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）、等で構成される。ＢＩＴは、放送局識別情報や系列情報、放送局のＳＩ送信情報等を含む。ＳＤＴは、ネットワークを識別するためのネットワークＩＤやＴＳを識別するためのＴＳ　ＩＤ、ネットワーク内で個々のサービス（所謂チャンネル）を識別するためのサービスＩＤ（所謂チャンネル番号）等の情報を含む。ＥＩＴは、ネットワーク内で個々のサービスを識別するためのサービスＩＤと、各イベント（所謂番組）の名称や放送日時、放送内容等、イベントに関する情報を含む。ＴＯＴは、現在の日付、時刻に関する情報を含む。 In addition, SI is an extension of PSI to include program information etc. An electronic program guide (Electronic Program Guide) defined by ARIB of Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB) according to ARIB STD-B10: Information on the EPG). The SI is configured of a BIT (Broadcaster Information Table), an SDT (Service Description Table), an EIT (Event Information Table), a TOT (Time Offset Table), and the like. The BIT includes broadcast station identification information, sequence information, SI transmission information of the broadcast station, and the like. The SDT includes information such as a network ID for identifying a network, a TS ID for identifying a TS, and a service ID (so-called channel number) for identifying an individual service (a so-called channel) in the network. The EIT includes service IDs for identifying individual services in the network, and information on events such as the name of each event (so-called program), the date and time of broadcasting, and the contents of broadcasting. The TOT contains information on the current date and time.
　また、ＴＳは、復号器における再生タイミングの基準となるＰＣＲ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｃｌｏｃｋ　Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ）情報や、ＡＲＩＢ　ＳＴＤ－Ｂ２４で規定されたＢＭＬ（Ｂｒｏａｄｃａｓｔ　Ｍａｒｋｕｐ　Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ）仕様に基づいてサブセット化されたＢＭＬ文書等を含む。 In addition, TS includes BML documents and the like subsetted based on PCR (Program Clock Reference) information as a reference of reproduction timing in the decoder, and BML (Broadcast Markup Language) specifications defined by ARIB STD-B24. .
　本実施例の放送受信装置では、前記映像／音声ＥＳや各種情報等で構成されたＴＳを受信して復号することにより、放送番組やＥＰＧ、ＢＭＬを用いて制作されたデータ放送画面等をユーザに提供することが可能である。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus of the present embodiment, a user can use a broadcast program or a data broadcast screen produced using EPG or BML as a user by receiving and decoding the TS composed of the video / audio ES and various information etc. It is possible to provide
　また、本実施例の放送受信装置は、デジタル放送サービスにブロードバンドネットワークを利用した機能を連携させ、ブロードバンドネットワークを介した付加コンテンツの取得やサーバ装置における演算処理、携帯端末機器との連携による提示処理等をデジタル放送サービスと組み合わせる放送通信連携システムに対応可能である。前記放送通信連携システムを実現するために、本実施例の放送受信装置はＨＴＭＬ（Ｈｙｐｅｒ　Ｔｅｘｔ　Ｍａｒｋｕｐ　Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ）等で記述されたアプリケーションを実行することが可能であるものとする。また、本放送受信装置が対応する放送通信連携システムでは、拡張したＢＭＬ仕様や放送通信連携システムにおけるアプリケーション制御情報（Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＡＩＴ）およびアプリケーションを放送波で伝送する場合に必要な拡張ＰＳＩ／ＳＩ情報を用いる。なお、ＡＩＴは、アプリケーションの取得先等のアプリケーションを起動するために必要な各種情報や、アプリケーションの起動／終了等を制御する制御情報を提供または周知するための情報である。 In addition, the broadcast receiving apparatus of the present embodiment links the function using the broadband network to the digital broadcasting service, acquires additional content via the broadband network, arithmetic processing in the server apparatus, and presentation processing in cooperation with the portable terminal apparatus Etc. can be compatible with a broadcast communication cooperation system that combines the above with digital broadcast services. In order to realize the broadcast-communication collaboration system, the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment is capable of executing an application described in HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) or the like. Also, in the broadcast communication cooperation system supported by the present broadcast receiving apparatus, an expanded PSI / Application information required to transmit the application control information (Application Information Table: AIT) and the application in the broadcast communication cooperation system by the broadcast wave. Use SI information. The AIT is information for providing or disseminating various kinds of information necessary for activating an application such as an acquisition destination of the application, and control information for controlling activation / termination of the application and the like.
　以上の説明は日本国のデジタル放送サービスをベースにしたものであるが、本実施例の放送受信装置が対応する放送通信連携システムを含め、日本国内のみの適用に限定されるものではない。 The above description is based on the digital broadcasting service in Japan, but is not limited to the application in Japan alone, including the broadcast communication cooperation system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment.
　次に、本実施例における実施形態の具体的な構成例の説明を行う。 Next, a specific configuration example of the embodiment in the present embodiment will be described.
　［システム構成］
　図１は、放送通信連携システムを実現する本実施例の通信システムの一例を示すシステム構成図である。本実施例の通信システムは、放送受信装置１００とアンテナ１００ａ、インターネット等のブロードバンドネットワーク２００およびルータ装置２１０、放送局の電波塔３００ｔ、放送局サーバ３００、サービス事業者サーバ４００、その他のアプリケーションサーバ５００、移動体電話通信サーバ６００と移動体電話通信網の基地局６００ｂ、携帯情報端末７００、で構成される。 [System configuration]
FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an example of a communication system of the present embodiment for realizing a broadcast communication cooperation system. The communication system of this embodiment includes a broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and an antenna 100a, a broadband network 200 such as the Internet and a router device 210, a radio wave tower 300t of a broadcasting station, a broadcasting station server 300, a service provider server 400, and other application servers 500. A mobile telephone communication server 600, a base station 600b of a mobile telephone communication network, and a portable information terminal 700.
　放送受信装置１００は、既存のデジタル放送受信機能に加え、前記放送通信連携システムに対応する機能を有するテレビ受信機である。放送受信装置１００は、電波塔３００ｔから送出された放送波を、アンテナ１００ａを介して受信する。また、放送受信装置１００は、ルータ装置２１０を介してインターネット２００と接続可能であり、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置との通信によるデータの送受信が可能である。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a television receiver having a function corresponding to the broadcast / communication collaboration system in addition to the existing digital broadcast receiving function. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a. Also, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router apparatus 210, and can transmit and receive data by communication with each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
　ルータ装置２１０は、インターネット２００と無線通信または有線通信により接続され、また、放送受信装置１００とは無線通信または有線通信で、携帯情報端末７００とは無線通信で接続される。これにより、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置と放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００とが、ルータ装置２１０を介して、データの送受信を相互に行うことが可能となる。なお、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との通信は、ルータ装置２１０を介さずに、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）やＮＦＣ（Ｎｅａｒ　Ｆｉｅｌｄ　Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ）等の方式で直接通信を行っても良い。 The router device 210 is connected to the Internet 200 by wireless communication or wired communication, and is connected to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by wireless communication or wired communication, and to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication. As a result, each server device on the Internet 200, the broadcast reception device 100, and the portable information terminal 700 can mutually transmit and receive data via the router device 210. Communication between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 may be directly performed by a method such as BlueTooth (registered trademark) or NFC (Near Field Communication) without passing through the router device 210.
　電波塔３００ｔは、放送局の放送設備からデジタル放送信号、ＡＩＴ、アプリケーション提示に関する制御情報、等を含む放送波を送出する。なお、前記アプリケーション提示に関する制御情報とは、テレビ受信機上における放送番組とアプリケーションの重ね合わせやアプリケーションの提示可否に関する制御情報である。また、前記放送局は放送局サーバ３００を備えるものとする。放送局サーバ３００は、放送番組（動画コンテンツ等）および各放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組概要、出演者、放送日時、等のメタデータを記憶し、前記動画コンテンツや各メタデータを、契約に基づいて、サービス事業者に対して提供することが可能であるものとする。なお、サービス事業者に対する前記動画コンテンツおよび各メタデータの提供は、放送局サーバ３００が備えるＡＰＩ（Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ　Ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ）を通して行われるものであって良い。 The radio tower 300t transmits a broadcast wave including a digital broadcast signal, an AIT, control information on application presentation, and the like from a broadcast facility of a broadcast station. The control information on application presentation is control information on overlaying of a broadcast program and an application on a television receiver and whether or not the application can be presented. Further, the broadcasting station is provided with a broadcasting station server 300. The broadcast station server 300 stores metadata such as broadcast programs (video content etc.) and program titles of each broadcast program, program ID, program outline, performers, broadcast date and time, etc., and the video content and each metadata are It shall be possible to provide to the service provider based on the contract. The provision of the moving image content and each metadata to the service provider may be performed through an application programming interface (API) provided in the broadcast station server 300.
　サービス事業者サーバ４００は、サービス事業者が前記放送通信連携システムによるサービスを提供するために用意するサーバ装置である。サービス事業者サーバ４００は、放送局サーバ３００から提供された動画コンテンツおよびメタデータと、放送通信連携システム用に制作されたコンテンツおよびアプリケーションの記憶、管理および配信等を行う。また、テレビ受信機からの問い合わせに対して、提供可能なアプリケーションの検索や一覧の提供を行う機能も有する。なお、前記コンテンツおよびメタデータの記憶、管理および配信と、前記アプリケーションの記憶、管理および配信は、異なるサーバ装置が行うものであっても良い。前記放送局と前記サービス事業者は同一であっても良いし、異なる事業者であっても良い。サービス事業者サーバ４００は、異なるサービス毎に複数用意されても良い。また、サービス事業者サーバ４００の機能は、放送局サーバ３００が兼ね備えるものであっても良い。 The service provider server 400 is a server device that a service provider prepares to provide a service by the broadcast communication cooperation system. The service provider server 400 stores, manages, distributes, etc. the moving image content and metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, and the content and application produced for the broadcast / communication collaboration system. It also has a function to search for available applications and provide a list in response to an inquiry from the television receiver. Note that storage, management, and distribution of the content and metadata, and storage, management, and distribution of the application may be performed by different server devices. The broadcasting station and the service provider may be the same or different providers. A plurality of service provider servers 400 may be prepared for each different service. Also, the broadcast station server 300 may have the function of the service provider server 400.
　その他のアプリケーションサーバ５００は、前記放送通信連携システムに関連する以外の一般的なアプリケーションや動作プログラム、コンテンツ、データの記憶、管理および配信等を行う公知のサーバ装置である。 The other application server 500 is a known server device that stores, manages and distributes general applications, operation programs, contents and data other than those related to the broadcast communication cooperation system.
　移動体電話通信サーバ６００はインターネット２００と接続され、一方、基地局６００ｂを介して携帯情報端末７００と接続される。移動体電話通信サーバ６００は携帯情報端末７００の移動体電話通信網を介した電話通信（通話）およびデータ送受信を管理し、携帯情報端末７００とインターネット２００上の各サーバ装置との通信によるデータの送受信を可能とする。なお、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との通信は、基地局６００ｂと移動体電話通信サーバ６００、およびインターネット２００、ルータ装置２１０を介して行われるものであっても良い。 The mobile telephone communication server 600 is connected to the Internet 200, and connected to the portable information terminal 700 via the base station 600b. The mobile telephone communication server 600 manages telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via the mobile telephone communication network of the portable information terminal 700, and communicates data between the portable information terminal 700 and each server on the Internet 200. Enables transmission and reception. Communication between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be performed via the base station 600 b, the mobile telephone communication server 600, the Internet 200, and the router apparatus 210.
　［放送受信装置のハードウェア構成］
　図２Ａは、放送受信装置１００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。放送受信装置１００は、主制御部１０１、システムバス１０２、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４、ストレージ部１１０、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１、拡張インタフェース部１２４、デジタルインタフェース部１２５、チューナ／復調部１３１、第一分離部１３２、第一映像復号部１３３、第一音声復号部１３４、第一字幕復号部１３５、データ放送受信処理部１４１、データ放送エンジン１４２、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１、第二分離部１５２、第二映像復号部１５３、第二音声復号部１５４、第二字幕復号部１５５、アプリケーション制御部１６１、アプリケーションエンジン１６２、映像重畳部１７１、音声選択部１７２、映像表示部１７３、スピーカ１７４、映像出力部１７５、音声出力部１７６、提示同期制御部１８１、端末連携制御部１９１、で構成される。 [Hardware configuration of broadcast receiving apparatus]
FIG. 2A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. As shown in FIG. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a main control unit 101, a system bus 102, a ROM 103, a RAM 104, a storage unit 110, a LAN communication unit 121, an expansion interface unit 124, a digital interface unit 125, a tuner / demodulation unit 131, a first separation unit 132, First video decoding unit 133, first audio decoding unit 134, first subtitle decoding unit 135, data broadcast reception processing unit 141, data broadcast engine 142, streaming reception processing unit 151, second separation unit 152, second video decoding unit 153, second audio decoding unit 154, second subtitle decoding unit 155, application control unit 161, application engine 162, video superposition unit 171, audio selection unit 172, video display unit 173, speaker 174, video output unit 175, audio output Unit 176, presentation synchronization control unit 181, terminal cooperation control 191, in constructed.
　主制御部１０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従って放送受信装置１００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス１０２は主制御部１０１と放送受信装置１００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。 The main control unit 101 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 102 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 101 and each operation block in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　ＲＯＭ（Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）１０３は、オペレーティングシステムなどの基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラムが格納されたメモリであり、例えばＥＥＰＲＯＭ（Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃａｌｌｙ　Ｅｒａｓａｂｌｅ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍａｂｌｅ　ＲＯＭ）やフラッシュＲＯＭのような書き換え可能なＲＯＭが用いられる。ＲＡＭ（Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）１０４は基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。ＲＯＭ１０３およびＲＡＭ１０４は主制御部１０１と一体構成であっても良い。また、ＲＯＭ１０３は、図２Ａに示したような独立構成とはせず、ストレージ部１１０内の一部記憶領域を使用するようにしても良い。 A ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored, and for example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) or a flash ROM is used. . A random access memory (RAM) 104 serves as a work area when executing a basic operation program and other operation programs. The ROM 103 and the RAM 104 may be integrated with the main control unit 101. Further, the ROM 103 may use a partial storage area in the storage unit 110 instead of the independent configuration as shown in FIG. 2A.
　ストレージ部１１０は、放送受信装置１００の動作プログラムや動作設定値、放送受信装置１００のユーザの個人情報等を記憶する。また、ネットワーク上からダウンロードした動作プログラムや前記動作プログラムで作成した各種データ等を記憶可能である。また、放送波から取得した、或いは、ネットワーク上からダウンロードした、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツも記憶可能である。ストレージ部１１０の一部領域を以ってＲＯＭ１０３の機能の全部または一部を代替しても良い。また、ストレージ部１１０は、放送受信装置１００に外部から電源が供給されていない状態であっても記憶している情報を保持する必要がある。したがって、例えば、フラッシュＲＯＭやＳＳＤ（Ｓｏｌｉｄ　Ｓｔａｔｅ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）などの半導体素子メモリ、ＨＤＤ（Ｈａｒｄ　Ｄｉｓｃ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）などの磁気ディスクドライブ、等のデバイスが用いられる。 The storage unit 110 stores an operation program and operation setting values of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, personal information of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the like. In addition, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded from the network, various data created by the operation program, and the like. In addition, it is also possible to store contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds acquired from broadcast waves or downloaded from the network. The partial or partial area of the storage unit 110 may be substituted for all or part of the functions of the ROM 103. In addition, the storage unit 110 needs to hold stored information even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not supplied with power from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or a solid state drive (SSD), or a magnetic disk drive such as a hard disc drive (HDD) is used.
　なお、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０に記憶された前記各動作プログラムは、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置からのダウンロード処理により更新および機能拡張することが可能であるものとする。 Note that each of the operation programs stored in the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110 can be updated and function expanded by download processing from each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
　ＬＡＮ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ａｒｅａ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ）通信部１２１は、ルータ装置２１０を介してインターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置とデータの送受信を行う。ルータ装置２１０との接続は有線接続であっても良いし、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の無線接続であっても良い。ＬＡＮ通信部１２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。また、放送受信装置１００が、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）通信部やＮＦＣ通信部、赤外線通信部等、他の通信部を更に備えていても良い。 A LAN (Local Area Network) communication unit 121 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 210, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device on the Internet 200. The connection with the router device 210 may be a wired connection or a wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark). The LAN communication unit 121 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like. In addition, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit, an NFC communication unit, an infrared communication unit, and the like.
　チューナ／復調部１３１は、アンテナ１００ａを介して電波塔３００ｔから放送波を受信し、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいてユーザの所望するサービスのチャンネルに同調（選局）する。更に、チューナ／復調部１３１は、受信した放送信号を復調してＴＳを取得する。なお、図２Ａに示した例では、チューナ／復調部が１つである構成を例示しているが、複数画面同時表示や裏番組録画等を目的として、放送受信装置１００がチューナ／復調部を複数搭載する構成としても良い。また、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、前記復調したＴＳに対するアクセス制限の制御等を行っても良い。 The tuner / demodulator 131 receives a broadcast wave from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a, and tunes (selects) to a channel of the service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 101. Further, the tuner / demodulation unit 131 demodulates the received broadcast signal to acquire a TS. Although the example shown in FIG. 2A exemplifies a configuration in which there is one tuner / demodulation unit, the broadcast reception apparatus 100 may be configured as a tuner / demodulation unit for the purpose of simultaneously displaying a plurality of screens and reverse program recording. It is good also as composition equipped with two or more. Also, based on the control of the main control unit 101, control of access restriction to the demodulated TS may be performed.
　第一分離部１３２は、チューナ／復調部１３１から出力されたＴＳを入力し、映像データ列、音声データ列、字幕データ列、番組情報データ列、ＡＩＴデータ列、ＢＭＬデータ列、等の各データ列に分離して出力する。これらのデータ列は、例えば、ＥＳ形式であって良い。第一映像復号部１３３は、第一分離部１３２から入力した映像データ列を復号して映像情報を出力する。第一音声復号部１３４は、第一分離部１３２から入力した音声データ列を復号して音声情報を出力する。第一字幕復号部１３５は、第一分離部１３２から入力した字幕データ列を復号して字幕情報を出力する。 The first separation unit 132 inputs the TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131, and each data such as a video data string, an audio data string, a caption data string, a program information data string, an AIT data string, a BML data string, etc. Separate into columns and output. These data strings may be, for example, ES format. The first video decoding unit 133 decodes the video data sequence input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs video information. The first speech decoding unit 134 decodes the speech data string input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs speech information. The first subtitle decoding unit 135 decodes the subtitle data string input from the first separation unit 132 and outputs subtitle information.
　データ放送受信処理部１４１は、第一分離部１３２から入力したＢＭＬデータ列を復号してＢＭＬ文書を再生する。データ放送エンジン１４２は、ＢＭＬ文書を実行するＢＭＬブラウザであり、データ放送受信処理部１４１で再生されたＢＭＬ文書を実行してデータ放送画面情報を出力する。 The data broadcast reception processing unit 141 decodes the BML data string input from the first separation unit 132 and reproduces a BML document. The data broadcast engine 142 is a BML browser that executes a BML document, executes the BML document reproduced by the data broadcast reception processing unit 141, and outputs data broadcast screen information.
　ストリーミング受信処理部１５１は、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット２００上の各サーバ装置に置かれた動画コンテンツ等にアクセスし、前記動画コンテンツ等のプログラムストリーム（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ：ＰＳ）を取得する。また、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、前記取得したＰＳに対するＤＲＭ（Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｒｉｇｈｔｓ　Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ）処理の制御等を行っても良い。 Under control of the main control unit 101, the streaming reception processing unit 151 accesses moving image content and the like placed on each server device on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121, and Get Program Stream (PS). Further, based on the control of the main control unit 101, control of DRM (Digital Rights Management) processing on the acquired PS may be performed.
　第二分離部１５２は、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１から出力されたＰＳを入力し、映像データ列、音声データ列、字幕データ列、等の各データ列に分離して出力する。これらのデータ列は、例えば、ＥＳ形式であって良い。第二映像復号部１５３、第二音声復号部１５４、第二字幕復号部１５５は、それぞれ、第一映像復号部１３３、第一音声復号部１３４、第一字幕復号部１３５と同様の処理を行うため、説明を省略する。 The second separation unit 152 receives the PS output from the streaming reception processing unit 151, separates the PS into data strings such as a video data string, an audio data string, and a subtitle data string, and outputs the data strings. These data strings may be, for example, ES format. The second video decoding unit 153, the second audio decoding unit 154, and the second subtitle decoding unit 155 perform the same processing as the first video decoding unit 133, the first audio decoding unit 134, and the first subtitle decoding unit 135, respectively. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.
　なお、第一分離部１３２と第二分離部１５２、第一映像復号部１３３と第二映像復号部１５３、第一音声復号部１３４と第二音声復号部１５４、第一字幕復号部１３５と第二字幕復号部１５５、は、それぞれ兼用されていても良い。 The first separation unit 132 and the second separation unit 152, the first video decoding unit 133 and the second video decoding unit 153, the first audio decoding unit 134 and the second audio decoding unit 154, and the first subtitle decoding unit 135 and the second The two subtitle decoding unit 155 may be used in common.
　アプリケーション制御部１６１は、第一分離部から入力したＡＩＴデータ列或いはインターネット２００上の各サーバ装置から取得したＡＩＴファイルに基づいて、放送通信連携システム用に制作されたアプリケーションに関してアプリケーションエンジン１６２に働きかけ、アプリケーション単位のライフサイクルおよびイベントの制御、管理を行う。また、アプリケーションの状態とＡＩＴの指示に依存して、適宜アプリケーションの機能制約の制御を行う。アプリケーションエンジン１６２は、アプリケーション制御部１６１の制御に基づいて、前記放送通信連携システム用に制作されたアプリケーションを取得して実行するＨＴＭＬブラウザである。 The application control unit 161 operates the application engine 162 with respect to the application produced for the broadcast communication cooperation system based on the AIT data string input from the first separation unit or the AIT file acquired from each server apparatus on the Internet 200, Control and manage application-specific life cycles and events. Also, depending on the state of the application and the instruction of the AIT, control of functional restrictions of the application is performed as appropriate. The application engine 162 is an HTML browser that acquires and executes the application produced for the broadcast communication cooperation system based on the control of the application control unit 161.
　映像重畳部１７１は、第一映像復号部１３３から出力された映像情報、第一字幕復号部１３５から出力された字幕情報、データ放送エンジン１４２から出力されたデータ放送画面情報、第二映像復号部１５３から出力された映像情報、第二字幕復号部１５５から出力された字幕情報、アプリケーションエンジン１６２から出力されたアプリケーション実行画面情報を入力して、選択および／または重畳等の処理を行う。映像重畳部１７１は図示を省略したビデオＲＡＭを備え、前記ビデオＲＡＭに入力された映像情報に基づいて映像表示部１７３等が駆動される。また、映像重畳部１７１は、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、必要に応じて、スケーリング処理や第一分離部１３２から出力された番組情報データ列に基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ画面情報の重畳処理等を行う。 The video superimposing unit 171 includes the video information output from the first video decoding unit 133, the subtitle information output from the first subtitle decoding unit 135, the data broadcast screen information output from the data broadcasting engine 142, and the second video decoding unit The video information output from 153, the subtitle information output from the second subtitle decoding unit 155, and the application execution screen information output from the application engine 162 are input, and processing such as selection and / or superposition is performed. The video superimposing unit 171 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the video display unit 173 and the like are driven based on the video information input to the video RAM. Also, the video superimposing unit 171 superimposes the EPG screen information created based on the program information data string output from the scaling processing and the first separation unit 132 as needed based on the control of the main control unit 101. Perform processing etc.
　音声選択部１７２は、第一音声復号部１３４から出力された音声情報、第二音声復号部１５４から出力された音声情報、アプリケーションエンジン１６２から出力されたアプリケーション実行音声情報を入力して、主制御部１０１の制御に応じて適宜前記音声情報を選択して出力する。 The voice selection unit 172 receives voice information output from the first voice decoding unit 134, voice information output from the second voice decoding unit 154, and application execution voice information output from the application engine 162, and performs main control. According to the control of the unit 101, the voice information is appropriately selected and output.
　映像表示部１７３は、例えば液晶パネル等の表示デバイスであり、映像重畳部１７１で選択および／または重畳処理を施された映像情報を放送受信装置１００のユーザに提供する。スピーカ１７４は、音声選択部１７２から出力された音声情報を放送受信装置１００のユーザに提供する。映像出力部１７５は、映像重畳部１７１で選択および／または重畳処理を施された映像情報を出力する映像出力インタフェースである。音声出力部１７６は、音声選択部１７２から出力された音声情報を出力する音声出力インタフェースである。なお、前述のように、放送表示装置１００がテレビ受信機等である場合、映像出力部１７５および音声出力部１７６は本発明に必須の構成ではない。 The video display unit 173 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the video information selected and / or superimposed by the video superimposing unit 171. The speaker 174 provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the audio information output from the audio selection unit 172. The video output unit 175 is a video output interface that outputs the video information selected and / or superimposed by the video superimposing unit 171. The audio output unit 176 is an audio output interface that outputs the audio information output from the audio selection unit 172. As described above, when the broadcast display apparatus 100 is a television receiver or the like, the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176 are not essential components of the present invention.
　提示同期制御部１８１は、放送波から取得したＴＳを復号することにより得られた映像情報や音声情報等と、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置から取得したＰＳを復号することにより得られた映像情報や音声情報等、およびアプリケーションエンジン１６２から出力されたアプリケーション実行画面情報やアプリケーション実行音声情報の、映像表示部１７３およびスピーカ１７４上、或いは、映像出力部１７５および音声出力部１７６上における提示同期の制御を、例えばＰＣＲ情報等に基づいて行う。 The presentation synchronization control unit 181 decodes video information and audio information obtained by decoding the TS acquired from the broadcast wave, and video information obtained by decoding the PS acquired from each server device on the Internet 200. Control of presentation synchronization on the video display unit 173 and the speaker 174, or on the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176 of the application execution screen information and the application execution audio information output from the application engine 162, and audio information, etc. Is performed based on, for example, PCR information and the like.
　端末連携制御部１９１は、外部の携帯端末機器との連携を行う際に、連携機器（携帯端末機器）の発見および認証、放送受信装置１００と前記連携機器との接続、アプリケーションの連携、等の管理および制御を行う。 The terminal cooperation control unit 191 performs, for example, discovery and authentication of a cooperation device (mobile terminal device), connection of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation device, cooperation of applications, etc. when performing cooperation with an external mobile terminal device. Manage and control.
　拡張インタフェース部１２４は、放送受信装置１００の機能を拡張するためのインタフェース群であり、本実施例では、アナログ映像／音声インタフェース、ＵＳＢ（Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓａｌ　Ｓｅｒｉａｌ　Ｂｕｓ）インタフェース、メモリインタフェース等で構成されるものとする。アナログ映像／音声インタフェースは、外部映像／音声出力機器からのアナログ映像信号／音声信号の入力、外部映像／音声入力機器へのアナログ映像信号／音声信号の出力、等を行う。ＵＳＢインタフェースは、ＰＣ等と接続してデータの送受信を行う。ＨＤＤを接続して放送番組やコンテンツの記録を行っても良い。また、キーボードやその他のＵＳＢ機器の接続を行っても良い。メモリインタフェースはメモリカードやその他のメモリ媒体を接続してデータの送受信を行う。 The extension interface unit 124 is an interface group for extending the function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. In the present embodiment, the extension interface unit 124 includes an analog video / audio interface, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) interface, a memory interface, and the like. Do. The analog video / audio interface performs input of analog video signals / audio signals from an external video / audio output device, output of analog video signals / audio signals to an external video / audio input device, and the like. The USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit and receive data. The HDD may be connected to record a broadcast program or content. Also, a keyboard or other USB device may be connected. The memory interface connects a memory card and other memory media to transmit and receive data.
　デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、符号化されたデジタル映像データおよび／またはデジタル音声データを出力若しくは入力するインタフェースである。デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、チューナ／復調部１３１で取得したＴＳやストリーミング受信処理部１５１で取得したＰＳをそのまま出力可能であるものとする。また、デジタルインタフェース部１２５から入力したＴＳやＰＳを第一分離部１３２や第二分離部１５２に入力するように制御しても良い。ストレージ部１１０に記憶したデジタルコンテンツの出力、或いは、ストレージ部１１０へのデジタルコンテンツの記憶を、デジタルインタフェース部１２５を介して行っても良い。デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、ＤＶＩ端子やＨＤＭＩ（登録商標）端子等であって、ＤＶＩ仕様やＨＤＭＩ仕様等に準拠した形式でデータの出力或いは入力がなされるものであって良い。ＩＥＥＥ１３９４仕様等に準拠したシリアルデータの形式で出力或いは入力されても良い。 The digital interface unit 125 is an interface that outputs or inputs encoded digital video data and / or digital audio data. It is assumed that the digital interface unit 125 can output the TS acquired by the tuner / demodulation unit 131 and the PS acquired by the streaming reception processing unit 151 as it is. Further, control may be performed so that the TS and PS input from the digital interface unit 125 are input to the first separation unit 132 and the second separation unit 152. Output of digital content stored in the storage unit 110 or storage of digital content in the storage unit 110 may be performed via the digital interface unit 125. The digital interface unit 125 is a DVI terminal, an HDMI (registered trademark) terminal, or the like, and may output or input data in a format compliant with the DVI specification, the HDMI specification, or the like. The data may be output or input in the form of serial data conforming to the IEEE 1394 specification or the like.
　放送受信装置１００は、テレビ受信機の他、ＤＶＤ（Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｖｅｒｓａｔｉｌｅ　Ｄｉｓｃ）レコーダなどの光ディスクドライブレコーダ、ＨＤＤレコーダなどの磁気ディスクドライブレコーダ、ＳＴＢ（Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｏｐ　Ｂｏｘ）等であっても良い。デジタル放送受信機能および放送通信連携機能を備えたＰＣ（Ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ　Ｃｏｍｐｕｔｅｒ）やタブレット端末、ゲーム機等であっても良い。放送受信装置１００がＤＶＤレコーダ、ＨＤＤレコーダ、ＳＴＢ等である場合、映像表示部１７３およびスピーカ１７４は備えなくとも良い。映像出力部１７５および音声出力部１７６に外部モニタおよび外部スピーカを接続することにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００と同様の動作が可能となる。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be an optical disk drive recorder such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) recorder, a magnetic disk drive recorder such as an HDD recorder, a STB (Set Top Box), or the like in addition to a television receiver. It may be a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, a game machine or the like equipped with a digital broadcast reception function and a broadcast communication cooperation function. When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a DVD recorder, an HDD recorder, an STB or the like, the video display unit 173 and the speaker 174 may not be provided. By connecting an external monitor and an external speaker to the video output unit 175 and the audio output unit 176, an operation similar to that of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment can be performed.
　［放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成］
　図２Ｂは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００のソフトウェア構成図であり、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４およびストレージ部１１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。本実施例においては、ＲＯＭ１０３に基本動作プログラム１００１およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されており、ストレージ部１１０に受信機能プログラム１００２、ＢＭＬブラウザプログラム１００３、ＨＴＭＬブラウザプログラム１００４およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されている。また、ストレージ部１１０は、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツを記憶するコンテンツ記憶領域１０１１、外部の携帯端末機器との連携等の際に使用する認証情報等を記憶する認証情報記憶領域１０１２、その他の各種情報を記憶する各種情報記憶領域を備えるものとする。 [Software configuration of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 2B is a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, showing the software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110. In the present embodiment, the basic operation program 1001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 103, and the reception function program 1002, the BML browser program 1003, the HTML browser program 1004, and other operation programs are stored in the storage unit 110. There is. The storage unit 110 also includes a content storage area 1011 for storing contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds, an authentication information storage area 1012 for storing authentication information and the like used in cooperation with an external portable terminal device, etc. It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing other various information are provided.
　ＲＯＭ１０３に記憶された基本動作プログラム１００１はＲＡＭ１０４に展開され、更に主制御部１０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部１１０１を構成する。また、ストレージ部１１０に記憶された受信機能プログラム１００２、ＢＭＬブラウザプログラム１００３、ＨＴＭＬブラウザプログラム１００４はそれぞれＲＡＭ１０４に展開され、更に主制御部１０１が前記展開された各動作プログラムを実行することにより、受信機能実行部１１０２、ＢＭＬブラウザエンジン１１０３、ＨＴＭＬブラウザエンジン１１０４を構成する。また、ＲＡＭ１０４は、各動作プログラム実行時に作成したデータを、必要に応じて一時的に保持する一時記憶領域を備えるものとする。 The basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 is expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 further executes the expanded basic operation program to configure a basic operation execution unit 1101. The reception function program 1002, the BML browser program 1003, and the HTML browser program 1004 stored in the storage unit 110 are expanded on the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 executes the expanded operation programs to receive them. A function execution unit 1102, a BML browser engine 1103, and an HTML browser engine 1104 are configured. In addition, the RAM 104 is provided with a temporary storage area for temporarily holding data created at the time of execution of each operation program as needed.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部１０１がＲＯＭ１０３に格納された基本動作プログラム１００１をＲＡＭ１０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部１１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, to simplify the description, the main control unit 101 executes the process of controlling each operation block by expanding the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 to the RAM 104 and executing the basic operation program. The unit 1101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　受信機能実行部１１０２は、放送受信機能や放送通信連携機能を実現するために放送受信装置１００の各動作ブロックを制御する。特に、放送番組再生部１１０２ａは、チューナ／復調部１３１、第一分離部１３２、第一映像復号部１３３、第一音声復号部１３４、第一字幕復号部１３５、データ放送受信処理部１４１およびデータ放送エンジン１４２を主として制御する。なお、データ放送エンジン１４２はＲＡＭ１０４上に展開されたＢＭＬブラウザエンジン１１０３で代替されて良い。また、通信コンテンツ再生部１１０２ｂは、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１、第二分離部１５２、第二映像復号部１５３、第二音声復号部１５４および第二字幕復号部１５５を主として制御する。連携アプリ制御部１１０２ｃは、アプリケーション制御部１６１およびアプリケーションエンジン１６２を主として制御する。なお、アプリケーションエンジン１６２はＲＡＭ１０４上に展開されたＨＴＭＬブラウザエンジン１１０４で代替されて良い。端末連携管理部１１０２ｄは端末連携制御部１９１を主として制御する。 The reception function execution unit 1102 controls each operation block of the broadcast reception apparatus 100 in order to realize the broadcast reception function and the broadcast / communication cooperation function. In particular, the broadcast program reproduction unit 1102a includes a tuner / demodulation unit 131, a first separation unit 132, a first video decoding unit 133, a first audio decoding unit 134, a first subtitle decoding unit 135, a data broadcast reception processing unit 141, and data. The broadcast engine 142 is mainly controlled. The data broadcasting engine 142 may be replaced by the BML browser engine 1103 developed on the RAM 104. The communication content reproduction unit 1102 b mainly controls the streaming reception processing unit 151, the second separation unit 152, the second video decoding unit 153, the second audio decoding unit 154, and the second subtitle decoding unit 155. The cooperative application control unit 1102 c mainly controls the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162. The application engine 162 may be replaced by the HTML browser engine 1104 developed on the RAM 104. The terminal cooperation management unit 1102 d mainly controls the terminal cooperation control unit 191.
　前記各動作プログラムは、製品出荷の時点で、予めＲＯＭ１０３および／またはストレージ部１１０に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後に、インターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記各動作プログラムを、拡張インタフェース部１２４等を介して取得するものであっても良い。 Each of the operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage unit 110 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121. In addition, the respective operation programs stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
　［放送局サーバの構成］
　図３は、放送局サーバ３００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。放送局サーバ３００は、主制御部３０１、システムバス３０２、ＲＡＭ３０４、ストレージ部３１０、ＬＡＮ通信部３２１、で構成される。 [Station server configuration]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast station server 300. As shown in FIG. The broadcast station server 300 includes a main control unit 301, a system bus 302, a RAM 304, a storage unit 310, and a LAN communication unit 321.
　主制御部３０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従って放送局サーバ３００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス３０２は主制御部３０１と放送局サーバ３００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。ＲＡＭ３０４は各動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。 The main control unit 301 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast station server 300 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 302 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 301 and each operation block in the broadcast station server 300. A RAM 304 serves as a work area when each operation program is executed.
　ストレージ部３１０は、基本動作プログラム３００１およびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラム３００２を記憶し、更に、動画コンテンツ記憶領域３０１１およびメタデータ記憶領域３０１２を備える。動画コンテンツ記憶領域３０１１は放送局が放送する各放送番組の動画コンテンツ等を記憶する。メタデータ記憶領域３０１２は前記各放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組概要、出演者、放送日時、等のメタデータを記憶する。 The storage unit 310 stores a basic operation program 3001 and a content management / distribution program 3002, and further includes a moving image content storage area 3011 and a metadata storage area 3012. The moving image content storage area 3011 stores moving image content and the like of each broadcast program broadcasted by the broadcast station. The metadata storage area 3012 stores metadata such as a program title of each broadcast program, a program ID, a program summary, performers, and a broadcast date and time.
　また、ストレージ部３１０に記憶された基本動作プログラム３００１およびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラム３００２はそれぞれＲＡＭ３０４に展開され、更に主制御部３０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムおよびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部３１０１およびコンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２を構成する。 Further, the basic operation program 3001 and the content management / distribution program 3002 stored in the storage unit 310 are expanded in the RAM 304, and the main control unit 301 executes the expanded basic operation program and the content management / distribution program. Thus, the basic operation execution unit 3101 and the content management / distribution execution unit 3102 are configured.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部３０１がストレージ部３１０に格納された基本動作プログラム３００１をＲＡＭ３０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部３１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the description, the main control unit 301 executes processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 3001 stored in the storage unit 310 in the RAM 304 and executing the program The operation execution unit 3101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　コンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２は、動画コンテンツ記憶領域３０１１およびメタデータ記憶領域３０１２に蓄積された動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータの管理と、前記動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータを契約に基づいてサービス事業者に提供する際の制御を行う。更に、コンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２は、前記サービス事業者に対して前記動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータの提供を行う際に、必要に応じて、前記契約に基づいたサービス事業者サーバ４００の認証処理等も行う。 The content management / distribution execution unit 3102 manages moving image content and the like stored in the moving image content storage area 3011 and the metadata storage area 3012 and each metadata, and the service business based on a contract on the moving image content etc and each metadata. Control when providing to people. Furthermore, the content management / distribution execution unit 3102 authenticates the service provider server 400 based on the contract, as needed, when providing the moving image content etc. and each metadata to the service provider. Perform processing etc.
　ＬＡＮ通信部３２１は、インターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上のサービス事業者サーバ４００等と通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部３２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。 The LAN communication unit 321 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the service provider server 400 or the like on the Internet 200. The LAN communication unit 321 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
　［サービス事業者サーバの構成］
　図４は、サービス事業者サーバ４００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。サービス事業者サーバ４００は、主制御部４０１、システムバス４０２、ＲＡＭ４０４、ストレージ部４１０、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１、で構成される。 [Configuration of service provider server]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the service provider server 400. As shown in FIG. The service provider server 400 includes a main control unit 401, a system bus 402, a RAM 404, a storage unit 410, and a LAN communication unit 421.
　主制御部４０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従ってサービス事業者サーバ４００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス４０２は主制御部４０１とサービス事業者サーバ４００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。ＲＡＭ４０４は各動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。 The main control unit 401 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire service provider server 400 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 402 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 401 and each operation block in the service provider server 400. A RAM 404 serves as a work area when each operation program is executed.
　ストレージ部４１０は、基本動作プログラム４００１およびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラム４００２、アプリケーション管理／配布プログラム４００３を記憶し、更に、動画コンテンツ記憶領域４０１１およびメタデータ記憶領域４０１２、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３を備える。動画コンテンツ記憶領域４０１１およびメタデータ記憶領域４０１２は、放送局サーバ３００から提供された前記動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータや、前記サービス事業者が制作したコンテンツおよび前記コンテンツに関するメタデータ等を記憶する。アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３は、各テレビ受信機からの要求に応じて配布するための、放送通信連携システムの各サービスの実現に必要となるアプリケーションを記憶する。 The storage unit 410 stores a basic operation program 4001, a content management / distribution program 4002, and an application management / distribution program 4003, and further includes a moving image content storage area 4011, a metadata storage area 4012, and an application storage area 4013. The moving image content storage area 4011 and the metadata storage area 4012 store the moving image content and the like provided from the broadcast station server 300 and each metadata, the content produced by the service provider, the metadata regarding the content and the like. The application storage area 4013 stores an application necessary for realizing each service of the broadcast-communication collaboration system for distributing in response to a request from each television receiver.
　また、ストレージ部４１０に記憶された基本動作プログラム４００１およびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラム４００２、アプリケーション管理／配布プログラム４００３はそれぞれＲＡＭ４０４に展開され、更に主制御部４０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムおよびコンテンツ管理／配信プログラム、アプリケーション管理／配布プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部４１０１およびコンテンツ管理／配信実行部４１０２、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３を構成する。 Also, the basic operation program 4001 and the content management / distribution program 4002 and the application management / distribution program 4003 stored in the storage unit 410 are expanded on the RAM 404, and the main control unit 401 further expands the expanded basic operation program and content management. The basic operation execution unit 4101, the content management / distribution execution unit 4102, and the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 are configured by executing the distribution program and the application management / distribution program.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部４０１がストレージ部４１０に格納された基本動作プログラム４００１をＲＡＭ４０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部４１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the description, the main control unit 401 performs processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 4001 stored in the storage unit 410 in the RAM 404 and executing the program. The operation execution unit 4101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　コンテンツ管理／配信実行部４１０２は、放送局サーバ３００からの動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータの取得、動画コンテンツ記憶領域４０１１およびメタデータ記憶領域４０１２に蓄積された動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータの管理、および各テレビ受信機に対する前記動画コンテンツ等および各メタデータの配信の制御を行う。また、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３は、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に蓄積された各アプリケーションの管理と、前記各アプリケーションを各テレビ受信機からの要求に応じて配布する際の制御と、を行う。更に、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３は、前記各テレビ受信機に対して前記各アプリケーションの配布を行う際に、必要に応じて、前記各テレビ受信機の認証処理等も行う。 The content management / distribution execution unit 4102 acquires moving image content and the like and metadata from the broadcasting station server 300, manages moving image content and the like stored in the moving image content storage area 4011 and the metadata storage area 4012, and each metadata. And control of distribution of the said moving image content etc. and each metadata with respect to each television receiver. Also, the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 performs management of each application stored in the application storage area 4013 and control when distributing each application according to a request from each television receiver. Further, when distributing the respective applications to the respective television receivers, the application management / distribution execution unit 4103 also carries out an authentication process and the like of the respective television receivers as necessary.
　ＬＡＮ通信部４２１は、インターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の放送局サーバ３００や、ルータ装置２１０を介して、放送受信装置１００や携帯情報端末７００と通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部４２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。 The LAN communication unit 421 is connected to the Internet 200, and communicates with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 via the broadcast station server 300 on the Internet 200 and the router device 210. The LAN communication unit 421 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
　［携帯情報端末のハードウェア構成］
　図５Ａは、携帯情報端末７００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。携帯情報端末７００は、主制御部７０１、システムバス７０２、ＲＯＭ７０３、ＲＡＭ７０４、ストレージ部７１０、通信処理部７２０、拡張インタフェース部７２４、操作部７３０、画像処理部７４０、音声処理部７５０、センサ部７６０、で構成される。 [Hardware configuration of mobile information terminal]
FIG. 5A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the portable information terminal 700. As shown in FIG. The portable information terminal 700 includes a main control unit 701, a system bus 702, a ROM 703, a RAM 704, a storage unit 710, a communication processing unit 720, an expansion interface unit 724, an operation unit 730, an image processing unit 740, an audio processing unit 750, and a sensor unit 760. Composed of
　主制御部７０１は、携帯情報端末７００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス７０２は主制御部７０１と携帯情報端末７００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。 The main control unit 701 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire portable information terminal 700. A system bus 702 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 701 and each operation block in the portable information terminal 700.
　ＲＯＭ７０３は、オペレーティングシステムなどの基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラムが格納されたメモリであり、例えばＥＥＰＲＯＭやフラッシュＲＯＭのような書き換え可能なＲＯＭが用いられる。ＲＡＭ７０４は基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。ＲＯＭ７０３およびＲＡＭ７０４は主制御部７０１と一体構成であっても良い。また、ＲＯＭ７０３は、図５Ａに示したような独立構成とはせず、ストレージ部７１０内の一部記憶領域を使用するようにしても良い。 The ROM 703 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system or the like and other operation programs are stored, and for example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM or a flash ROM is used. A RAM 704 serves as a work area when executing a basic operation program and other operation programs. The ROM 703 and the RAM 704 may be integrated with the main control unit 701. Further, the ROM 703 may use a partial storage area in the storage unit 710 instead of the independent configuration as shown in FIG. 5A.
　ストレージ部７１０は、携帯情報端末７００の動作プログラムや動作設定値、携帯情報端末７００のユーザの個人情報等を記憶する。また、ネットワーク上からダウンロードした動作プログラムや前記動作プログラムで作成した各種データ等を記憶可能である。また、ネットワーク上からダウンロードした、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツも記憶可能である。ストレージ部７１０の一部領域を以ってＲＯＭ７０３の機能の全部または一部を代替しても良い。また、ストレージ部７１０は、携帯情報端末７００に外部から電源が供給されていない状態であっても記憶している情報を保持する必要がある。したがって、例えば、フラッシュＲＯＭやＳＳＤ、ＨＤＤ等のデバイスが用いられる。 Storage unit 710 stores an operation program and operation setting value of portable information terminal 700, personal information of the user of portable information terminal 700, and the like. In addition, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded from the network, various data created by the operation program, and the like. In addition, contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds downloaded from the network can also be stored. A partial area of the storage unit 710 may replace all or part of the functions of the ROM 703. In addition, the storage unit 710 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the portable information terminal 700 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a flash ROM, an SSD, or an HDD is used.
　なお、ＲＯＭ７０３やストレージ部７１０に記憶された前記各動作プログラムは、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置からのダウンロード処理により更新および機能拡張することが可能であるものとする。 Note that each of the operation programs stored in the ROM 703 and the storage unit 710 can be updated and function expanded by download processing from each server apparatus on the Internet 200.
　通信処理部７２０は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１、移動体電話網通信部７２２、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３、で構成される。ＬＡＮ通信部７２１はルータ装置２１０を介してインターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置とデータの送受信を行う。ルータ装置２１０との接続はＷｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の無線接続で行われるものとする。移動体電話網通信部７２２は移動体電話通信網の基地局６００ｂとの無線通信により、電話通信（通話）およびデータの送受信を行う。ＮＦＣ通信部７２３は対応するリーダ／ライタとの近接時に無線通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部７２１、移動体電話網通信部７２２、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３は、それぞれ符号回路や復号回路、アンテナ等を備えるものとする。また、通信処理部７２０が、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）通信部や赤外線通信部等、他の通信部を更に備えていても良い。 The communication processing unit 720 includes a LAN communication unit 721, a mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and an NFC communication unit 723. The LAN communication unit 721 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 210, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device on the Internet 200. It is assumed that the connection with the router device 210 is made by wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark). The mobile telephone network communication unit 722 performs telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception by wireless communication with the base station 600b of the mobile telephone communication network. The NFC communication unit 723 performs wireless communication when in close proximity to the corresponding reader / writer. The LAN communication unit 721, the mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and the NFC communication unit 723 each include an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, an antenna, and the like. The communication processing unit 720 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit or an infrared communication unit.
　拡張インタフェース部７２４は、携帯情報端末７００の機能を拡張するためのインタフェース群であり、本実施例では、映像／音声インタフェース、ＵＳＢインタフェース、メモリインタフェース等で構成されるものとする。映像／音声インタフェースは、外部映像／音声出力機器からの映像信号／音声信号の入力、外部映像／音声入力機器への映像信号／音声信号の出力、等を行う。ＵＳＢインタフェースは、ＰＣ等と接続してデータの送受信を行う。また、キーボードやその他のＵＳＢ機器の接続を行っても良い。メモリインタフェースはメモリカードやその他のメモリ媒体を接続してデータの送受信を行う。 The extension interface unit 724 is an interface group for extending the function of the portable information terminal 700, and in this embodiment, is configured by a video / audio interface, a USB interface, a memory interface, and the like. The video / audio interface performs input of a video signal / audio signal from an external video / audio output device, output of a video signal / audio signal to an external video / audio input device, and the like. The USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit and receive data. Also, a keyboard or other USB device may be connected. The memory interface connects a memory card and other memory media to transmit and receive data.
　操作部７３０は、携帯情報端末７００に対する操作指示の入力を行う指示入力部であり、本実施例では、表示部７４１に重ねて配置したタッチパネル７３０ｔおよびボタンスイッチを並べた操作キー７３０ｋで構成されるものとする。何れか一方のみであっても良い。拡張インタフェース部７２４に接続したキーボード等を用いて携帯情報端末７００の操作を行っても良い。有線通信または無線通信により接続された別体の携帯端末機器を用いて携帯情報端末７００の操作を行っても良い。また、前記タッチパネル機能は表示部７４１が備え持っているものであっても良い。 The operation unit 730 is an instruction input unit for inputting an operation instruction to the portable information terminal 700. In the present embodiment, the operation unit 730 includes a touch panel 730t disposed overlapping on the display unit 741 and an operation key 730k in which button switches are arranged. It shall be. Only one of them may be used. The mobile information terminal 700 may be operated using a keyboard or the like connected to the extended interface unit 724. The mobile information terminal 700 may be operated using a separate mobile terminal device connected by wired communication or wireless communication. The touch panel function may be included in the display unit 741.
　画像処理部７４０は、表示部７４１、画像信号処理部７４２、第一画像入力部７４３、第二画像入力部７４４、で構成される。表示部７４１は、例えば液晶パネル等の表示デバイスであり、画像信号処理部７４２で処理した画像データを携帯情報端末７００のユーザに提供する。画像信号処理部７４２は図示を省略したビデオＲＡＭを備え、前記ビデオＲＡＭに入力された画像データに基づいて表示部７４１が駆動される。また、画像信号処理部７４２は、必要に応じてフォーマット変換、メニューやその他のＯＳＤ（Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ）信号の重畳処理等を行う機能を有するものとする。第一画像入力部７４３および第二画像入力部７４４は、ＣＣＤ（Ｃｈａｒｇｅ　Ｃｏｕｐｌｅｄ　Ｄｅｖｉｃｅ）やＣＭＯＳ（Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｍｅｎｔａｒｙ　Ｍｅｔａｌ　Ｏｘｉｄｅ　Ｓｅｍｉｃｏｎｄｕｃｔｏｒ）センサ等の電子デバイスを用いてレンズから入力した光を電気信号に変換することにより、周囲や対象物の画像データを入力するカメラユニットである。 The image processing unit 740 includes a display unit 741, an image signal processing unit 742, a first image input unit 743, and a second image input unit 744. The display unit 741 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the user of the portable information terminal 700 with the image data processed by the image signal processing unit 742. The image signal processing unit 742 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the display unit 741 is driven based on the image data input to the video RAM. In addition, the image signal processing unit 742 has a function of performing format conversion, superimposing processing of a menu or another OSD (On Screen Display) signal, and the like as necessary. The first image input unit 743 and the second image input unit 744 convert the light input from the lens into an electric signal using an electronic device such as a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) sensor. , And a camera unit for inputting image data of surroundings and an object.
　音声処理部７５０は、音声出力部７５１、音声信号処理部７５２、音声入力部７５３、で構成される。音声出力部７５１はスピーカであり、音声信号処理部７５２で処理した音声信号を携帯情報端末７００のユーザに提供する。音声入力部７５３はマイクであり、ユーザの声などを音声データに変換して入力する。 The audio processing unit 750 includes an audio output unit 751, an audio signal processing unit 752, and an audio input unit 753. The audio output unit 751 is a speaker, and provides the audio signal processed by the audio signal processing unit 752 to the user of the portable information terminal 700. The voice input unit 753 is a microphone, which converts a user's voice or the like into voice data and inputs the voice data.
　センサ部７６０は、携帯情報端末７００の状態を検出するためのセンサ群であり、本実施例では、ＧＰＳ受信部７６１、ジャイロセンサ７６２、地磁気センサ７６３、加速度センサ７６４、照度センサ７６５、近接センサ７６６、で構成される。これらのセンサ群により、携帯情報端末７００の位置、傾き、方角、動き、および周囲の明るさ、周囲物の近接状況、等を検出することが可能となる。また、携帯情報端末７００が、気圧センサ等、他のセンサを更に備えていても良い。 The sensor unit 760 is a sensor group for detecting the state of the portable information terminal 700, and in the present embodiment, the GPS reception unit 761, the gyro sensor 762, the geomagnetic sensor 763, the acceleration sensor 764, the illuminance sensor 765, and the proximity sensor 766. Composed of With these sensors, it is possible to detect the position, tilt, direction, movement, and ambient brightness of the portable information terminal 700, the proximity of surrounding objects, and the like. The portable information terminal 700 may further include another sensor such as an atmospheric pressure sensor.
　携帯情報端末７００は、携帯電話やスマートホン、タブレット端末等であって良い。ＰＤＡ（Ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔｓ）やノート型ＰＣであっても良い。また、デジタルスチルカメラや動画撮影可能なビデオカメラ、携帯型ゲーム機等、またはその他の携帯用デジタル機器であっても良い。 The portable information terminal 700 may be a mobile phone, a smart phone, a tablet terminal or the like. It may be a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants) or a notebook PC. In addition, it may be a digital still camera, a video camera capable of capturing moving images, a portable game machine, or the like, or other portable digital devices.
　なお、図５Ａに示した携帯情報端末７００の構成例は、センサ部７６０等、本実施例に必須ではない構成も多数含んでいるが、これらが備えられていない構成であっても本実施例の効果を損なうことはない。また、デジタル放送受信機能や電子マネー決済機能等、図示していない構成が更に加えられていても良い。 Although the configuration example of the portable information terminal 700 shown in FIG. 5A includes many configurations that are not essential to the present embodiment, such as the sensor unit 760, the present embodiment is not limited to these configurations. There is no loss of the effect of Further, a configuration not shown, such as a digital broadcast reception function and an electronic money settlement function, may be further added.
　［携帯情報端末のソフトウェア構成］
　図５Ｂは、本実施例の携帯情報端末７００のソフトウェア構成図であり、ＲＯＭ７０３、ＲＡＭ７０４およびストレージ部７１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。本実施例においては、ＲＯＭ７０３に基本動作プログラム７００１およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されており、ストレージ部７１０に連携制御プログラム７００２とＨＴＭＬブラウザプログラム７００３およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されている。また、ストレージ部７１０は、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツを記憶するコンテンツ記憶領域７０１１、テレビ受信機との連携動作等の際に使用する認証情報を記憶する認証情報記憶領域７０１２、その他の各種情報を記憶する各種情報記憶領域を備えるものとする。 [Software configuration of mobile information terminal]
FIG. 5B is a software configuration diagram of the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment, and shows the configuration of software in the ROM 703, the RAM 704, and the storage unit 710. In the present embodiment, the basic operation program 7001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 703, and the storage control unit 710 stores the cooperation control program 7002, the HTML browser program 7003, and other operation programs. In addition, the storage unit 710 includes a content storage area 7011 for storing contents such as moving pictures, still pictures and sounds, an authentication information storage area 7012 for storing authentication information used in cooperation with a television receiver, etc. It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing various information are provided.
　ＲＯＭ７０３に記憶された基本動作プログラム７００１はＲＡＭ７０４に展開され、更に主制御部７０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部７１０１を構成する。また、ストレージ部７１０に記憶された連携制御プログラム７００２およびＨＴＭＬブラウザプログラム７００３はそれぞれＲＡＭ７０４に展開され、更に主制御部７０１が前記展開された各動作プログラムを実行することにより、連携制御実行部７１０２およびＨＴＭＬブラウザエンジン７１０３を構成する。また、ＲＡＭ７０４は、各動作プログラム実行時に作成したデータを、必要に応じて一時的に保持する一時記憶領域を備えるものとする。 The basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 is expanded on the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 further executes the expanded basic operation program to configure a basic operation execution unit 7101. Further, the cooperation control program 7002 and the HTML browser program 7003 stored in the storage unit 710 are expanded in the RAM 704 respectively, and the main control unit 701 further executes the expanded operation programs to thereby execute the cooperation control execution unit 7102 and The HTML browser engine 7103 is configured. In addition, the RAM 704 is provided with a temporary storage area for temporarily holding data created at the time of execution of each operation program as needed.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部７０１がＲＯＭ７０３に格納された基本動作プログラム７００１をＲＡＭ７０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部７１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, to simplify the description, the main control unit 701 executes the processing of controlling each operation block by developing the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 in the RAM 704 and executing the basic operation program. The unit 7101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　連携制御実行部７１０２は、携帯情報端末７００がテレビ受信機との連携動作を行う際の、機器認証および接続、各データの送受信、等の管理を行う。ＨＴＭＬブラウザエンジン７１０３は、放送通信連携システム用に作成されたアプリケーションを携帯情報端末７００上で実行するＨＴＭＬブラウザである。 The cooperation control execution unit 7102 manages device authentication and connection, transmission and reception of each data, and the like when the portable information terminal 700 performs a cooperation operation with a television receiver. The HTML browser engine 7103 is an HTML browser that executes an application created for the broadcast communication cooperation system on the portable information terminal 700.
　前記各動作プログラムは、製品出荷の時点で、予めＲＯＭ７０３および／またはストレージ部７１０に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後に、インターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部７２１または移動体電話網通信部７２２を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記各動作プログラムを、拡張インタフェース部７２４等を介して取得するものであっても良い。 The respective operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722. In addition, the respective operation programs stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
　［アプリケーション制御情報（ＡＩＴ）の概要］
　本実施例のアプリケーション制御情報（ＡＩＴ）は、放送受信装置１００が対応する放送通信連携機能において、テレビ受信機等（本実施例では、放送受信装置１００）に対して放送サービスに連携するアプリケーション（以下、放送連携アプリと称する場合がある。）の存在を周知し、その制御を指示することを目的とする情報であるものとする。なお、前記放送連携アプリは、（１）放送信号に含まれる起動／終了などの制御信号に基づいて放送受信状態においてのみ動作し、制御信号に基づいて放送リソースへのアクセスが許可される放送マネージドアプリケーションと、（２）起動／終了などを放送信号に制御されない動作形態で、アプリケーション認証などの手段に基づいて放送リソースへのアクセスが許可される放送外マネージドアプリケーションと、（３）放送リソースへのアクセスが許可されない、その他の一般アプリケーションと、に区別されて良い。 [Overview of Application Control Information (AIT)]
The application control information (AIT) according to the present embodiment is an application (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the present embodiment) that cooperates with the broadcast service in the broadcast communication cooperation function supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (the broadcast reception apparatus 100 in the present embodiment). Hereinafter, the presence of a broadcast cooperative application may be referred to) and the information is intended to instruct control thereof. The broadcast cooperation application operates only in the broadcast reception state based on (1) control signals such as activation / termination included in the broadcast signal, and is a broadcast managed where access to the broadcast resource is permitted based on the control signal. (2) an outside-broadcast managed application in which access to the broadcast resource is permitted based on means such as application authentication in an operation form in which the broadcast signal is not controlled by the application and (2) activation / termination etc .; It may be distinguished from other general applications where access is not permitted.
　ＡＩＴの伝送方式としては、セクション形式またはＸＭＬ（ｅＸｔｅｎｓｉｂｌｅ　Ｍａｒｋｕｐ　Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ）形式のＡＩＴをデータカルーセル（Ｄａｔａ　Ｃａｒｏｕｓｅｌ：ＤＣ）方式等により放送波で伝送する方式と、前記セクション形式またはＸＭＬ形式のＡＩＴファイルをインターネット２００上のサーバ装置からｈｔｔｐ（Ｈｙｐｅｒｔｅｘｔ　Ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）またはｈｔｔｐｓ（Ｈｙｐｅｒｔｅｘｔ　Ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ　Ｓｅｃｕｒｅ）等で配信する方式の何れかを用いれば良い。その他の方式を採用しても良い。 As the AIT transmission method, a method of transmitting AIT in the section format or XML (extensible Markup Language) format by broadcast wave by a data carousel (Data Carousel: DC) system, etc., and the AIT file of the section format or XML format in the Internet It is sufficient to use one of the methods of distributing data from the server apparatus on the server 200 using http (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) or https (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure). Other methods may be adopted.
　図６は、ＡＩＴのデータ構成の一例を示すデータ構成図である。ＡＩＴは、主として、アプリケーションタイプ９０１、アプリケーション識別子９０２、アプリケーション制御コード９０３、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４、アプリケーション取得先情報９０５、アプリケーションバウンダリおよびアクセス権限設定９０６、起動優先度９０７、キャッシュ制御情報９０８、サーバアクセス分散パラメータ９０９、等の各情報で構成される。更に、その他の情報が含まれていても良い。 FIG. 6 is a data configuration diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the AIT. The AIT mainly includes an application type 901, an application identifier 902, an application control code 903, an application profile 904, application acquisition destination information 905, application boundary and access authority setting 906, activation priority 907, cache control information 908, server access distribution parameter 909 and the like, each information. Furthermore, other information may be included.
　アプリケーションタイプ９０１は、アプリケーションの記述方式を規定する。本実施例においては、前記アプリケーションの記述方式はＨＴＭＬであるものとする。アプリケーション識別子９０２は、アプリケーション単位を識別するための、事業者を識別する組織識別と事業者毎に採番されるアプリケーション識別とで構成される識別情報である。なお、アプリケーション単位とは、アプリケーション取得先情報９０５で指定されるロケーションに存在するＨＴＭＬ文書をエントリー文書とする、ＨＴＭＬ文書およびその参照リソースの集合である。アプリケーション制御コード９０３は、対象となるアプリケーションに対する動作制御を規定するものであり、（１）自動起動、（２）動作可能、（３）終了、（４）プリフェッチ、のうちの１つが記述される。アプリケーションプロファイル９０４は、アプリケーションが要求するテレビ受信機の機能を示す値であり、テレビ受信機がオプションとして持つ機能を組み合わせて示す。この値を参照することにより前記アプリケーションの利用可否が判断される。 The application type 901 defines a description method of the application. In this embodiment, the description system of the application is HTML. The application identifier 902 is identification information configured to identify an application unit, and includes an organization identification identifying an enterprise and an application identification numbered for each enterprise. Note that the application unit is a set of HTML documents and reference resources thereof, with the HTML document existing in the location specified by the application acquisition destination information 905 as the entry document. The application control code 903 defines operation control for the target application, and one of (1) automatic activation, (2) operation enable, (3) end, and (4) prefetch is described. . The application profile 904 is a value indicating the function of the television receiver required by the application, and indicates a combination of functions that the television receiver has as an option. The availability of the application is determined by referring to this value.
　アプリケーション取得先情報９０５は、アプリケーションの取得先を特定する情報であり、アプリケーション起動時に最初に参照するＨＴＭＬ文書を取得するためのロケーション情報である。アプリケーションは放送で伝送される場合と通信ネットワーク上のサーバ装置に置かれる場合とが想定されるため、アプリケーション取得先情報９０５で特定されるロケーション情報も放送取得と通信取得の両方の場合に対応した規定が行われる。アプリケーションバウンダリおよびアクセス権限設定９０６は、放送マネージドアプリケーションとしての動作可能範囲を１つ以上の領域（ＵＲＬ：Ｕｎｉｆｏｒｍ　Ｒｅｓｏｕｒｃｅ　Ｌｏｃａｔｏｒ）の集合として示す情報である。また、領域毎の放送リソースへのアクセス制限を機能単位に設定する。アプリケーションバウンダリおよびアクセス権限設定９０６により、アプリケーション起動時のエントリー文書からの文書遷移の連鎖による想定外の文書への遷移や不適切な放送リソースへのアクセス等を防止するための文書遷移の範囲を指定する。また、前記文書遷移の範囲内における、領域単位での特定の放送リソースへのアクセス権限を設定可能である。 The application acquisition destination information 905 is information for specifying an acquisition destination of the application, and is location information for acquiring an HTML document to be referred to first when the application is started. Since it is assumed that the application is transmitted by broadcast and is placed on a server device on the communication network, the location information specified in the application acquisition destination information 905 also corresponds to the case of both broadcast acquisition and communication acquisition. A provision is made. The application boundary and access right setting 906 is information indicating an operable range as a broadcast managed application as a set of one or more areas (URL: Uniform Resource Locator). Also, the access restriction to the broadcast resource for each area is set for each function. Application boundary and access authority setting 906 specify the range of document transition to prevent transition to unexpected document or access to inappropriate broadcast resource by chain of document transition from the entry document at application startup. Do. In addition, it is possible to set an access right to a specific broadcast resource in area units within the range of the document transition.
　起動優先度９０７は、放送サービスによるデータ放送とＨＴＭＬ文書による放送マネージドアプリケーションが同時に存在する場合に、どちらを優先して起動するかを規定する。ＰＭＴ上で無条件にデータ放送を最優先と指定すること、ＰＭＴ上で特定のアプリケーションタイプの起動優先順位を指定すること、および起動優先度９０７で対象のアプリケーションの起動優先度を指定すること、が可能であるものとする。キャッシュ制御情報９０８は、アプリケーションの再利用に備えてアプリケーションリソースを保持する場合のキャッシュ制御に用いる情報である。この情報により、アプリケーション終了後も再利用を想定したアプリケーションリソースのキャッシュを行うことが可能となる。サーバアクセス分散パラメータ９０９は、アプリケーションの取得先などにおいてアクセスが集中するサーバの負荷軽減を目的として、アクセスを分散させるためのパラメータセットである。テレビ受信機は、このパラメータの設定に従って、アプリケーション制御コードの適用を確率的に遅延させるように動作して良い。 The activation priority 907 defines which of the data broadcast by the broadcast service and the broadcast managed application by the HTML document is to be launched at the same time. Designating data broadcasting as top priority unconditionally on the PMT, designating activation priority of a specific application type on the PMT, designating activation priority of the target application in the activation priority 907, Shall be possible. The cache control information 908 is information used for cache control when holding application resources in preparation for reuse of the application. This information makes it possible to cache application resources assuming reuse even after the end of the application. The server access distribution parameter 909 is a parameter set for distributing access in order to reduce the load on the server where access is concentrated at the acquisition destination of the application or the like. The television receiver may operate to stochastically delay the application control code application according to the setting of this parameter.
　以下では、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の動作に関して説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
　［アプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス］
　まず、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における、放送波で送信されるＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリの起動処理に関して説明する。本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、ＰＭＴ上の情報およびＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コード９０３、起動優先度９０７等の情報により、放送サービスによるデータ放送と放送連携アプリが同時に存在する場合にどちらを優先して起動するかを規定することが可能である。 [Operation sequence at application startup]
First, start processing of the broadcast cooperation application based on the AIT transmitted by the broadcast wave in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment, when data broadcasting by broadcast service and a broadcast cooperation application exist simultaneously, priority is given to information based on the information on the PMT, the application control code 903 of the AIT, the activation priority 907 and the like. It is possible to define what to do.
　図７Ａは、放送連携アプリが優先して起動するように規定されている場合の放送連携アプリの動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、放送受信装置１００がＰＭＴおよびＡＩＴを適宜確認して所定の放送連携アプリを起動するまでの一連の流れを示すものである。 FIG. 7A is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application in the case where the broadcast cooperation application is defined to be activated preferentially. The figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＴＳを取得すると、次に、主制御部１０１が第一分離部１３２で分離したＰＭＴデータ列を取得して（Ｓ１０１）、ＰＭＴに記述された起動優先度の確認を行う。Ｓ１０１の処理において放送連携アプリの起動優先度が高いことを確認する（Ｓ１０２）と、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ１０３）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション制御コード９０３を確認する（Ｓ１０４）。Ｓ１０４の処理において、アプリケーション制御コード９０３が『自動起動』であった場合、更に、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４を確認し（Ｓ１０５）、前記ＡＩＴに指定された放送連携アプリの実行が可能であることが確認された場合、アプリケーション取得先情報９０５に記述された情報に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリの送信要求を送信する（Ｓ１０６）。 When the tuner / demodulator 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs channel selection processing desired by the user and acquires a TS, next, the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S101), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed. When confirming that the start priority of the broadcast cooperation application is high in the process of S101 (S102), the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S103), and the acquired AIT The application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S104). In the process of S104, when the application control code 903 is "automatic start", the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string is further confirmed (S105), and the broadcast cooperation application designated by the AIT is executed. When it is confirmed that it is possible, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905. (S106).
　前記放送連携アプリの送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて放送受信装置１００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリの配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ１０７）。なお、前記認証処理に関しては公知の方法を用いれば良く、詳細の説明を省略する。次に、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーションエンジン１６２が、アプリケーション制御部１６１の制御に基づいて、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリを起動する（Ｓ１０８）。 The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S107). A known method may be used for the authentication process, and the detailed description will be omitted. Next, the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S108).
　図７Ｂは、放送サービスによるデータ放送を優先して起動するように規定されている場合の放送連携アプリの動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、放送受信装置１００がＰＭＴおよびＡＩＴを適宜確認して所定の放送連携アプリを起動するまでの一連の流れを示すものである。 FIG. 7B is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application in the case where it is defined that the data broadcast by the broadcast service is preferentially activated. The figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＴＳを取得すると、次に、主制御部１０１が第一分離部１３２で分離したＰＭＴデータ列を取得して（Ｓ２０１）、ＰＭＴに記述された起動優先度の確認を行う。Ｓ２０１の処理において放送サービスによるデータ放送の起動優先度が高いことを確認する（Ｓ２０２）と、データ放送受信処理部１４１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＢＭＬデータ列を取得してＢＭＬ文書を再生する（Ｓ２０３）。前記ＢＭＬ文書によりデータ放送の自動起動が設定されている場合、およびユーザが操作端末（携帯情報端末７００、リモコン等）を用いてデータ放送の起動要求を行った（Ｓ２０４）場合、データ放送エンジン１４２が、前記再生されたＢＭＬ文書を実行することによりデータ放送画面情報を生成し、映像表示部１７３に表示する（Ｓ２０５）。 When the tuner / demodulator 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs channel selection processing desired by the user and acquires a TS, next, the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S201), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed. In the process of S201, it is confirmed that the start priority of the data broadcast by the broadcast service is high (S202), the data broadcast reception processing unit 141 acquires the BML data string separated by the first separation unit 132, and the BML document is obtained. It reproduces (S203). When the automatic start of data broadcasting is set by the BML document, and when the user makes a start request for data broadcasting using the operation terminal (the portable information terminal 700, the remote control, etc.) (S204), the data broadcasting engine 142 Then, the data broadcasting screen information is generated by executing the reproduced BML document, and displayed on the video display unit 173 (S205).
　Ｓ２０５の処理の後、或いはＳ２０５の処理と同時に、アプリケーション制御部１６１は、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ２０６）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４を確認する（Ｓ２０７）。Ｓ２０７の処理において、前記ＡＩＴに指定された放送連携アプリの実行が可能であることが確認された場合、前記データ放送画面には前記実行可能な放送連携アプリへのエントリーボタンが表示される。前記エントリーボタンは常に表示しておき、前記放送連携アプリの実行が可能な場合にのみ、配色を非アクティブ色からアクティブ色に変更するようにしても良い。形状を変更することにより、前記エントリーボタンの非アクティブ状態とアクティブ状態を切り替えるようにしても良い。 After the process of S205 or simultaneously with the process of S205, the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S206), and confirms the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string. (S207). When it is confirmed in the process of S207 that execution of the broadcast cooperation application designated by the AIT is possible, an entry button to the executable broadcast cooperation application is displayed on the data broadcast screen. The entry button may always be displayed, and the color scheme may be changed from the inactive color to the active color only when the broadcast cooperation application can be executed. The shape may be changed to switch between the inactive state and the active state of the entry button.
　ユーザが操作端末を用いて前記エントリーボタンを選択する（Ｓ２０８）と、データ放送エンジン１４２は、ＢＭＬ文書を実行してデータ放送画面情報を生成する処理を終了する（Ｓ２０９）。続いて、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ２１０）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション取得先情報９０５を確認する。更に、Ｓ２１０で確認したアプリケーション取得先情報９０５に記述された情報に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリの送信要求を送信する（Ｓ２１１）。 When the user selects the entry button using the operation terminal (S208), the data broadcasting engine 142 executes the BML document and ends the process of generating data broadcasting screen information (S209). Subsequently, the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S210), and confirms the application acquisition destination information 905 of the acquired AIT data string. Furthermore, based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 confirmed in S210, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 (S211).
　前記放送連携アプリの送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて放送受信装置１００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリの配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ２１２）。次に、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーションエンジン１６２が、アプリケーション制御部１６１の制御に基づいて、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリを起動する（Ｓ２１３）。 The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S212). Next, the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S213).
　図７Ｃは、何れの優先起動も規定されていない場合の放送連携アプリの動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、放送受信装置１００がＰＭＴおよびＡＩＴを適宜確認して所定の放送連携アプリを起動するまでの一連の流れを示すものである。 FIG. 7C is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application when no priority activation is defined. The figure shows a series of flow from when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 appropriately confirms the PMT and AIT and activates a predetermined broadcast cooperation application.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＴＳを取得すると、次に、主制御部１０１が第一分離部１３２で分離したＰＭＴデータ列を取得して（Ｓ３０１）、ＰＭＴに記述された起動優先度の確認を行う。Ｓ３０１の処理において放送連携アプリの起動優先度が高いことを確認する（Ｓ３０２）と、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ３０３）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション制御コード９０３を確認する（Ｓ３０４）。Ｓ３０４の処理において、アプリケーション制御コード９０３が『自動起動』ではなく『起動可能』であった場合、放送サービスによるデータ放送と放送連携アプリの何れも起動せずに、放送番組の表示を継続する。 When the tuner / demodulator 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs channel selection processing desired by the user and acquires a TS, next, the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S301), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed. When confirming that the start priority of the broadcast cooperation application is high in the process of S301 (S302), the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S303), and the acquired AIT The application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S304). In the process of S304, when the application control code 903 is not "automatic start" but "startable", the display of the broadcast program is continued without starting any of the data broadcasting by the broadcast service and the broadcast cooperation application.
　Ｓ３０４の処理を終えた後の状態でユーザが操作端末を用いてデータ放送の起動要求を行った（Ｓ３０５）場合には、図７ＢのＳ２０５以降の処理と同様に、ＢＭＬデータ列の取得およびＢＭＬ文書の再生、データ放送画面情報の生成等が行われる（但し、図示省略）。一方、Ｓ３０４の処理を終えた後の状態でユーザが操作端末を用いて放送連携アプリランチャの起動要求を行った場合（Ｓ３０６）、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ３０７）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４を確認する（Ｓ３０８）。更に、アプリケーション制御部１６１は実行可能な放送連携アプリの一覧を放送連携アプリランチャとして映像表示部１７３に表示する（Ｓ３０９）。 In the case where the user has issued a data broadcast activation request using the operation terminal in a state after the processing of S304 (S305), acquisition of a BML data string and BML as in the processing of S205 onward in FIG. 7B. Reproduction of the document, generation of data broadcast screen information, and the like are performed (but not shown). On the other hand, when the user issues an activation request for the broadcast cooperation application launcher using the operation terminal in the state after the process of S304 (S306), the AIT data separated by the first separation unit 132 by the application control unit 161. A column is acquired (S307), and the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data column is confirmed (S308). Furthermore, the application control unit 161 displays a list of executable broadcast cooperation applications on the video display unit 173 as a broadcast cooperation application launcher (S309).
　ユーザが操作端末を用いて、Ｓ３０９で表示された放送連携アプリランチャから所定の放送連携アプリの選択を行う（Ｓ３１０）と、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ３１１）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション取得先情報９０５を確認する。更に、Ｓ３１１で確認したアプリケーション取得先情報９０５に記述された情報に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリの送信要求を送信する（Ｓ３１２）。 The user selects a predetermined broadcast cooperation application from the broadcast cooperation application launcher displayed in S309 using the operation terminal (S310), and the application control unit 161 separates the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Acquire (S311), and confirm the application acquisition destination information 905 of the acquired AIT data string. Furthermore, based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 confirmed in S311, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 (S312).
　前記放送連携アプリの送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて放送受信装置１００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリの配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ３１３）。次に、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーションエンジン１６２が、アプリケーション制御部１６１の制御に基づいて、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリを起動する（Ｓ３１４）。 The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S313). Next, the application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application distributed from the service provider server 400, received via the LAN communication unit 121, based on the control of the application control unit 161. (S314).
　なお、図７Ａ～図７Ｃを用いて説明した放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスでは、何れも放送波からＡＩＴを取得する例を説明しているが、ＰＭＴの情報記述等により指定された所定のサーバ装置からＡＩＴファイルを取得するようにしても良い。また、放送連携アプリの取得をネットワーク上のサーバ装置（サービス事業者サーバ４００）からではなく、放送波から行っても良い。即ち、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション取得先情報９０５に記載されたロケーション情報が放送波を示している場合、アプリケーション制御部１６１がデータカルーセル方式等で送信されて第一分離部１３２で分離出力されたＨＴＭＬデータ列からＨＴＭＬ文書を再生し、前記再生されたＨＴＭＬ文書（放送連携アプリ）をアプリケーションエンジン１６２が実行するようにすれば良い。 In the start sequence of the broadcast cooperation application described with reference to FIGS. 7A to 7C, although an example in which the AIT is acquired from the broadcast wave is described, the predetermined server apparatus specified by the information description of the PMT or the like is described. You may acquire the AIT file from. Also, the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application may be performed from the broadcast wave, not from the server apparatus (service provider server 400) on the network. That is, when the location information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 of the AIT indicates a broadcast wave, the HTML data string transmitted by the application control unit 161 by the data carousel method or the like and separated and output by the first separation unit 132 The HTML document may be reproduced from the above, and the application engine 162 may execute the reproduced HTML document (broadcast cooperation application).
　なお、ＰＭＴ上に放送サービスによるデータ放送と放送連携アプリが同時に存在する場合の起動優先度を指定する情報が無い場合は、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コード９０３や起動優先度９０７等の情報のみにより前記起動優先度を確認するようにしても良い。同じくＰＭＴ上の前記情報の取得に失敗した場合も、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コード９０３や起動優先度９０７等の情報のみにより前記起動優先度を確認するようにして良い。即ち、ＰＭＴ上の情報によらず、定期的にＡＩＴの確認を行うようにし、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コード９０３に『自動起動』で指定される放送連携アプリが存在する場合には前記放送連携アプリの起動を優先し、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コード９０３に『自動起動』で指定される放送連携アプリが存在しない場合には放送サービスによるデータ放送の起動を優先するようにすれば良い。 If there is no information for specifying the activation priority when data broadcasting by the broadcasting service and the broadcast cooperation application exist simultaneously on the PMT, the activation is performed only by the information such as the application control code 903 of the AIT and the activation priority 907. You may check the priority. Similarly, even if acquisition of the information on the PMT fails, the activation priority may be confirmed only by information such as the application control code 903 of the AIT and the activation priority 907. That is, regardless of the information on the PMT, the AIT is periodically checked, and when there is a broadcast cooperation application specified by “automatic start” in the application control code 903 of the AIT, If priority is given to activation and no broadcast cooperation application designated by “automatic activation” is present in the application control code 903 of the AIT, activation of data broadcasting by the broadcasting service may be prioritized.
　また、Ｓ１０６、Ｓ２１１、Ｓ３１２で放送連携アプリの配信要求を行った際にサービス事業者サーバ４００からのレスポンスが所定時間以上ない場合には、『しばらくお待ちください』等のメッセージを映像表示部１７３に表示するようにしても良い。または、この場合、前記放送連携アプリの実行中止をユーザに問い合わせるメッセージを表示しても良い。 In addition, when there is no response from the service provider server 400 for a predetermined time or more when the distribution request of the broadcast cooperation application is made in S106, S211, S312, a message such as “Please wait for a while” is displayed on the image display section 173. It may be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message may be displayed asking the user to stop the execution of the broadcast cooperation application.
　また、放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスは前述の３パターンに限られるものではなく、異なるシーケンスによって起動されるものであっても良いことは言うまでもない。 Further, it is needless to say that the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application is not limited to the above three patterns, and may be activated by different sequences.
　［携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による放送通信連携サービスの機能拡張が可能であるものとする。例えば、テレビ受信機のメーカが用意するアプリケーション（連携制御アプリ）をインストールすることにより、携帯情報端末７００を放送受信装置１００の高機能リモコンとして使用することが可能となる。また、携帯情報端末７００上でも放送連携アプリを実行し、例えば、放送受信装置１００で表示中の放送番組に連動するサービスを携帯情報端末７００上でも表示することが可能となる。なお、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による機能拡張を行うためには、前記連携制御アプリが携帯情報端末７００上で起動していることが望ましく、携帯情報端末７００上で動作する放送連携アプリは前記連携制御アプリに制御されて動作するものとする。 [Operation sequence when linking mobile information terminals]
In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to extend the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service by the cooperation operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700. For example, by installing an application (cooperation control application) prepared by the maker of the television receiver, it is possible to use the portable information terminal 700 as a high-performance remote control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. Also, the broadcast cooperation application can be executed on the portable information terminal 700, and for example, services linked to the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be displayed on the portable information terminal 700. In addition, in order to perform the function expansion by the cooperation operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700, it is desirable that the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700, and the operation on the portable information terminal 700. The broadcast cooperative application to be operated is controlled by the cooperative control application to operate.
　図８Ａは、前記連携制御アプリを携帯情報端末７００で起動する際の動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００との認証処理を行い、連携動作が可能となるまでの一連の流れ（初回）を示すものである。なお、前記連携制御アプリは、連携制御プログラム７００２として、予め携帯情報端末７００のストレージ部７１０にインストールしてあるものとする。 FIG. 8A is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700. The figure shows a series of flows (first time) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible. The cooperation control application is installed in advance in the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 as a cooperation control program 7002.
　ユーザが携帯情報端末７００上で連携制御アプリの起動を指示する（Ｓ４０１）と、携帯情報端末７００の連携制御実行部７１０２は、ネットワーク上の通信（連携動作）可能なテレビ受信機を検索し（Ｓ４０２）、検索結果をテレビ受信機一覧として表示部７４１に表示する。通信可能なテレビ受信機が発見できない場合は、その旨を表示して処理を終了する。ユーザが前記テレビ受信機一覧から任意のテレビ受信機（本実施例の放送受信装置１００）を選択すると、連携制御実行部７１０２は放送受信装置１００に接続するためのログイン画面を表示部７４１に表示する。操作部７３０を介してユーザが前記ログイン画面に認証情報（放送受信装置１００により指定されたログイン名およびパスワード、等）を入力する（Ｓ４０３）と、連携制御実行部７１０２は前記入力された認証情報を、認証情報記憶領域７０１２に記憶すると同時に、放送受信装置１００に送信する（Ｓ４０４）。なお、前記認証情報の放送受信装置１００への送信処理は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１およびルータ装置２１０を介して行っても良いし、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３を介して放送受信装置１００に直接行っても良い。 When the user instructs activation of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 (S401), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 searches for a television receiver capable of communication (cooperation) on the network ( S402) The search result is displayed on the display unit 741 as a television receiver list. If a communicable television receiver can not be found, that effect is displayed and the process is ended. When the user selects an arbitrary television receiver (the broadcast reception apparatus 100 of the present embodiment) from the television receiver list, the cooperation control execution unit 7102 displays a login screen for connecting to the broadcast reception apparatus 100 on the display unit 741. Do. When the user inputs authentication information (such as a login name and a password designated by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100) on the login screen via the operation unit 730 (S403), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 receives the input authentication information. Are stored in the authentication information storage area 7012 and simultaneously transmitted to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S404). The transmission process of the authentication information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be performed via the LAN communication unit 721 and the router apparatus 210, or may be performed directly to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 via the NFC communication unit 723. .
　ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して前記認証情報を受信した放送受信装置１００の端末連携制御部１９１は、認証情報記憶領域１０１２を参照することにより、前記受信した認証情報が正しいか否かの確認を行う（Ｓ４０５）。Ｓ４０５の処理により、前記受信した認証情報が正しいと確認された場合には、携帯情報端末７００の情報を認証情報記憶領域１０１２に記憶するとともに、携帯情報端末７００を認証する（Ｓ４０６）。放送受信装置１００の認証を得た携帯情報端末７００は、表示部７４１に連携制御アプリの基本画面（例えば、高機能リモコン画面）を表示する（Ｓ４０７）。Ｓ４０５において、前記受信した認証情報が正しいと確認されなかった場合には、放送受信装置１００の端末連携制御部１９１は、携帯情報端末７００にエラーを返す。以上の処理により、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との間の連携動作が可能な状態となる。 The terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S405). If it is confirmed in the process of S405 that the received authentication information is correct, the information of the portable information terminal 700 is stored in the authentication information storage area 1012 and the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S406). The portable information terminal 700 that has acquired the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen (for example, the advanced remote control screen) of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S407). In S405, when the received authentication information is not confirmed to be correct, the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 returns an error to the portable information terminal 700. By the above-described processing, the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is possible.
　図８Ｂは、前記連携制御アプリを携帯情報端末７００で起動する際の動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００との認証処理を行い、連携動作が可能となるまでの一連の流れ（二回目以降）を示すものである。 FIG. 8B is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700. The figure shows a series of flows (from the second time on) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible.
　ユーザが携帯情報端末７００上で連携制御アプリの起動を指示する（Ｓ５０１）と、携帯情報端末７００の連携制御実行部７１０２は、ネットワーク上の通信可能なテレビ受信機を検索し、検索結果をテレビ受信機一覧として表示部７４１に表示する。通信可能なテレビ受信機が発見できない場合は、その旨を表示して処理を終了する。ユーザが前記テレビ受信機一覧から任意のテレビ受信機（本実施例の放送受信装置１００）を選択し（Ｓ５０２）、前記選択した放送受信装置１００が過去に接続（連携動作）を行ったことがある機器である場合、連携制御実行部７１０２は認証情報記憶領域７０１２から放送受信装置１００の認証情報を読み出して、放送受信装置１００に送信する（Ｓ５０３）。 When the user instructs activation of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 (S501), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 searches for a communicable television receiver on the network, and searches the search result as a television It is displayed on the display unit 741 as a receiver list. If a communicable television receiver can not be found, that effect is displayed and the process is ended. The user selects an arbitrary television receiver (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment) from the television receiver list (S502), and the selected broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has made a connection (cooperation operation) in the past If the device is a certain device, the cooperation control execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the authentication information storage area 7012 and transmits it to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S 503).
　ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して前記認証情報を受信した放送受信装置１００の端末連携制御部１９１は、認証情報記憶領域１０１２を参照することにより、前記受信した認証情報が正しいか否かの確認を行う（Ｓ５０４）。Ｓ５０４の処理により、前記受信した認証情報が正しいと確認された場合には、携帯情報端末７００を認証する（Ｓ５０５）。放送受信装置１００の認証を得た携帯情報端末７００は、表示部７４１に連携制御アプリの基本画面を表示する（Ｓ５０６）。以上の処理により、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との間の連携動作が可能な状態となる。 The terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S504). If it is confirmed in the process of S504 that the received authentication information is correct, the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S505). The portable information terminal 700 that has acquired the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S506). By the above-described processing, the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is possible.
　なお、図８Ａ～図８Ｂの処理に引き続き、放送受信装置１００において放送連携アプリを起動する際には、図８Ａ～図８Ｂの処理の後に図７Ａ～図７Ｃの処理を行えば良い。 When the broadcast cooperation application is activated in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 subsequently to the processing of FIGS. 8A to 8B, the processing of FIGS. 7A to 7C may be performed after the processing of FIGS. 8A to 8B.
　図８Ｃは、前記連携制御アプリを携帯情報端末７００で起動する際の動作シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００との認証処理を行い、連携動作が可能となるまでの一連の流れ（二回目以降）を示すものである。但し、同図においては、放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスを実行する放送受信装置１００により、携帯情報端末７００上での連携制御アプリの起動が要求される場合の例である。 FIG. 8C is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an operation sequence when the cooperation control application is activated by the portable information terminal 700. The figure shows a series of flows (from the second time on) until the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the cooperation operation becomes possible. However, in the figure, an example is shown where activation of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 is requested by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that executes the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＴＳを取得すると、次に、主制御部１０１が第一分離部１３２で分離したＰＭＴデータ列を取得して（Ｓ６０１）、ＰＭＴに記述された起動優先度の確認を行う。Ｓ６０１の処理において放送連携アプリの起動優先度が高いことを確認する（Ｓ６０２）と、アプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ６０３）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション制御コード９０３を確認する（Ｓ６０４）。Ｓ６０４の処理において、アプリケーション制御コード９０３が『自動起動』であった場合、更に、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４を確認する（Ｓ６０５）。Ｓ６０５の処理において、前記ＡＩＴに指定された放送連携アプリの実行が可能であることが確認され、更に、携帯端末機器の連携制御が必要であると判断された場合、端末連携制御部１９１が認証情報記憶領域１０１２を参照することにより、携帯端末機器として携帯情報端末７００を選択し、前記選択した携帯情報端末７００に対して連携制御アプリ起動要求を送信する（Ｓ６０６）。 When the tuner / demodulator 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs channel selection processing desired by the user and acquires a TS, next, the main controller 101 acquires a PMT data string separated by the first separation unit 132. Then (S601), the activation priority described in the PMT is confirmed. When confirming that the start priority of the broadcast cooperation application is high in the process of S601 (S602), the application control unit 161 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S603), and the acquired AIT The application control code 903 of the data string is confirmed (S604). In the process of S604, when the application control code 903 is "automatic start", the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string is further confirmed (S605). In the process of S605, it is confirmed that execution of the broadcast cooperation application specified in the AIT is possible, and when it is determined that cooperation control of the portable terminal device is necessary, the terminal cooperation control unit 191 authenticates. The portable information terminal 700 is selected as a portable terminal device by referring to the information storage area 1012, and a cooperation control application activation request is transmitted to the selected portable information terminal 700 (S606).
　なお、認証情報記憶領域１０１２を参照することによる携帯情報端末７００の選択は、認証情報記憶領域１０１２の最新の情報に基づき、若しくは、認証情報記憶領域１０１２の最も使用頻度の高い情報に基づきなされるようにすれば良い。 The selection of the portable information terminal 700 by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012 is made based on the latest information of the authentication information storage area 1012 or based on the most frequently used information of the authentication information storage area 1012. You should do it.
　また、Ｓ６０６の処理において、連携制御アプリ起動要求を送信するべき携帯端末機器が発見できない場合には、その旨を示すメッセージを映像表示部１７３に表示するようにしても良い。または、この場合、前記放送連携アプリの実行中止をユーザに問い合わせるメッセージを表示しても良い。 In addition, in the process of S606, when the mobile terminal device to which the cooperation control application activation request should be transmitted can not be found, a message indicating that may be displayed on the video display unit 173. Alternatively, in this case, a message may be displayed asking the user to stop the execution of the broadcast cooperation application.
　携帯情報端末７００の主制御部７０１は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１を介して受信した前記連携制御アプリ起動要求に応じて連携制御アプリ（連携制御実行部７１０２）を起動させ（Ｓ６０７）、更に、連携制御実行部７１０２が、認証情報記憶領域７０１２から放送受信装置１００の認証情報を読み出して、放送受信装置１００に送信する（Ｓ６０８）。 The main control unit 701 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the cooperation control application (cooperation control execution unit 7102) in response to the cooperation control application activation request received via the LAN communication unit 721 (S607), and further performs cooperation control. The execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the authentication information storage area 7012 and transmits it to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S 608).
　ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して前記認証情報を受信した放送受信装置１００の端末連携制御部１９１は、認証情報記憶領域１０１２を参照することにより、前記受信した認証情報が正しいか否かの確認を行う（Ｓ６０９）。Ｓ６０９の処理により、前記受信した認証情報が正しいと確認された場合には、携帯情報端末７００を認証する（Ｓ６１０）。放送受信装置１００の認証を得た携帯情報端末７００は、表示部７４１に連携制御アプリの基本画面を表示する（Ｓ６１１）。以上の処理により、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との間の連携動作が可能な状態となる。 The terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 having received the authentication information via the LAN communication unit 121 checks whether the received authentication information is correct or not by referring to the authentication information storage area 1012. (S609). If it is confirmed by the process of S609 that the received authentication information is correct, the portable information terminal 700 is authenticated (S610). The portable information terminal 700 that has obtained the authentication of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 displays the basic screen of the cooperation control application on the display unit 741 (S611). By the above-described processing, the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is possible.
　なお、前述の処理に続いて放送連携アプリを、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００の双方において実行する場合には、図９に示す処理を行えば良い。図９は、放送受信装置１００および携帯情報端末７００の放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。 When the broadcast cooperation application is executed on both the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 following the above process, the process shown in FIG. 9 may be performed. FIG. 9 is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of an activation sequence of the broadcast cooperation application of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
　即ち、図８ＣのＳ６０１～Ｓ６１１の処理の後、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーション制御部１６１が、第一分離部１３２で分離したＡＩＴデータ列を取得し（Ｓ６１２）、前記取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーション取得先情報９０５を確認する。更に、Ｓ６１２で確認したアプリケーション取得先情報９０５に記述された情報に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）の送信要求を送信する（Ｓ６１３）。 That is, after the processing of S601 to S611 in FIG. 8C, the application control unit 161 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires the AIT data string separated by the first separation unit 132 (S612), and the application of the acquired AIT data string The acquisition source information 905 is confirmed. Furthermore, based on the information described in the application acquisition destination information 905 confirmed in S612, the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) is transmitted to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121. (S613).
　前記放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）の送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて放送受信装置１００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）の配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ６１４）。放送受信装置１００のアプリケーションエンジン１６２は、アプリケーション制御部１６１の制御に基づいて、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）を起動する（Ｓ６１５）。 The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) performs the authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then the application. Delivery of the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (TV side) stored in the storage area 4013 is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S614). The application engine 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (TV side) distributed from the service provider server 400, which is received through the LAN communication unit 121 under the control of the application control unit 161. It starts (S615).
　次に、放送受信装置１００の端末連携制御部１９１は、ＡＩＴ若しくはＳ６１５で実行した放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）から取得した、携帯情報端末７００で実行するべき放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得先ＵＲＬ情報等を携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ６１６）。携帯情報端末７００の連携制御実行部７１０２は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１を介して受信した前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得先ＵＲＬ情報等に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリ（端末側）の送信要求を送信する（Ｓ６１７）。 Next, the terminal cooperation control unit 191 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires an acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) to be executed by the portable information terminal 700 acquired from the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) executed in AIT or S615. The URL information and the like are transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S616). The cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 performs predetermined service business via the LAN communication unit 721 based on the acquisition destination URL information etc. of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) received via the LAN communication unit 721. The transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) is transmitted to the user server 400 (S617).
　前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）の送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて携帯情報端末７００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリ（端末側）の配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ６１８）。携帯情報端末７００のＨＴＭＬブラウザエンジン７１０３が、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリ（端末側）を起動する（Ｓ６１９）。 The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) performs the authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 as necessary based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then the application. Distribution of a predetermined broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) stored in the storage area 4013 is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S618). The HTML browser engine 7103 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the predetermined broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) distributed from the service provider server 400, which is received via the LAN communication unit 721 (S619).
　なお、ＡＩＴファイルを所定のサーバ装置から取得可能であること、放送連携アプリの取得をネットワーク上のサーバ装置からではなく放送波から行えること、等は、図７Ａ～図７Ｃの動作シーケンスと同様である。なお、放送連携アプリの取得を放送波から行う場合、放送受信装置１００が携帯情報端末７００で実行するべき放送連携アプリ（端末側）を放送波から取得し、前記取得した放送連携アプリ（端末側）を携帯情報端末７００に、通信部１２１を介して転送するようにすれば良い。或いは、放送受信装置１００が携帯情報端末７００で実行するべき放送連携アプリ（端末側）を放送波から取得してストレージ部１１０に記憶させ、図９のＳ６１６の処理において、携帯情報端末７００に送信するＵＲＬ情報として、放送受信装置１００のストレージ部１１０のロケーション情報を送信するようにしても良い。放送受信装置１００は放送連携アプリ（テレビ側）の取得を放送波から行い、携帯情報端末７００は放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得をネットワーク上のサーバ装置から行うようにしても良い。携帯情報端末７００が有するデジタル放送受信機能を用いて、前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得を放送波から直接行っても良い。 Note that the ability to acquire an AIT file from a predetermined server device, and the ability to acquire a broadcast cooperation application not from a server device on the network but from broadcast waves, etc. is the same as the operation sequence of FIGS. 7A to 7C. is there. In addition, when acquiring a broadcast cooperation application from a broadcast wave, the broadcast reception apparatus 100 acquires the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) which should be performed with the portable information terminal 700 from a broadcast wave, The said acquired broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) ) May be transferred to the portable information terminal 700 via the communication unit 121. Alternatively, the broadcast reception apparatus 100 acquires the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) to be executed on the portable information terminal 700 from the broadcast wave and stores it in the storage unit 110, and transmits it to the portable information terminal 700 in the process of S616 in FIG. The location information of the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be transmitted as the URL information to be transmitted. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may acquire the broadcast cooperation application (TV side) from the broadcast wave, and the portable information terminal 700 may acquire the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) from the server apparatus on the network. Acquisition of the said broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) may be performed directly from a broadcast wave using the digital broadcast reception function which the portable information terminal 700 has.
　また、図７Ａ～図７Ｃ、図８Ａ～図８Ｃ、および図９の各動作シーケンスは適宜部分的に組み合わせることが可能であり、更に、一部動作ステップは他の動作ステップと、適宜、順序入れ替え、同時動作、等が可能であるものとする。 Also, the operation sequences of FIGS. 7A to 7C, 8A to 8C, and FIG. 9 can be appropriately combined partially, and furthermore, some operation steps may be reordered as appropriate with other operation steps. , Simultaneous operation, etc. shall be possible.
　［携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリ基本画面］
　図１０Ａは、図８ＡのＳ４０７の処理、図８ＢのＳ５０６の処理、図８ＣのＳ６１１の処理、等により表示される連携制御アプリの基本画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａは、放送受信装置１００に対応した高機能リモコンとしての機能を備えるものとする。 [Linkage control application basic screen of mobile information terminal]
FIG. 10A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a basic screen of a cooperation control application displayed by the process of S407 of FIG. 8A, the process of S506 of FIG. 8B, the process of S611 of FIG. In the present embodiment, the basic screen 741 a of the cooperation control application has a function as a high-performance remote controller corresponding to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａは、図１０Ａに示したように、電源キー７４１ａ１、ネットワーク選択キー（地デジ、ＢＳ、ＣＳ）７４１ａ２、数字キー（１～１２）７４１ａ３、音量ＵＰ／ＤＯＷＮキー７４１ａ４、チャンネルＵＰ／ＤＯＷＮキー７４１ａ５、入力切替キー７４１ａ６、番組表キー７４１ａ７、ｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９、メニューキー７４１ａａ、戻るキー７４１ａｂ、カーソルキー（上、下、左、右）７４１ａｃ、決定キー７４１ａｄ、カラーキー（青、赤、緑、黄）７４１ａｅ、で構成される。その他の操作キーが更に表示されていても良い。 As shown in FIG. 10A, the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application includes a power key 741a1, a network selection key (terrestrial digital, BS, CS) 741a2, numeric keys (1 to 12) 741a3, volume UP / DOWN key 741a4, Channel UP / DOWN key 741a5, input switching key 741a6, program guide key 741a7, data key 741a8, cooperation application key 741a9, menu key 741aa, back key 741ab, cursor keys (up, down, left, right) 741ac, enter key 741ad , Color key (blue, red, green, yellow) 741ae, composed. Other operation keys may be further displayed.
　前記各操作キーは、放送受信装置１００に付属する専用リモコンと同様のキー配置／動作とすると使い勝手が良い。また、電源キー７４１ａ１、ネットワーク選択キー７４１ａ２、数字キー７４１ａ３、等は、公知のテレビリモコンの各操作キーと同様の機能を有するものとして、詳細の説明を省略する。連携アプリキー７４１ａ９は、本実施例の放送連携通信機能のために用意される操作キーである。 It is convenient that the operation keys have the same key arrangement / operation as the dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. Further, the power key 741a1, the network selection key 741a2, the numeric key 741a3, and so on have the same functions as the operation keys of the known television remote control, and the detailed description will be omitted. The cooperation application key 741a9 is an operation key prepared for the broadcast cooperation communication function of the present embodiment.
　なお、図７ＢのＳ２０４および図７ＣのＳ３０５の処理では、ｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８を選択することによりデータ放送の起動／終了が可能であるものとする。また、図７ＢのＳ２０８および図７ＣのＳ３１０の処理では、カーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄの操作により前記実行可能な放送連携アプリの選択が可能であるものとする。また、図７ＣのＳ３０６の処理では、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９を選択することにより放送連携アプリランチャの起動要求が可能であるものとする。 In the processes of S204 of FIG. 7B and S305 of FIG. 7C, it is assumed that activation / termination of data broadcasting is possible by selecting the data key 741a8. Further, in the processing of S208 of FIG. 7B and S310 of FIG. 7C, it is assumed that the executable broadcast cooperative application can be selected by operating the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad. Further, in the process of S306 in FIG. 7C, it is assumed that the start request of the broadcast cooperative application launcher can be made by selecting the cooperative application key 741a9.
　このように連携アプリキー７４１ａ９若しくは同様の機能を有する他の操作キーを前記連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａ上に用意すれば、本実施例の放送連携システムで用いる各放送連携アプリを簡単に選択／起動することが可能となる。また、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９若しくは同様の機能を有する他の操作キーを放送受信装置１００に付属する専用リモコンに備えるようにしても良い。 As described above, if the cooperation application key 741a9 or another operation key having the same function is prepared on the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, each broadcast cooperation application used in the broadcast cooperation system of the present embodiment can be easily selected. It becomes possible to start. Further, the cooperation application key 741 a 9 or another operation key having the same function may be provided in the dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　図１０Ｂは、図８ＡのＳ４０７の処理、図８ＢのＳ５０６の処理、図８ＣのＳ６１１の処理、等により表示される連携制御アプリの基本画面の一例を示す画面表示図であり、図１０Ａとは異なる例である。 10B is a screen display diagram showing an example of the basic screen of the cooperation control application displayed by the process of S407 of FIG. 8A, the process of S506 of FIG. 8B, the process of S611 of FIG. 8C, etc. It is a different example.
　連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ｂは、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１、連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２、で構成される。その他のオブジェクトが更に表示されていても良い。連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と連携動作中である旨をユーザに認識させるためのメッセージ表示である。連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２は、連携制御アプリにより任意の画面表示が行われる領域であり、本実施例では詳細の説明を省略する。例えば、連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２内の構成が前述の連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａと同様の構成となっていて良い。放送受信装置１００で表示されている放送番組のサブ画面等が表示されていても良い。 The basic screen 741b of the cooperation control application is composed of a cooperation control message 741b1 and a cooperation control application operation screen 741b2. Other objects may be further displayed. The cooperation controlling message 741b1 is a message display for making the user recognize that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. The cooperation control application operation screen 741 b 2 is an area in which an arbitrary screen display is performed by the cooperation control application, and the detailed description will be omitted in this embodiment. For example, the configuration in the cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 may be similar to the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application described above. A subscreen or the like of a broadcast program displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be displayed.
　図１０Ｂに示したように、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１を表示することにより、携帯情報端末７００のユーザは携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と連携動作中であることを簡単に把握することができるようになる。なお、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１は文字表示に限らず、記号表示、図形表示等であっても良い。背景色の差異等により連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１の代替としても良い。 As shown in FIG. 10B, the user of the portable information terminal 700 can easily grasp that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by displaying the cooperation controlling message 741b1. It will be. Note that the cooperation control message 741b1 is not limited to the character display, and may be a symbol display, a graphic display, or the like. It may be used as a substitute for the message 741b1 under cooperation control due to a difference in background color or the like.
　［放送受信装置のデータ放送画面］
　図１１は、図７ＢのＳ２０５の処理により表示されるデータ放送画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、ＡＩＴの記述等により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、の三つの放送連携アプリが放送受信装置１００で実行可能な状態であるものとする。この場合、データ放送画面１７３ａ上の任意の位置に連携アプリＡのエントリーボタン１７３ａ２、連携アプリＢのエントリーボタン１７３ａ３、連携アプリＣのエントリーボタン１７３ａ４が表示される。 [Data broadcasting screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 11 is a screen display diagram showing an example of the data broadcast screen displayed by the process of S205 of FIG. 7B. In this embodiment, it is assumed that three broadcast cooperative applications such as a cooperative application A, a cooperative application B, and a cooperative application C can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 based on the description of the AIT. In this case, the entry button 173a2 of the cooperation application A, the entry button 173a3 of the cooperation application B, and the entry button 173a4 of the cooperation application C are displayed at an arbitrary position on the data broadcast screen 173a.
　図１１に示したようなデータ放送画面１７３ａにおいて、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いてエントリーボタン１７３ａ２、エントリーボタン１７３ａ３、エントリーボタン１７３ａ４、等を選択すると、データ放送画面１７３ａの表示を終了するとともに、アプリケーション制御部１６１およびアプリケーションエンジン１６２の制御により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、等が起動する。 When the entry button 173a2, the entry button 173a3, the entry button 173a4, etc. are selected using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the data broadcast screen 173a as shown in FIG. While the display of the screen 173a is ended, the cooperation application A, the cooperation application B, the cooperation application C, and the like are activated under the control of the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162.
　なお、データ放送画面１７３ａを表示する際、放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。例えば、前記連携アプリＡが放送マネージドアプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢが放送外マネージドアプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣが一般アプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。或いは、前記連携アプリＡがセキュリティ上信頼できると判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢがセキュリティ上信頼できるとは限らないと判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣがセキュリティ上危険であると判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。 In addition, when displaying the data broadcast screen 173a, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blink status, etc. of each entry button may be changed appropriately according to the type of the broadcast cooperation application, security status, etc. You may For example, when the cooperation application A is a broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is blue, and when the cooperation application B is a non-broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 173a3 is yellow, When the cooperation application C is a general application, the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is changed to red, and the like. Alternatively, the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is colored blue when it is determined that the linked application A can be trusted for security, and the entry button when it is determined that the linked application B is not necessarily trusted for security. The frame color of 173a3 is set to yellow, and when it is determined that the cooperation application C is dangerous for security, the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is set to red, and the like.
　その他、前記放送連携アプリの機能やジャンルに応じて、または、各放送連携アプリの使用有効期限等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。前記放送連携アプリをネットワーク上から取得済みであるか否か等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。例えば、前記連携アプリＡが既にネットワーク上から取得済み（ＲＡＭ１０４若しくはストレージ１１０にキャッシュ済み）である場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢが取得中である場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣが未取得である場合にはエントリーボタン１７３ａ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。 In addition, according to the function or genre of the broadcast cooperation application, or according to the use expiration date of each broadcast cooperation application, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blink status, etc. of each entry button May be changed as appropriate. The frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. of each entry button may be changed as appropriate depending on whether the broadcast cooperation application has been acquired from the network, etc. . For example, when the cooperation application A is already acquired from the network (cached in the RAM 104 or the storage 110), the frame color of the entry button 173a2 is set to blue, and when the cooperation application B is being acquired, the entry The frame color of the button 173a3 is set to yellow, and the frame color of the entry button 173a4 is set to red if the cooperation application C has not been acquired.
　このようにすれば、放送受信装置１００のユーザは、放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況等を簡単に把握することが可能となる。 In this way, the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the type and security status of the broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　［放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャ画面］
　図１２Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、起動可能な放送連携アプリがあることをユーザに認識させるための報知画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。 [Broadcast cooperation application launcher screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 12A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a notification screen for making the user recognize that there is a startable broadcast cooperation application in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
　例えば、図７Ｃに示した動作シーケンスでは、Ｓ３０４の処理の後、放送サービスによるデータ放送と放送連携アプリの何れも起動せずに、放送番組の表示を継続する。一方、この場合、起動可能な放送連携アプリがあることをユーザに認識させるために、図１２Ａに示したようなアイコン１７３ｂ０を表示すれば、放送受信装置１００の使い勝手が向上する。即ち、アイコン１７３ｂ０を表示することにより、ユーザが起動可能な放送連携アプリの存在を見逃すことを防ぐことが可能となる。 For example, in the operation sequence shown in FIG. 7C, after the process of S304, the display of the broadcast program is continued without activating any of the data broadcast by the broadcast service and the broadcast cooperation application. On the other hand, in this case, if the icon 173b0 as shown in FIG. 12A is displayed to allow the user to recognize that there is a startable broadcast cooperation application, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is improved. That is, by displaying the icon 173b0, it is possible to prevent the user from missing the existence of the broadcast cooperative application which can be activated.
　なお、アイコン１７３ｂ０の表示位置は画面上の任意の位置で良いが、放送番組の視聴の邪魔にならない場所とすることが望ましい。例えば、画面の四隅等である。また、アイコン１７３ｂ０は、図１２Ａに示したような文字表示であっても良いし、記号、図形等であっても良い。また、アイコン１７３ｂ０は、常に表示しておくようにしても良いし、電源をオンした後やチャンネル切り替え後に所定の時間だけ表示するようにしても良い。または、番組情報やチャンネル番号等を表示した際に同時に表示されるようにしても良い。 Although the display position of the icon 173b0 may be any position on the screen, it is desirable that the icon 173b0 not be in the way of viewing a broadcast program. For example, the four corners of the screen. Further, the icon 173b0 may be a character display as shown in FIG. 12A, or may be a symbol, a figure or the like. Also, the icon 173b0 may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the channel is switched. Alternatively, they may be simultaneously displayed when program information, channel numbers, etc. are displayed.
　図１２Ｂは、図７ＣのＳ３０６の処理により表示される放送連携アプリランチャの一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、ＡＩＴの記述等により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、の三つの放送連携アプリが放送受信装置１００で実行可能な状態であるものとする。この場合、放送番組画面１７３ｂ上の任意の位置に放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１が表示され、更に、放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１内に連携アプリＡのエントリーボタン１７３ｂ２、連携アプリＢのエントリーボタン１７３ｂ３、連携アプリＣのエントリーボタン１７３ｂ４、および戻るボタン１７３ｂ５が表示される。 FIG. 12B is a screen display diagram showing an example of the broadcast cooperative app launcher displayed by the process of S306 of FIG. 7C. In this embodiment, it is assumed that three broadcast cooperative applications such as a cooperative application A, a cooperative application B, and a cooperative application C can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 based on the description of the AIT. In this case, the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173b, and further, an entry button 173b2 of cooperation application A, an entry button 173b3 of cooperation application B, and cooperation application C in the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1. The entry button 173b4 and the back button 173b5 are displayed.
　図１２Ｂに示したような放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１が表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いてエントリーボタン１７３ｂ２、エントリーボタン１７３ｂ３、エントリーボタン１７３ｂ４、等を選択すると、アプリケーション制御部１６１およびアプリケーションエンジン１６２の制御により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、等が起動する。戻るボタン１７３ｂ５が選択された場合には、放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１の表示が終了する。 While the broadcast cooperative app launcher 173b1 as shown in FIG. 12B is displayed, the entry button 173b2, the entry button 173b3, and the entry button 173b4 using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application When or the like is selected, the cooperative application A, the cooperative application B, the cooperative application C, and the like are activated under the control of the application control unit 161 and the application engine 162. When the back button 173b5 is selected, the display of the broadcast cooperative application launcher 173b1 ends.
　なお、放送番組画面１７３ｂ上に放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１を表示する際に、放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況、放送連携アプリの機能やジャンル、放送アプリのネットワーク上からの取得状況、等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良いことは、図１１のデータ放送画面１７３ａ上に各放送連携アプリのエントリーボタンを表示する場合と同様である。 In addition, when the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1 is displayed on the broadcast program screen 173b, depending on the type and security status of the broadcast cooperation application, the function and genre of the broadcast cooperation application, the acquisition situation of the broadcast application from the network, etc. The border color, internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. of each entry button may be changed as appropriate. The entry button of each broadcast cooperation application on the data broadcast screen 173a of FIG. Is the same as when displaying.
　また、放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリが無い場合には、放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１を表示しないようにしても良い。または、この場合、放送連携アプリランチャ１７３ｂ１の内部に『使用可能なアプリケーションが有りません』等のメッセージを表示するようにしても良い。 Further, when there is no broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1 may not be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message such as “There is no usable application” may be displayed inside the broadcast cooperation application launcher 173b1.
　［放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面］
　図１３Ａは、図７ＡのＳ１０８の処理、図７ＢのＳ２１３の処理、図７ＣのＳ３１４の処理、図９のＳ６１５の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例の放送連携アプリはＨＴＭＬ記述によるグラフィクス性能やエフェクト性能等を備えており、映像表示部１７３上における放送番組画面とのオーバーレイ表示が可能であるものとする。例えば、図１３Ａに示したように、放送番組画面１７３ｃ上の任意の位置に天気予報やニュース等の情報を表示する放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１がオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１は、第一主オブジェクト１７３ｃ２、第二主オブジェクト１７３ｃ３、第三主オブジェクト１７３ｃ４、および背景オブジェクト１７３ｃ５、等で構成される。他のオブジェクトが更に表示されていても良い。 [Broadcast cooperation application execution screen of broadcast receiver]
13A is a screen display diagram showing an example of a broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. is there. The broadcast cooperation application of the present embodiment is provided with graphics performance and effect performance by HTML description, etc., and can be overlaid on the broadcast program screen on the video display unit 173. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 that displays information such as a weather forecast or news is overlay-displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c. The broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 includes a first main object 173c2, a second main object 173c3, a third main object 173c4, a background object 173c5, and the like. Other objects may also be displayed.
　放送番組画面１７３ｃ上に放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８を選択することにより、前記放送連携アプリの実行を終了してデータ放送画面に移行することが可能であるものとする。また、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの連携アプリキー７４１ａ９を選択することにより、前記放送連携アプリの実行を終了して放送番組画面１７３ｃのみの表示に戻すことが可能であるものとする。前記処理は、異なる操作キーにより実現されるものであっても良い。 Execution of the broadcast cooperation application is terminated by selecting the data key 741a8 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application in a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c, and the data broadcast screen is ended. It is possible to move to In addition, by selecting the cooperation application key 741a9 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, it is possible to end the execution of the broadcast cooperation application and return to the display of only the broadcast program screen 173c. The process may be realized by different operation keys.
　また、放送番組画面１７３ｃ上に放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの各操作キーを操作することにより、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１の透過度を変更することが可能であるものとする。前記透過度の変更処理は、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１全体を一括して行うものであっても良いし、第一主オブジェクト１７３ｃ２、第二主オブジェクト１７３ｃ３、第三主オブジェクト１７３ｃ４、背景オブジェクト１７３ｃ５をそれぞれ単独で行うものであっても良い。所定のグループ（例えば、同一のグラフィクスレイヤに存在する複数のオブジェクト）毎に行うものであっても良い。 Further, the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is changed by operating each operation key of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application in a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c. Shall be possible. The change processing of the transparency may be performed collectively for the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1, or the first main object 173c2, the second main object 173c3, the third main object 173c4, and the background object 173c5 It may be performed alone. It may be performed for each predetermined group (for example, a plurality of objects present in the same graphics layer).
　前記透過度の変更処理を行う際は、例えば、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃを用いてオブジェクトの選択を行い、カラーキー７４１ａｅの『青』キーでオブジェクトの透過度を増加させ、『黄』キーでオブジェクトの透過度を減少させたりする。異なる操作キーを用いて前記透過度の変更処理を行っても良い。放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１全体を一括して透過度１００％とすれば、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１を一時的に非表示とすることができる。例えば、放送波にて緊急放送が配信された場合、放送連携アプリ部全体を透過度１００％として、緊急放送の放送番組画面のみを映像表示部１７３に表示させるようにすることも可能となる。或いは、図示を省略したＣＭ検知部が、放送番組が本編映像からＣＭ映像になったことを検知して、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ１全体を一括して透過度１００％（若しくは放送番組の映像を明瞭に確認できる透過度）とするように制御しても良い。 When changing the transparency, for example, the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application is used to select an object, and the transparency of the object is increased with the "blue" key of the color key 741ae, Reduce the transparency of the object with the "Yellow" key. The process of changing the degree of transparency may be performed using different operation keys. If the entire broadcast cooperative application unit 173c1 is collectively made to have a transmittance of 100%, the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c1 can be temporarily hidden. For example, when an emergency broadcast is distributed by a broadcast wave, it is also possible to display only the broadcast program screen of the emergency broadcast on the video display unit 173 with the entire broadcast cooperation application unit being 100% transparent. Alternatively, the CM detection unit (not shown) detects that the broadcast program has changed from a main program video to a CM video, and collectively transmits 100% of the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 173c1 (or clears the broadcast program video) It may be controlled so as to be the transparency that can be confirmed in
　前述の処理を行うことにより、放送連携アプリの実行中にバックグラウンドにある放送番組画面の確認を行いたい場合に、前記放送連携アプリを終了させずに放送番組画面の確認を行うことが可能となる。 By performing the above-mentioned processing, when it is desired to confirm a broadcast program screen in the background while the broadcast cooperation application is being executed, it is possible to confirm the broadcast program screen without ending the broadcast cooperation application. Become.
　図１３Ｂは、図７ＡのＳ１０８の処理、図７ＢのＳ２１３の処理、図７ＣのＳ３１４の処理、図９のＳ６１５の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の、前述とは異なる例を示す画面表示図である。図１３Ｂに示した例では、放送番組画面１７３ｃ上の任意の位置に推薦番組を紹介する放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６がオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６には、第一推薦番組情報１７３ｃ７、第二推薦番組情報１７３ｃ８、第三推薦番組情報１７３ｃ９、等が表示される。更に多くの推薦番組情報がスクロールやページ切り替え等により表示されても良い。 FIG. 13B shows an example different from the above of the broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. It is a screen display figure which shows. In the example illustrated in FIG. 13B, the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c6 introducing the recommended program is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c. The broadcast cooperation application unit 173c6 displays first recommended program information 173c7, second recommended program information 173c8, third recommended program information 173c9, and the like. Further, more recommended program information may be displayed by scrolling, page switching, or the like.
　前記各推薦番組情報は、表示中の放送番組（放送番組画面１７３ｃ）に関連して推薦される番組の情報であっても良いし、ユーザの視聴履歴に基づいて推薦される番組の情報であっても良いし、インターネット等で話題となっている番組の情報であっても良い。放送受信装置１００のユーザの友人が前記ユーザに対して送付した推薦番組の情報であっても良い。また、前記推薦される番組は、デジタル放送サービスの放送波で送信される番組であっても良いし、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置から配信されるＶＯＤ（Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｏｎ　Ｄｅｍａｎｄ）番組等であっても良い。インターネット２００上のサーバ装置に用意されたホームページ等の情報画面であっても良い。 The recommended program information may be information of a program recommended in relation to a broadcast program (broadcast program screen 173c) being displayed, or information of a program recommended based on the user's viewing history. It may be information of a program that has become a topic on the Internet or the like. It may be information of a recommended program sent by a friend of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the user. Further, the recommended program may be a program transmitted by a broadcast wave of digital broadcasting service, or may be a VOD (Video On Demand) program etc. distributed from each server device on the Internet 200. good. It may be an information screen such as a home page prepared in a server device on the Internet 200.
　放送番組画面１７３ｃ上に放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、第一推薦番組情報１７３ｃ７、第二推薦番組情報１７３ｃ８、第三推薦番組情報１７３ｃ９、等を選択することにより、第一推薦番組情報１７３ｃ７、第二推薦番組情報１７３ｃ８、第三推薦番組情報１７３ｃ９、等で推薦される各番組映像が表示部１７３に表示される。 In a state where the broadcast cooperative application section 173c6 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c, the first recommended program information 173c7 and the second recommended program are displayed using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application. Each program video image recommended by the first recommended program information 173c7, the second recommended program information 173c8, the third recommended program information 173c9, etc. is displayed by selecting the information 173c8, the third recommended program information 173c9, etc. Is displayed on.
　図１３Ｃは、推薦番組を紹介する放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６で推薦される番組映像が表示された場合の例を示す画面表示図である。例えば、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６の第一推薦番組情報１７３ｃ７を選択した場合、表示部１７３に第一推薦番組情報１７３ｃ７で推薦される番組の番組映像１７３ｃａが表示される。番組映像１７３ｃａは、ユーザによる操作端末の操作により、一時停止や時間指定ジャンプ等が可能であって良い。また、番組映像１７３ｃａを表示する際に、元の放送番組画面１７３ｃをＰＩＰ（Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ　Ｉｎ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ）形式で任意の位置に表示するようにしても良い。この場合、ユーザの操作端末に対する操作により、前記推薦番組の番組映像１７３ｃａと元の放送番組画面１７３ｃの何れを主画面とするかを変更できて良い。ユーザの操作端末に対する操作により、元の放送番組画面１７３ｃのウィンドウの大きさを調整できるようにしても良い。 FIG. 13C is a screen display diagram showing an example in the case where a program video recommended by the broadcast cooperative application unit 173c6 introducing a recommended program is displayed. For example, when the first recommended program information 173c7 of the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c6 is selected using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, the display unit 173 is recommended by the first recommended program information 173c7. The program video 173ca of the program to be displayed is displayed. The program video 173 ca may be capable of being paused, jumping with a designated time, or the like by the user operating the operation terminal. In addition, when the program video 173ca is displayed, the original broadcast program screen 173c may be displayed at an arbitrary position in a PIP (Picture In Picture) format. In this case, which of the program video 173ca of the recommended program and the original broadcast program screen 173c is to be used as the main screen may be changed by the user's operation on the operation terminal. The size of the window of the original broadcast program screen 173 c may be adjusted by the user's operation on the operation terminal.
　また、前記推薦番組の番組映像１７３ｃａが、放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６に表示された何れかの推薦番組情報を選択したことにより表示された映像である旨を示すアイコン表示１７３ｃｂを画面上の任意の位置に表示すれば、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。また、言うまでもなく、図１３Ｂに示した放送連携アプリ実行画面においても、前述と同様に放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃ６の透過度を変更できるようにして良い。 In addition, an icon display 173cb indicating that the program video 173ca of the recommended program is a video displayed by selecting any of the recommended program information displayed on the broadcast cooperation application unit 173c6 is an arbitrary position on the screen The user's convenience can be improved by displaying in FIG. Further, it goes without saying that the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application section 173c6 may be changed in the same manner as described above on the broadcast cooperation application execution screen shown in FIG. 13B.
　図１３Ｄは、図７ＡのＳ１０８の処理、図７ＢのＳ２１３の処理、図７ＣのＳ３１４の処理、図９のＳ６１５の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の、前述とは異なる例を示す画面表示図である。図１３Ｄに示した例では、放送番組画面１７３ｃ上の任意の位置にＳＮＳ（Ｓｏｃｉａｌ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋｉｎｇ　Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ）サービスのポータルとなる放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃｃがオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃｃには、第一ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｄ、第二ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｅ、第三ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｆ、等が表示される。更に多くのＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタンがスクロールやページ切り替え等により表示されても良い。 13D shows an example different from the above of the broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed by the process of S108 of FIG. 7A, the process of S213 of FIG. 7B, the process of S314 of FIG. 7C, the process of S615 of FIG. It is a screen display figure which shows. In the example illustrated in FIG. 13D, the broadcast cooperative application unit 173cc serving as a portal of SNS (Social Networking Service) service is overlaid and displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 173c. The broadcast cooperation application unit 173cc displays an entry button 173cd for the first SNS service, an entry button 173ce for the second SNS service, an entry button 173cf for the third SNS service, and the like. Further more SNS service entry buttons may be displayed by scrolling, page switching, and the like.
　放送番組画面１７３ｃ上に放送連携アプリ部１７３ｃｃがオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、第一ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｄ、第二ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｅ、第三ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１７３ｃｆ、等を選択することにより、チャット機能や掲示板機能、インターネット電話機能等の各エントリーボタンに割り当てられた機能が有効化される。これにより、他者と情報交換を行いながら表示中の放送番組（放送番組画面１７３ｃ）を楽しむことが可能となる。また、同時に、携帯情報端末７００上の連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａが、ソフトウェアキーボード等の文字入力画面や音声入力によりチャットや掲示板書き込みを行うための音声入力画面等に変更されるようにしても良い。 In a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 173cc is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 173c, the first SNS service entry button 173cd, the second SNS service using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application By selecting the entry button 173ce of the SNS service, the entry button 173cf of the third SNS service, and the like, the functions assigned to the respective entry buttons such as the chat function, the bulletin board function, and the Internet telephone function are activated. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the currently displayed broadcast program (broadcast program screen 173c) while exchanging information with others. At the same time, even if the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal 700 is changed to a voice input screen or the like for chat or bulletin board writing by a character input screen such as a software keyboard or voice input. good.
　また、本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリとしては、前述の例の他、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携機能を用いて、更にＣＭの放送タイミングと同期して、関連するＣＭアプリが放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００の双方に提示されるようなものであっても良い。或いは、放送受信装置１００で利用可能な有料サービスにおいて、放送連携アプリにより放送受信装置１００のユーザの有料サービス加入の有無を確認し、その結果に応じて放送受信装置１００および／または携帯情報端末７００の表示を変更するようなものであっても良い。本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、何れの放送連携アプリを実行した場合であっても、図１３Ａや図１３Ｂ等を用いて説明した効果を享受することが可能である。 Moreover, as a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the above example, the cooperation function between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is used to further synchronize the broadcast timing with CM. Then, the related CM application may be presented to both the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700. Alternatively, in the pay service available in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the broadcast cooperation application confirms whether the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 subscribes to the paid service, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and / or the portable information terminal 700 according to the result. It may be something that changes the display of. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to receive the effects described using FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, etc., regardless of which broadcast cooperation application is executed.
　［放送受信装置のエラー表示画面］
　図１４は、図７ＡのＳ１０５の処理、図７ＢのＳ２０７の処理、図７ＣのＳ３０８の処理、図８ＣのＳ６０５の処理、等で、取得したＡＩＴデータ列のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認等により放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではないと判断された場合、ＡＩＴの記述に不足がある場合、或いはＡＩＴの取得に失敗した場合、等のエラー表示画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。 [Error display screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 14 shows the cooperation of broadcasting by confirming the application profile 904 of the acquired AIT data string, etc. by the processing of S105 of FIG. 7A, the processing of S207 of FIG. 7B, the processing of S308 of FIG. 7C, the processing of S605 of FIG. FIG. 14 is a screen display diagram showing an example of an error display screen such as a case where it is determined that the application is not executable, a case where there is a deficiency in the AIT, or a case where acquisition of the AIT fails.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではないと判断された場合に、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認結果等の、前記放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではない理由を、エラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１に表示するようにする。例えば、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認の結果、所定のオプション機能がテレビ受信機側に不足している場合、その旨をエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１に表示する。エラーコードと、前記エラーコードの説明が記述されたテレビ受信機メーカのホームページの案内（ＵＲＬ等）を表示しても良い。或いは、放送連携アプリの取得をネットワーク上から行う場合には、当然ながらネットワークの接続状況の確認を事前に行うが、この際に、例えば、ＬＡＮケーブルの接続不備等により前記放送連携アプリの取得が可能でない場合に、その旨をエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１に表示する。また、ネットワーク接続は確立しているが、エラー状況が劣悪なために放送連携アプリの取得が正しく行えない場合等もエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１を表示して良い。放送連携アプリの取得を実行中で未だ前記放送連携アプリの実行を行える状態にない場合にエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１を表示しても良い。また、放送波の受信状況が安定せず、当初はＡＩＴ等の情報を受信できていたにも関わらず、途中からＡＩＴ等の情報を受信できなくなった場合等にもエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１を表示して良い。なお、このような場合、各サーバ装置から取得した放送連携アプリはそのままキャッシュしておくようにすれば、放送波の受信状況回復後にそのまま使用可能となる。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the reason why execution of the broadcast cooperation application, such as the confirmation result of the application profile 904, is not possible when it is determined that execution of the broadcast cooperation application is not possible, The error message 173d1 is displayed. For example, as a result of the confirmation of the application profile 904, when the predetermined option function is insufficient on the television receiver side, a message to that effect is displayed in the error message 173d1. An error code and a guide (URL or the like) of a home page of the television receiver manufacturer in which the explanation of the error code is described may be displayed. Alternatively, when acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application is performed from the network, naturally, the connection status of the network is confirmed in advance. At this time, for example, the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application is performed due to a connection failure of the LAN cable. If this is not possible, the fact is displayed in the error message 173d1. In addition, although the network connection is established, the error message 173d1 may be displayed also in the case where acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application can not be properly performed because the error status is poor. The error message 173d1 may be displayed when acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application is in progress and the broadcast cooperative application can not be executed yet. In addition, even though the reception status of the broadcast wave is unstable and the information such as AIT can be received at the beginning, the error message 173d1 is displayed also when the information such as AIT can not be received halfway through good. In such a case, if the broadcast cooperation application acquired from each server apparatus is cached as it is, it can be used as it is after the reception condition recovery of the broadcast wave.
　また、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認の結果、所定のオプション機能がテレビ受信機側に不足している場合に、エラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１に、最新のテレビ受信機用ファームウェアの確認若しくはアップデートを勧める旨の表示を行うようにしても良い。或いは、前記最新のファームウェアの確認若しくはアップデートを、放送受信装置１００が自動的に行うようにしても良い。或いは、テレビ受信機に有料のオプションハードウェアまたはオプションソフトウェアを追加することにより前記放送連携アプリを実行可能とできる場合には、前記有料のオプションハードウェアまたはオプションソフトウェアの案内を表示するようにしても良い。なおエラーメッセージ１７３ｄ１は、放送受信装置１００にではなく、携帯情報端末７００に表示するようにしても良い。 Further, as a result of the confirmation of the application profile 904, when the television receiver side lacks a predetermined option function, the error message 173d1 displays that the latest firmware for the television receiver is recommended to be confirmed or updated. You may do so. Alternatively, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may automatically check or update the latest firmware. Alternatively, if it is possible to execute the broadcast cooperation application by adding paid optional hardware or optional software to a television receiver, the guidance for the paid optional hardware or optional software may be displayed. good. The error message 173d1 may be displayed not on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 but on the portable information terminal 700.
　［携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリ実行画面］
　図１５は、図９のＳ６１９の処理で表示される放送連携アプリ（端末側）実行画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。図１５に示した放送連携アプリ実行画面７４１ｃは、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１、サブウィンドウ７４１ｃ２、選択マーカ７４１ｃ３、カーソルキー７４１ｃ４、７４１ｃ５、解説表示部７４１ｃ６、終了ボタン７４１ｃ７、で構成される。その他のオブジェクトが更に追加されていても良い。 [Broadcast cooperation application execution screen of mobile information terminal]
FIG. 15 is a screen display diagram showing an example of a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) execution screen displayed in the process of S619 in FIG. The broadcast cooperation application execution screen 741c shown in FIG. 15 includes a main window 741c1, a subwindow 741c2, a selection marker 741c3, cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5, an explanation display portion 741c6, and an end button 741c7. Other objects may be further added.
　本実施例において、携帯情報端末７００で実行される放送連携アプリ（端末側）は、放送受信装置１００で表示中の放送番組の詳細を確認するためのアプリケーションであるものとする。また、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１には放送受信装置１００で表示されている放送番組画面と同じ映像が、サブウィンドウ７４１ｃ２には選択マーカ７４１ｃ３で指定される位置の拡大映像が、それぞれ表示される。カーソルキー７４１ｃ４および７４１ｃ５を選択することにより、選択マーカ７４１ｃ３の位置を変更することが可能であるものとする。解説表示部７１４ｃ６には、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１に表示中の前記放送番組に関する解説字幕文や前記放送番組に関して他のユーザが投稿したコメント等が表示されるものとする。終了ボタン７４１ｃ７は前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）の動作を終了させるためのボタンである。 In the present embodiment, the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) executed by the portable information terminal 700 is an application for confirming the details of the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. In the main window 741c1, the same video as the broadcast program screen displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is displayed, and in the subwindow 741c2, an enlarged video at a position designated by the selection marker 741c3 is displayed. It is assumed that the position of the selection marker 741c3 can be changed by selecting the cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5. In the comment display portion 714c6, commentary caption text on the broadcast program being displayed in the main window 741c1 and comments posted by other users regarding the broadcast program are displayed. The end button 741c7 is a button for ending the operation of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side).
　前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）を携帯情報端末７００上で動作させることにより、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による放送通信連携サービスの機能拡張が可能となる。 By operating the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) on the portable information terminal 700, it is possible to expand the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service by the cooperation operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
　［放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面］
　図１６Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における電子番組表（ＥＰＧ）表示画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅは、主制御部１０１が第一分離部１３２から出力された番組情報データ列に基づいて作成した、本実施例のデジタル放送サービスにおける放送番組の配信予定表である。連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの番組表キー７４１ａ７を選択することにより、映像表示部１７３にＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅが表示されるものとする。 [EPG screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 16A is a screen display diagram showing an example of an electronic program guide (EPG) display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. The EPG display screen 173 e is a distribution schedule of broadcast programs in the digital broadcast service of the present embodiment, which is created based on the program information data string output from the first separation unit 132 by the main control unit 101. It is assumed that the EPG display screen 173e is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting the program guide key 741a7 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application.
　ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅは、本実施例においては、縦軸を時間表示、横軸をサービスＩＤ（チャンネル）表示としたマトリクス形状で、各時間帯に各チャンネルで放送される各放送番組の詳細情報を表示する。各放送番組の詳細情報１７３ｅ１は、図１６Ａに示したように、主としてタイトル領域１７３ｅ２と詳細説明領域１７３ｅ３で構成される。 In the present embodiment, the EPG display screen 173e has a matrix shape in which the vertical axis represents time and the horizontal axis represents service ID (channel), and detailed information of each broadcast program broadcasted on each channel in each time zone is displayed. indicate. As shown in FIG. 16A, the detailed information 173e1 of each broadcast program mainly includes a title area 173e2 and a detailed explanation area 173e3.
　タイトル領域１７３ｅ２には、各放送番組の番組タイトルおよび各放送番組の属性を表す記号等を表示する。前記各放送番組の属性を表す記号等は、例えば、新番組であることを意味する『Ｎｅｗ』を記号化した印や、再放送番組であることを意味する『Ｒｅｐｌａｙ』を記号化した印、等である。或いは、放送サービスによるデータ放送に対応していることを意味する『ｄａｔａ』を記号化した印等でも良い。また、本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組である場合は、その旨を示す『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印等でも良い。詳細説明領域１７３ｅ３は、各放送番組の番組内容や出演者、各放送番組を紹介するホームページのＵＲＬ、等の関連情報を表示する。 In the title area 173e2, a program title of each broadcast program and a symbol representing an attribute of each broadcast program are displayed. The symbol or the like representing the attribute of each broadcast program is, for example, a symbol obtained by symbolizing "New" which means that it is a new program, or a symbol which is symbolized "Replay" which means that it is a rebroadcast program. Etc. Alternatively, it may be a mark or the like that symbolizes "data" which means that it supports data broadcasting by the broadcasting service. In the case of a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is prepared, a mark or the like may be used as "Linkage" indicating that. The detailed explanation area 173e3 displays related information such as the program content and cast of each broadcast program, the URL of the homepage introducing each broadcast program, and the like.
　なお、タイトル領域１７３ｅ２に表示される前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印等は、前記放送番組に放送連携アプリが用意されている場合であっても、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認の結果、情報表示装置１００での実行が不可の場合には表示しないようにしても良い。また、タイトル領域１７３ｅ２に表示される、前記実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であることを示す『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印は、更に、携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能であるか否かで、その色、形状、字体、等を変更しても良い。携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能な場合には、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印と併せて『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印を表示するようにしても良い。 In addition, the mark etc. which symbolized the said "Linkage" displayed on the title area 173e2 show an information display apparatus as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, even when the broadcast cooperation application is prepared for the said broadcast program. If the execution at 100 is not possible, it may not be displayed. Further, the symbol displayed on the title area 173e2 and indicating "Linkage" indicating that it is a broadcast program for which the above-mentioned executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared can further cooperate with the portable terminal device. Depending on whether or not, the color, shape, font, etc. may be changed. When the cooperative operation with the portable terminal device is possible, a mark in which “Mobile” is symbolized may be displayed together with the mark in which “Linkage” is symbolized.
　なお、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印や『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印の表示の有無は、各放送番組の詳細情報等を含むＥＩＴ情報に予め記載しておいた、各放送番組が本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であるか否か、前記実行可能な放送連携アプリが携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能であるか否か、等の情報を取得することにより制御されるようにすれば良い。或いは、インターネット２００上の所定のサーバ装置に用意されたデジタル放送番組の番組配信情報から取得した前記情報を、デジタル放送サービスの放送波から取得した番組情報データ列に基づいて作成した電子番組表に付加するようにしても良い。 It should be noted that the presence or absence of the display of the mark “Linkage” and the mark “Mobile” are described in advance in the EIT information including detailed information of each broadcast program. Whether it is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the embodiment is prepared, and whether or not the executable broadcast cooperation application can cooperate with a mobile terminal device, It may be controlled by acquiring information such as. Alternatively, the information acquired from program distribution information of a digital broadcast program prepared in a predetermined server device on the Internet 200 may be an electronic program guide created based on a program information data string acquired from a broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service. It may be added.
　前述のように、ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅ上に、実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であることを示す『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印や携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能なことを示す『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印を表示することにより、ユーザは、放送受信装置１００における各放送番組の放送通信連携サービスへの対応状況を簡単に把握することが可能となる。なお、言うまでもなく、前記各放送番組の属性を表す所定の文字を記号化した印は、文字そのものや文章等と代替しても良い。各放送番組の詳細情報１７３ｅ１の背景色を変更することにより、各放送番組の放送通信連携サービスへの対応状況を示しても良い。また、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印や『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印等は、通常はタイトル領域１７３ｅ２には表示せず、各放送番組が番組選択カーソル１７３ｅ４により選択された場合にのみポップアップ表示されるようにしても良い。 As described above, it is possible to cooperate on the EPG display screen 173e with a mark that symbolizes "Linkage" indicating that it is a broadcast program for which an executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared, and a cooperative operation with a mobile terminal device By displaying the sign of “Mobile” indicating “”, it is possible for the user to easily grasp the support situation of the broadcast program in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the broadcast communication cooperation service. Needless to say, the mark obtained by symbolizing predetermined characters representing the attributes of each of the broadcast programs may be substituted for the characters themselves, sentences, and the like. By changing the background color of the detailed information 173e1 of each broadcast program, the support status of each broadcast program to the broadcast communication cooperation service may be indicated. Further, the mark “Linkage” and the mark “Mobile” are not usually displayed in the title area 173e2, and pop up only when each broadcast program is selected by the program selection cursor 173e4. It may be displayed.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００はＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅ上から放送番組毎の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行う機能を有する。例えば、ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅが表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃを用いてＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅ上の番組選択カーソル１７３ｅ４を移動させ、決定キー７４１ａｄにより任意の放送番組を選択することにより、前記選択した放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行う。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a function of performing viewing reservation and / or recording reservation for each broadcast program on the EPG display screen 173e. For example, while the EPG display screen 173e is displayed, the program selection cursor 173e4 on the EPG display screen 173e is moved using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and an arbitrary broadcast program is moved with the enter key 741ad. By selecting, the view reservation and / or the recording reservation of the selected broadcast program are performed.
　前述の処理において、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った放送番組が放送通信連携サービスへ対応する放送番組である場合、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行ったことをトリガとして、前記放送番組の放送開始時間を待たずに、前記放送番組用に用意された放送連携アプリの取得を開始するようにしても良い。即ち、各放送番組の詳細情報等を含むＥＩＴ情報に前記放送連携アプリの取得先を指定する情報（ＵＲＬ等のロケーション情報）を記載しておくようにする。このようにすれば、放送受信装置１００は、各放送番組用に用意された前記放送連携アプリの取得先の情報を、前記放送番組を番組選択カーソル１７３ｅ４で選択した時点で把握することが可能となる。このため、放送受信装置１００は、前記放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に前記放送連携アプリの取得を開始することが可能となる。 In the above process, when the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been performed is a broadcast program corresponding to a broadcast communication cooperation service, the broadcast is triggered by the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation being performed. The acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application prepared for the broadcast program may be started without waiting for the broadcast start time of the program. That is, information (location information such as a URL) specifying the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application is described in EIT information including detailed information and the like of each broadcast program. In this way, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can grasp the information of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application prepared for each broadcast program when the broadcast program is selected by the program selection cursor 173e4. Become. Therefore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can start acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program.
　なお、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った放送番組が放送通信連携サービスへ対応する放送番組であり、且つ、携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能な放送番組である場合、携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）も、前述と同様の処理で、前記放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に取得開始するようにしても良い。また、図１６Ｂに示すように、前記携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得先の情報（ＵＲＬ等のロケーション情報）を示す二次元バーコード１７３ｅ５等をＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅに表示して、ユーザに携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）のダウンロードを促すようにしても良い。 If the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been made is a broadcast program corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation service and is a broadcast program capable of cooperative operation with the mobile terminal device, for the mobile terminal device The broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared in the above may also be acquired and started before reaching the broadcast start time of the broadcast program by the same process as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, a two-dimensional bar code 173e5 or the like indicating information (location information such as a URL) of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device is displayed on the EPG display screen 173e. , And may prompt the user to download the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the portable terminal device.
　このように、放送受信装置１００が、ＥＰＧ情報に含まれる放送連携アプリの取得先情報を参照して、前記放送連携アプリの取得を放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に開始するようにすれば、放送連携アプリを記憶するサービス事業者サーバ４００の負荷を分散させることが可能となる。また、サービス事業者サーバ４００と情報表示端末１００の間のネットワークの通信速度が不十分な場合であっても、前記放送番組の放送開始直後から前記放送連携アプリを有効に活用することができるようになる。 As described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 refers to the acquisition destination information of the broadcast cooperation application included in the EPG information, and starts the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program. The load of the service provider server 400 storing the broadcast cooperation application can be dispersed. Also, even if the communication speed of the network between the service provider server 400 and the information display terminal 100 is insufficient, the broadcast cooperation application can be effectively used immediately after the start of the broadcast of the broadcast program. become.
　図１７は、ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅ上から放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った場合の放送連携アプリの取得シーケンスの一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。 FIG. 17 is an operation sequence diagram showing an example of the acquisition sequence of the broadcast cooperative application when the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation of the broadcast program are performed on the EPG display screen 173e.
　デジタル放送サービスの視聴中、放送受信装置１００の主制御部１０１は、第一分離部１３２から出力された番組情報データ列を取得する（Ｓ７０１）。ユーザが操作端末を用いてＥＰＧ画面の起動要求を行う（Ｓ７０２）と、映像表示部１７３にＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅが表示される（Ｓ７０３）。ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｅ上でユーザが操作端末を用いて任意の放送番組を選択することにより前記放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行う（Ｓ７０４）と、主制御部１０１は、前記第一分離部１３２から取得した番組情報データ列を確認して（Ｓ７０５）、更に、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った放送番組に連動する放送連携アプリの取得先のロケーションを確認する（Ｓ７０６）。 During viewing of the digital broadcast service, the main control unit 101 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires a program information data string output from the first separation unit 132 (S701). When the user uses the operation terminal to request activation of the EPG screen (S702), the EPG display screen 173e is displayed on the video display unit 173 (S703). When the user selects an arbitrary broadcast program using the operation terminal on the EPG display screen 173e to make a viewing reservation and / or a recording reservation of the broadcast program (S704), the main control unit 101 performs the first separation The program information data string acquired from the unit 132 is confirmed (S705), and the location of the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperative application linked to the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been made is further confirmed (S706).
　Ｓ７０６の処理の後、アプリケーション制御部１６１は、前記確認したＵＲＬに基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、所定のサービス事業者サーバ４００に対して放送連携アプリの送信要求を送信する（Ｓ７０７）。前記放送連携アプリの送信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０３の制御に基づき、必要に応じて放送受信装置１００の認証処理を行った後に、アプリケーション記憶領域４０１３に記憶された所定の放送連携アプリの配信を、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１を介して行う（Ｓ７０８）。続いて、アプリケーション制御部１６１は、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して受信した、サービス事業者サーバ４００から配信された前記所定の放送連携アプリをＲＡＭ１０４若しくはストレージ１１０にキャッシュするようにする（Ｓ７０９）。 After the process of S706, the application control unit 161 transmits a transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application to the predetermined service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the confirmed URL (S707). The service provider server 400 that has received the transmission request of the broadcast cooperation application performs authentication processing of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 as necessary, based on the control of the application management / distribution execution unit 4103, and then performs the processing in the application storage area 4013. Delivery of the stored predetermined broadcast cooperation application is performed via the LAN communication unit 421 (S 708). Subsequently, the application control unit 161 caches the predetermined broadcast collaboration application distributed from the service provider server 400 and received via the LAN communication unit 121 in the RAM 104 or the storage 110 (S709).
　以上説明した本実施例の方送受信装置１００によれば、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能となる。 According to the transmitting and receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to execute a function with higher added value.
　（実施例２）
　以下では、本発明の実施例２に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例１と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例１との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。 (Example 2)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The configuration, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as in Embodiment 1 unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication.
　高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスの試験放送が開始された。高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスでは、トランスポート方式にＭＭＴ（ＭＰＥＧ　Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ）方式を用いて、４Ｋ（３８４０画素×２１６０画素）や８Ｋ（７６８０画素×４３２０画素）等の所謂ＵＨＤ（或いは、ＳＨＤ）放送番組が配信される。一方、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスでは、トランスポート方式にＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ（Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ）方式を用いて、２Ｋ（１９２０画素×１０８０画素：ＨＤ）以下の放送番組のみが配信されている。しかしながら、デジタル放送サービスの受信装置であるテレビ受信機等では、高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスに対応しないテレビ受信機であっても、４Ｋのパネル解像度を有する機種が既に販売されており、ユーザの高画質化に対する要求は強いと考えられる。 Test broadcast of advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service has been started. In advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service, so-called UHD (or SHD) broadcasting such as 4K (3840 pixels × 2160 pixels) or 8K (7680 pixels × 4320 pixels) using MMT (MPEG Media Transport) as transport system The program is delivered. On the other hand, in the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service, only broadcast programs of 2K (1920 pixels × 1080 pixels: HD) or less are distributed using the MPEG2-TS (Transport Stream) method as a transport method. However, in the case of a television receiver that is a receiver for digital broadcasting service, even if it is a television receiver not compatible with advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service, models with a 4K panel resolution have already been sold, and users The demand for image quality is considered strong.
　前記ユーザの要求を満足するために、ＨＤ以下の放送番組を配信する現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスを、ＵＨＤ放送番組を配信する新たな地上波デジタル放送サービス等に変更することが考えられる。しかしながら、地上波デジタル放送サービスで使用できる周波数帯は限られており、新たな地上波デジタル放送サービスを開始するためには、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いた現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスを終了せざるを得なくなる可能性がある。この場合、ユーザが現在所持している現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機が使用できなくなることとなり、好ましくない。 In order to satisfy the requirements of the user, it is conceivable to change the current terrestrial digital broadcast service for delivering HD or lower broadcast programs to a new terrestrial digital broadcast service or the like for delivering UHD broadcast programs. However, the frequency band that can be used for the terrestrial digital broadcasting service is limited, and in order to start a new terrestrial digital broadcasting service, the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service using the MPEG2-TS system has to be ended. You may not get In this case, the television receiver compatible with the current digital terrestrial broadcasting service currently owned by the user can not be used, which is not preferable.
　そこで、本発明の本実施例では、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機のユーザはこれまでと同じ視聴環境で視聴を継続可能であり、且つ、新たにＵＨＤ放送番組等の提供が可能なより好適な地上波デジタル放送サービスのシステムについて説明する。 Therefore, in the present embodiment of the present invention, the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcast service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and newly providing a UHD broadcast program etc. A system of possible more preferable terrestrial digital broadcasting service is described.
　［システム構成］
　図１８Ａは、放送通信連携システムを実現する本実施例の放送システムの一例を示すシステム構成図である。本実施例の放送システムは、放送受信装置１００Ｓとアンテナ１００ａ１、放送受信装置１００Ｕとアンテナ１００ａ２、放送局３００Ｂ、放送局の電波塔３００ｔ、で構成される。 [System configuration]
FIG. 18A is a system configuration diagram showing an example of a broadcast system according to the present embodiment for realizing a broadcast communication cooperation system. The broadcast system according to this embodiment includes a broadcast receiving apparatus 100S, an antenna 100a1, a broadcast receiving apparatus 100U and an antenna 100a2, a broadcast station 300B, and a radio wave tower 300t of the broadcast station.
　放送受信装置１００Ｓは、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いた現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスを受信可能なテレビ受信機である。放送受信装置１００Ｓは、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上デジタル放送サービスの放送波を、アンテナ１００ａ１を介して受信する。表示部（表示パネル）は４Ｋ解像度を有していても良い。現行のＢＳ／ＣＳデジタル放送サービスを更に受信可能であっても良い。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S is a television receiver capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service using the MPEG2-TS system. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1. The display unit (display panel) may have 4K resolution. It may also be able to receive the current BS / CS digital broadcast service.
　一方、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いた現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスの受信機能に加え、本実施例の放送通信連携システムに対応する機能を有するテレビ受信機である。放送受信装置１００Ｕは、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスの放送波を、アンテナ１００ａ２を介して受信する。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、図示を省略したルータ装置等を介してインターネット（以下、ネットと略称する場合あり）等と接続可能であり、インターネット上の各サーバ装置（例えば、放送局３００Ｂが備えるサーバ装置）との通信によるデータの送受信が可能である。即ち、放送受信装置１００Ｕは少なくとも複数の異なる伝送路（図１８Ａの例では、放送波の伝送路とインターネットの伝送路の２つ）を介して伝送されるデータの受信が可能な構成となっている。なお、放送受信装置１００Ｕは更に、現行のＢＳ／ＣＳデジタル放送サービスや高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスを受信可能であっても良い。 On the other hand, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is a television receiver having a function corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation system of this embodiment, in addition to the reception function of the current terrestrial digital broadcast service using the MPEG2-TS system. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a2. Further, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U can be connected to the Internet (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a net in some cases) or the like through a router apparatus or the like (not shown), and each server apparatus (for example, the broadcasting station 300B) It is possible to transmit and receive data by communication with the server device. That is, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is configured to be able to receive data transmitted via at least a plurality of different transmission paths (two in the example of FIG. 18A, the transmission path of the broadcast wave and the transmission path of the Internet). There is. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U may further be capable of receiving the current BS / CS digital broadcasting service or advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service.
　放送局３００Ｂは、地上波デジタル放送サービスで配信する放送番組の制作および配信（サービス提供）等を行う放送設備を備える。また、放送局３００Ｂは、コンテンツサーバやアプリケーションサーバ等を備える。コンテンツサーバ（図示省略）は、放送番組（動画コンテンツ等）および各放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組概要、出演者、放送日時、等のメタデータを記憶する。アプリケーションサーバ（図示省略）は、放送通信連携システムによるサービスを提供するために用意されたサーバ装置であり、前記コンテンツサーバに記憶された動画コンテンツ等と連携するアプリケーションやその他のデータを記憶する。前記コンテンツサーバやアプリケーションサーバは、実施例１に記載した放送局サーバ３００やサービス事業者サーバ４００の機能を更に兼ね備えていても良い。 The broadcast station 300B is provided with a broadcast facility that produces and distributes (provides a service) a broadcast program to be distributed by a terrestrial digital broadcast service. The broadcast station 300B also includes a content server, an application server, and the like. A content server (not shown) stores metadata such as broadcast programs (moving image content and the like) and program titles of each broadcast program, program IDs, program outlines, performers, broadcast dates and the like. The application server (not shown) is a server device prepared to provide a service by the broadcast communication cooperation system, and stores an application and other data that cooperate with the moving image content and the like stored in the content server. The content server and the application server may further have the functions of the broadcast station server 300 and the service provider server 400 described in the first embodiment.
　電波塔３００ｔは、放送局３００Ｂの放送設備からデジタル放送信号、ＡＩＴ、アプリケーション提示に関する制御情報、等を含む地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を送出する。なお、アプリケーション提示に関する制御情報とは、テレビ受信機上における放送番組とアプリケーションの重ね合わせやアプリケーションの提示可否に関する制御情報である。 The radio tower 300t transmits digital broadcast waves of a terrestrial digital broadcast service including digital broadcast signals, AIT, control information on application presentation, and the like from the broadcast facilities of the broadcast station 300B. The control information on application presentation is control information on superposition of the broadcast program and the application on the television receiver and whether or not the application can be presented.
　図１８Ｂは、放送局３００Ｂで行われる（Ａ）補完信号生成処理、および、放送受信装置１００Ｕで行われる（Ｂ）補完（高画質化）処理の一例を示す概念図である。 FIG. 18B is a conceptual diagram showing an example of (A) complementary signal generation processing performed by the broadcast station 300B and (B) complementary (image quality improvement) processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
　本実施例の放送システムでは、ＵＨＤ（ＳＨＤ）対応のテレビカメラや編集装置を用いて、まず、４Ｋ（８Ｋ）解像度で放送番組の制作を行う。次に、放送局３００Ｂにおいて、前記４Ｋ（８Ｋ）放送番組から、放送波で送出する２Ｋ信号と、ネットワークを介して配信する補完信号とを生成するダウンコンバート＋補完信号生成処理を行う。４Ｋ（８Ｋ）放送番組からダウンコンバートして生成した２Ｋ信号は、電波塔３００ｔを介してＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式の現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスと同様の放送波として送出される。補完信号生成処理で生成した補完信号は、補完データストリームに変換されてアプリケーションサーバに記憶され、インターネット等のネットワークを介して配信される。なお、ダウンコンバートにより生成される２Ｋ信号は、１４４０画素×１０８０画素やそれ以下の画素数であっても良い。放送受信装置１００Ｕでは、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信して、２Ｋ信号を再生する。また、インターネット等のネットワークを介して取得した補完データストリームに対して、復号等の処理を施し、補完信号を再生する。更に、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、前記再生した２Ｋ信号と補完信号を用いて補完（高画質化）処理を行うことにより、４Ｋ（８Ｋ）映像信号を生成する。 In the broadcast system of the present embodiment, first, a broadcast program is produced at 4K (8K) resolution using a UHD (SHD) compatible television camera or editing apparatus. Next, in the broadcasting station 300B, a downconversion + complementing signal generation process is performed to generate a 2K signal to be transmitted by a broadcast wave and a complementary signal to be distributed via a network from the 4K (8K) broadcast program. A 2K signal generated by down-converting from a 4K (8K) broadcast program is transmitted as a broadcast wave similar to the current terrestrial digital broadcast service of the MPEG2-TS system via the radio wave tower 300t. The complementary signal generated by the complementary signal generation process is converted into a complementary data stream, stored in the application server, and distributed via a network such as the Internet. The 2K signal generated by the down conversion may have 1440 pixels × 1080 pixels or less. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcasting service transmitted from the radio tower 300t and reproduces a 2K signal. Also, processing such as decoding is performed on the complementary data stream acquired via a network such as the Internet, and a complementary signal is reproduced. Furthermore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U generates a 4K (8K) video signal by performing complementation (image quality improvement) processing using the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal.
　図１８Ｃは、放送局３００Ｂで行われる補完信号生成処理の具体的な処理の一例を示す概念図である。本実施例の放送システムでは、ＵＨＤ対応のテレビカメラや編集装置を用いて、まず、４Ｋ解像度で放送番組の制作を行う。４Ｋ放送番組は、水平方向３８４０画素×垂直方向２１６０画素を有する映像信号である。次に、放送局３００Ｂにおいて、前記４Ｋ放送番組から、放送波で送出する２Ｋ信号とネットで配信する補完信号とを生成する補完信号生成処理を行う。 FIG. 18C is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a specific process of the complementary signal generation process performed by the broadcast station 300B. In the broadcast system of the present embodiment, first, a broadcast program is produced at 4K resolution using a UHD compatible television camera and editing apparatus. The 4K broadcast program is a video signal having 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction × 2160 pixels in the vertical direction. Next, in the broadcast station 300B, a complementary signal generation process is performed to generate a 2K signal to be transmitted by a broadcast wave and a complementary signal to be distributed by a net from the 4K broadcast program.
　放送波で送出する２Ｋ信号は、４Ｋ放送番組の隣接する４画素を１単位領域（図１８Ｃでは、Ｐ００とＰ０１とＰ１０とＰ１１の４画素で１単位領域）として、その中から１画素を選択する（図１８Ｃでは、Ｐ００の画素を選択）ダウンコンバート処理により生成する。単位領域内の各画素の平均値をとることによりダウンコンバート処理を行っても良い。その他の演算処理によりダウンコンバート処理を行っても良い。単位領域は図と異なる画素の組み合わせであっても良い。 The 2K signal transmitted by the broadcast wave selects one pixel from among four adjacent pixels of the 4K broadcast program as one unit area (in FIG. 18C, one unit area of four pixels P00, P01, P10 and P11). (In FIG. 18C, select the pixel P00) to generate by down conversion processing. The down conversion process may be performed by taking the average value of each pixel in the unit area. The down conversion process may be performed by another arithmetic process. The unit area may be a combination of pixels different from those shown in the figure.
　ダウンコンバート処理は、輝度信号と色差信号のそれぞれに、或いは、ＲＧＢの各信号に施される。ダウンコンバート処理により画素数の削減がなされ、２Ｋ信号は、水平方向１９２０画素×垂直方向１０８０画素を有する映像信号となる。２Ｋ信号は前述のコンテンツサーバに記憶される。２Ｋ信号の映像信号は、現行の地上波デジタル放送のシステムと同様に、圧縮符号化、パケット化、各種制御信号の付加、変調、等の処理を施され、図１８Ａの電波塔３００ｔからデジタル放送波として送出される。このデジタル放送波は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機でも受信可能である。 The down conversion process is performed on each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or on each of the RGB signals. The number of pixels is reduced by the down conversion process, and the 2K signal becomes a video signal having 1920 pixels in the horizontal direction × 1080 pixels in the vertical direction. The 2K signal is stored in the content server described above. The video signal of the 2K signal is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, addition of various control signals, modulation, etc. in the same manner as the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system, and digital broadcasting from the radio tower 300t of FIG. 18A. It is delivered as a wave. This digital broadcast wave can also be received by a television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service.
　ネットワークを介して配信する補完信号は、前記４Ｋ放送番組と前記２Ｋ信号の差分演算により生成される。図中、補完信号のＱ００の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ００の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素との差分（即ち、『０』）となる。Ｑ０１の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ０１の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素との差分となる。Ｑ１０の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ１０の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素との差分となる。Ｑ１１の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ１１の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素との差分となる。補完信号は、前記４Ｋ放送番組と同様に、水平方向３８４０画素×垂直方向２１６０画素分のデータを有する。 The complementary signal distributed via the network is generated by the difference operation of the 4K broadcast program and the 2K signal. In the figure, the pixel Q00 of the complementary signal is the difference (that is, "0") between the pixel P00 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q01 is the difference between the pixel P01 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q10 is the difference between the pixel P10 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q11 is the difference between the pixel P11 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel P00 of the 2K signal. Similar to the 4K broadcast program, the complementary signal has data of 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction × 2160 pixels in the vertical direction.
　或いは、２Ｋ信号を単位領域内の各画素の平均値（Ｐａｖ００とする）で生成した場合には、以下となる。図中、補完信号のＱ００の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ００の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰａｖ００の画素との差分となる。Ｑ０１の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ０１の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰａｖ００の画素との差分となる。Ｑ１０の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ１０の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰａｖ００の画素との差分となる。Ｑ１１の画素は、４Ｋ放送番組のＰ１１の画素と２Ｋ信号のＰａｖ００の画素との差分となる。 Alternatively, when the 2K signal is generated with the average value (Pav00) of each pixel in the unit area, the following occurs. In the drawing, the pixel Q00 of the complementary signal is the difference between the pixel P00 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q01 is the difference between the pixel P01 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q10 is the difference between the pixel P10 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal. The pixel Q11 is the difference between the pixel P11 of the 4K broadcast program and the pixel Pav00 of the 2K signal.
　差分演算処理は、輝度信号と色差信号のそれぞれに、或いは、ＲＧＢの各信号に施される。補完信号は、必要に応じて、圧縮符号化、パケット化、各種制御信号の付加、等の処理を施されて補完データストリームに変換される。補完データストリームは、前述のアプリケーションサーバに記憶され、インターネット等を介して配信される。補完信号は、ＤＣ成分が小さくなるため、圧縮符号化処理において高い圧縮効率が期待できる。 The difference calculation process is performed on each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or on each of the RGB signals. The complementary signal is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, addition of various control signals, and the like as necessary, and converted into a complementary data stream. The complementary data stream is stored in the above-mentioned application server and distributed via the Internet or the like. Since the complementary signal has a small DC component, high compression efficiency can be expected in the compression coding process.
　なお、補完信号を圧縮符号化する際の圧縮符号化方式は、現行の地上波デジタル放送のシステムと同一でも良い。しかしながら、現行の地上波デジタル放送のシステムで用いられている圧縮符号化方式より圧縮率の高い圧縮符号化方式を用いる方が、伝送効率が高くなるので、より好ましい。例えば、Ｈ．２６４／ＭＰＥＧ－４　ＡＶＣ方式やＨ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣ方式の圧縮符号化方式が用いられても良い。 Note that the compression encoding method when compression encoding the complementary signal may be the same as the current terrestrial digital broadcast system. However, it is more preferable to use a compression encoding method having a compression rate higher than that of the compression encoding method used in the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system, because the transmission efficiency is higher. For example, H. H.264 / MPEG-4 AVC system and H.264. A 265 / HEVC compression encoding scheme may be used.
　ここで、インターネットを介して配信される補完データストリームの伝送方式はさまざま考えられる。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式でも良く、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ）方式でも良く、ＭＭＴ（ＭＰＥＧ　Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ）方式でも良い。その他の伝送方式でも良い。これらの伝送方式の中で、ＩＰ伝送のネットワーク配信への対応のしやすさと、放送サービスとの親和性を考慮すると、ＭＭＴ（ＭＰＥＧ　Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ）方式が最も好ましい。 Here, there are various conceivable transmission methods of the complementary data stream distributed via the Internet. The MPEG2-TS method may be used, the MPEG2-PS (Program Stream) method may be used, and the MMT (MPEG Media Transport) method may be used. Other transmission methods may be used. Among these transmission methods, the MMT (MPEG Media Transport) method is the most preferable in consideration of the easiness of the correspondence to the network distribution of IP transmission and the affinity with the broadcast service.
　図１８Ｄは、放送受信装置１００Ｕで行われる補完（高画質化）処理の一例を示す概念図である。放送受信装置１００Ｕは、アンテナ１００ａ２を介して、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信する。更に、前記受信したデジタル放送波に対して、復調、選局、復号、等の処理を施して、２Ｋ信号を再生する。前記復調、選局、復号、等の処理は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機と同様の処理で良い。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、図示を省略したインターネットやルータ装置等を介して、放送局３００Ｂのアプリケーションサーバから補完データストリームを取得する。更に、前記取得した補完データストリームに対して、復号等の処理を施し、補完信号を再生する。 FIG. 18D is a conceptual diagram showing an example of the complementation (image quality improvement) processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio wave tower 300t through the antenna 100a2. Furthermore, the received digital broadcast wave is subjected to processing such as demodulation, channel selection, and decoding to reproduce a 2K signal. The processing such as demodulation, tuning, decoding, etc. may be the same processing as the current television receiver compatible with terrestrial digital broadcasting service. Also, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U acquires the complementary data stream from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet, a router device, etc. (not shown). Further, processing such as decoding is performed on the acquired complementary data stream to reproduce a complementary signal.
　更に、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、前記再生した２Ｋ信号と補完信号を用いて補完（高画質化）処理を行うことにより、４Ｋ映像信号を生成する。図中、４Ｋ映像信号のＰ００の画素は、２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素と補完信号のＱ００の画素（即ち、『０』）との加算処理により生成可能である。４Ｋ映像信号のＰ０１の画素は、２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素と補完信号のＱ０１の画素との加算処理により生成可能である。４Ｋ映像信号のＰ１０の画素は、２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素と補完信号のＱ１０の画素との加算処理により生成可能である。４Ｋ映像信号のＰ１１の画素は、２Ｋ信号のＰ００の画素と補完信号のＱ１１の画素との加算処理により生成可能である。 Furthermore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U generates a 4K video signal by performing complementation (image quality improvement) processing using the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal. In the figure, the pixel P00 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q00 (that is, “0”) of the complementary signal. The pixel P01 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q01 of the complementary signal. The pixel P10 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q10 of the complementary signal. The pixel P11 of the 4K video signal can be generated by an addition process of the pixel P00 of the 2K signal and the pixel Q11 of the complementary signal.
　また、前記再生した２Ｋ信号と補完信号は、それぞれ秒間６０フレーム（５０フレーム、１２０フレーム、等でも良い）程度の連続する画像で構成される。前記再生した２Ｋ信号と補完信号は、所定の同期情報に基づいて同期処理がなされ、対応するそれぞれのフレームの各画素間で補完（高画質化）処理が行われる。補完（高画質化）処理は、輝度信号と色差信号のそれぞれに、或いは、ＲＧＢの各信号に施される。補完（高画質化）処理で生成された４Ｋ映像信号は、更に、所定の画像処理を施されて表示部（表示パネル）に表示される。 In addition, the reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are respectively composed of continuous images of about 60 frames (50 frames, 120 frames, etc. may be sufficient) per second. The reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are subjected to synchronization processing based on predetermined synchronization information, and complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed between the pixels of each corresponding frame. The complementation (image quality improvement) processing is applied to each of the luminance signal and the color difference signal, or to each signal of RGB. The 4K video signal generated by the complementation (image quality improvement) processing is further subjected to predetermined image processing and displayed on the display unit (display panel).
　なお、インターネット等を介して配信される補完データストリームは、輝度信号に関する補完信号のみを有し色差信号に関する補完信号を有しない状態であっても良い。この場合、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、インターネット等を介して取得するデータの容量を削減することができる。また、この場合、補完（高画質化）処理により生成された４Ｋ映像信号は、色差解像度が若干低下するが、輝度解像度は十分に確保されており、視聴上不具合を生じない。 The complementary data stream distributed via the Internet or the like may have only the complementary signal for the luminance signal and no complementary signal for the color difference signal. In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U can reduce the volume of data acquired via the Internet or the like. Further, in this case, although the 4K video signal generated by the complementation (image quality improvement) processing has a slight reduction in color difference resolution, the luminance resolution is sufficiently secured, and there is no problem in viewing.
　或いは、インターネット等を介して配信される補完データストリームは、輝度信号に関する補完信号と色差信号に関する補完信号の双方を有しており、放送受信装置１００Ｕが、ネットワークの通信状況等に応じて、輝度信号に関する補完信号を優先的に取得するようにしても良い。この場合、インターネットの通信状況等が良好であれば、放送受信装置１００Ｕは輝度信号に関する補完信号と色差信号に関する補完信号の双方を取得して補完（高画質化）処理を行い、インターネット等の通信状況等が良好でなければ、輝度信号に関する補完信号のみを取得して補完（高画質化）処理を行う。 Alternatively, the complementary data stream distributed via the Internet or the like has both of the complementary signal for the luminance signal and the complementary signal for the color difference signal, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U performs the luminance according to the communication status of the network, etc. The complementary signal related to the signal may be acquired preferentially. In this case, if the communication condition on the Internet is good, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U acquires both the complementary signal for the luminance signal and the complementary signal for the color difference signal, performs the complementary (image quality improvement) processing, and communicates on the Internet etc. If the situation etc. is not good, only the complementary signal related to the luminance signal is acquired and the complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed.
　なお、図１８Ｃに示した補完信号生成処理、および、図１８Ｄに示した補完（高画質化）処理は、放送局３００Ｂで制作された放送番組が８Ｋ解像度であっても適用可能である。但し、この場合、１単位領域は１６画素で構成され、補完信号は、前記８Ｋ放送番組と同様に、水平方向７６８０画素×垂直方向４３２０画素分のデータを有するものとする。 The complementary signal generation process shown in FIG. 18C and the complementary (image quality improvement) process shown in FIG. 18D are applicable even if the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 8K resolution. However, in this case, one unit area is composed of 16 pixels, and the complementary signal has data for 7680 pixels in the horizontal direction × 4320 pixels in the vertical direction, as in the 8K broadcast program.
　電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスを受信可能なテレビ受信機（放送受信装置１００Ｓ）でも受信可能である。放送受信装置１００Ｓは、アンテナ１００ａ１を介して、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信し、前記受信したデジタル放送波に対して、復調、選局、復号、等の処理を施し、２Ｋ信号を再生する。放送受信装置１００Ｓは、前記再生した２Ｋ信号に所定の画像処理を施して表示部（表示パネル）に表示可能である。 The digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t can be received by a television receiver (broadcast receiver 100S) capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1, and demodulates, selects, decodes, etc. the received digital broadcast wave. Process and reproduce the 2K signal. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S can perform predetermined image processing on the reproduced 2K signal and display it on a display unit (display panel).
　即ち、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスにのみ対応するテレビ受信機（放送受信装置１００Ｓ）は、デジタル放送波のみを受信して２Ｋ映像信号を表示することが可能であり、本実施例の放送通信連携システムに対応する機能を有するテレビ受信機（放送受信装置１００Ｕ）は、デジタル放送波の受信および補完データストリームの取得により４Ｋ映像信号や８Ｋ映像信号を表示することが可能である。 That is, a television receiver (broadcast receiving apparatus 100S) that supports only the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can receive only digital broadcast waves and can display 2K video signals. The television receiver (the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U) having a function corresponding to the cooperation system can display the 4K video signal and the 8K video signal by receiving the digital broadcast wave and acquiring the complementary data stream.
　［放送受信装置の構成］
　図１９Ａは、放送受信装置１００Ｕの内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。本実施例の放送受信装置１００Ｕは、実施例１における放送受信装置１００と基本的に同等の構成を有するが、映像重畳部１７１に代替して映像補完／重畳部１７１Ｕが用意される。映像補完／重畳部１７１Ｕは、映像重畳部１７１の有する機能に加えて、第一映像復号部１３３から出力される２Ｋ信号と第二映像復号部１５３から出力される補完信号とに対して補完（高画質化）処理を行うことにより４Ｋ（８Ｋ）映像信号を生成する機能を備える。補完（高画質化）処理に用いる補完データストリームは、アプリケーション制御部１６１および／またはアプリケーションエンジン１６２の制御に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット上の所定のサーバ装置から取得する。また、映像表示部１７３は、少なくとも水平方向３８４０画素×垂直方向２１６０画素のパネル解像度を有するデバイスである。 [Configuration of broadcast receiving apparatus]
FIG. 19A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the first embodiment, but a video complement / overlap unit 171U is prepared instead of the video superimposing unit 171. In addition to the functions of the video superimposing unit 171, the video complementing / superimposing unit 171U complements the 2K signal output from the first video decoding unit 133 and the complementary signal output from the second video decoding unit 153 ( It has a function of generating a 4K (8K) video signal by performing image quality improvement processing. The complementary data stream used for the complementary (image quality improvement) processing is acquired from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the control of the application control unit 161 and / or the application engine 162. Further, the video display unit 173 is a device having a panel resolution of at least 3840 pixels in the horizontal direction × 2160 pixels in the vertical direction.
　また、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、操作入力部１７０を有する。操作入力部１７０は、放送受信装置１００Ｕに対する操作指示の入力を行う指示入力部であり、本実施例では、図示を省略したリモコンから送信されるコマンドを受信するリモコン受信部とボタンスイッチを並べた操作キーで構成されるものとする。何れか一方のみであっても良い。また、操作入力部１７０は、映像表示部１７３に重ねて配したタッチパネルで代替しても良い。拡張インタフェース部１２４に接続したキーボード等で代替しても良い。前記図示を省略したリモコンは、リモコンコマンド送信機能を備えた携帯情報端末７００等で代替しても良い。 Also, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U has an operation input unit 170. The operation input unit 170 is an instruction input unit for inputting an operation instruction to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, and in the present embodiment, a remote control receiving unit for receiving a command transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) and a button switch are arranged. It shall be composed of operation keys. Only one of them may be used. Further, the operation input unit 170 may be replaced by a touch panel disposed overlapping the image display unit 173. Alternatively, a keyboard connected to the expansion interface unit 124 may be used. The remote control whose illustration is omitted may be replaced by a portable information terminal 700 or the like having a remote control command transmission function.
　図１９Ｂは、放送受信装置１００Ｕのソフトウェア構成図の一例であり、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４およびストレージ部１１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。放送受信装置１００Ｕのソフトウェア構成は、実施例１における放送受信装置１００のソフトウェア構成と基本的に同等であるが、ストレージ部１１０に記憶された受信機能プログラム１００２をＲＡＭ１０４に展開した際に、放送番組再生部１１０２ａ、通信コンテンツ再生部１１０２ｂ、連携アプリ制御部１１０２ｃ、端末連携管理部１１０２ｄ（但し、図示省略）の他に、補完（高画質化）処理部１１０２ｕを構成する。補完（高画質化）処理部１１０２ｕは、映像補完／重畳部１７１Ｕで実行される補完（高画質化）処理を、主に制御する。 FIG. 19B is an example of a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, showing a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110. The software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is basically the same as the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the first embodiment, but when the receiving function program 1002 stored in the storage unit 110 is expanded in the RAM 104, the broadcast program In addition to the reproduction unit 1102a, the communication content reproduction unit 1102b, the cooperation application control unit 1102c, and the terminal cooperation management unit 1102d (not shown), a complementation (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102u is configured. The complementation (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102 u mainly controls the complementation (image quality improvement) processing executed by the image complementation / superimposition unit 171 U.
　［補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションの識別］
　前述の補完（高画質化）処理は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００Ｕでのみ実行可能であり、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスにのみ対応する放送受信装置１００Ｓでは実行できない。即ち、補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーション（補完データストリーム等）の取得は、放送受信装置１００Ｕでは有効な処理であるが、放送受信装置１００Ｓでは無効な処理となる。一方、従来の放送通信連携システムに対応するアプリケーションは、放送受信装置１００Ｓでも実行可能である。したがって、取得するアプリケーションが、補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであるか従来の放送通信連携システムに対応するアプリケーションであるかが予め識別可能であれば有用である。補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションの識別の方法としては、以下の何れかを行えば良い。以下の各方法を適宜組み合わせても良い。 [Identification of complementary (high image quality) processing related application]
The above-mentioned complementation (image quality improvement) processing can be executed only by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment, and can not be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S that supports only the current terrestrial digital broadcast service. That is, acquisition of a complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application (complementary data stream or the like) is an effective process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, but an invalid process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S. On the other hand, the application corresponding to the conventional broadcast communication cooperation system can also be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100S. Therefore, it is useful if it is possible to identify in advance whether the application to be acquired is a complementary (high image quality processing) processing related application or an application corresponding to a conventional broadcast communication cooperation system. As a method of identifying the complement (high image quality) processing related application, any one of the following may be performed. The following methods may be combined as appropriate.
　（１）ＡＩＴのテーブルＩＤによる識別
　図２０Ａにアプリケーション制御情報（ＡＩＴ）のデータ構造の一例を示す。ＡＩＴは、アプリケーションを特定および制御するための付加的なアプリケーション情報を伝送するデータを含む。同図に示したデータ構造はＡＩＴをセクション形式で記述した場合の例である。ＡＩＴはＸＭＬ形式で記述されても良い。 (1) Identification by AIT Table ID FIG. 20A shows an example of a data structure of application control information (AIT). The AIT contains data carrying additional application information to identify and control the application. The data structure shown in the figure is an example when AIT is described in section format. AIT may be described in XML format.
　同図に示したＡＩＴのデータ構造における『ｔａｂｌｅ＿ｉｄ』は、本テーブルがアプリケーション情報テーブルであることを示すパラメータである。このパラメータを、従来の放送通信連携システムに対応するアプリケーションを取得するためのＡＩＴと補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションを取得するためのＡＩＴとで異ならせることにより、ＡＩＴの制御対象のアプリケーションが本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションか否かを識別されて良い。即ち、従来の放送通信連携システムに対応するアプリケーションを特定および制御するためのテーブルと、補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションを特定および制御するためのテーブルとを、別々に用意しても良い。 "Table_id" in the data structure of the AIT shown in the figure is a parameter indicating that this table is an application information table. By making this parameter different between AIT for acquiring an application compatible with a conventional broadcast communication cooperation system and AIT for acquiring a complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application, the application to be controlled by AIT is Whether the application is the complement (high image quality) processing related application of the present embodiment may be identified. That is, a table for specifying and controlling an application corresponding to a conventional broadcast communication cooperation system and a table for specifying and controlling a complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application may be separately prepared.
　（２）ＡＩＴのアプリケーション形式による識別
　図２０Ａに示したＡＩＴのデータ構造における『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ』は、図６のアプリケーションタイプ９０１に対応するパラメータであり、ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションの形式を示す。図２０Ｂにアプリケーション形式の一覧を示すように、このパラメータが『０ｘ０００１』である場合、前記制御対象のアプリケーションはＡＲＩＢ－Ｊアプリケーションと識別される。このパラメータが『０ｘ００１０』である場合、前記制御対象のアプリケーションは放送通信連携ＨＴＭＬ５アプリケーションと識別される。このパラメータが『０ｘ０１００』である場合に、前記制御対象のアプリケーションは本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションと識別されて良い。 (2) Identification by Application Format of AIT [application_type] in the data structure of AIT shown in FIG. 20A is a parameter corresponding to the application type 901 of FIG. 6, and shows the format of the application to be controlled by AIT. As a list of application types is shown in FIG. 20B, when this parameter is “0x0001”, the application to be controlled is identified as an ARIB-J application. If this parameter is “0x0010”, the application to be controlled is identified as a broadcast communication cooperation HTML 5 application. When this parameter is “0x0100”, the application to be controlled may be identified as the complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application of this embodiment.
　（３）ＡＩＴのアプリケーション識別子による識別
　図２０Ａに示したＡＩＴのデータ構造における『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｅｒ（）』は、図６のアプリケーション識別子９０２に対応するパラメータであり、ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションを作成した事業者（組織）の識別番号と、事業者（組織）識別内で一意に付与されるアプリケーション識別番号とが記述される。図２０Ｃにアプリケーション識別子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｏｒｇａｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄ』が事業者（組織）識別番号を示す。図中の『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄ』がアプリケーション識別番号を示す。 (3) Identification by Application Identifier of AIT [application_identifier ()] in the data structure of AIT shown in FIG. 20A is a parameter corresponding to application identifier 902 in FIG. 6, and a business that creates an application to be controlled by AIT. The identification number of the person (organization) and the application identification number uniquely assigned in the enterprise (organization) identification are described. FIG. 20C shows an example of the data structure of the application identifier. "Organization_id" in the figure indicates a business entity (organization) identification number. "Application_id" in the figure indicates an application identification number.
　前記アプリケーション識別子において、前記事業者（組織）識別番号またはアプリケーション識別番号が予め定めた所定の値（の範囲内）である場合に、前記制御対象のアプリケーションが本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであると識別しても良い。或いは、前記アプリケーション識別番号の所定のビットが『１』である場合に、前記制御対象のアプリケーションが本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであると識別しても良い。或いは、同図に示したように、所定のフラグ（図中の『ｕｈｄ＿ｄａｔａ＿ｆｌａｇ』等）を追加することにより、前記制御対象のアプリケーションが本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであるか否かを識別するようにしても良い。前記所定のフラグは、異なる識別子や記述子に記述されても良い。 In the application identifier, when the business operator (organization) identification number or the application identification number has (a range of) a predetermined value defined in advance, the application to be controlled is a complement (high image quality enhancement) of the present embodiment. It may be identified as a processing related application. Alternatively, when the predetermined bit of the application identification number is “1”, the application to be controlled may be identified as the complementary (image quality improvement) processing related application of the present embodiment. Alternatively, as shown in the figure, by adding a predetermined flag (“uhd_data_flag” or the like in the figure), whether the application to be controlled is the complement (high image quality processing) processing related application of the present embodiment You may make it identify whether or not. The predetermined flag may be described in a different identifier or descriptor.
　（４）ＡＩＴのアプリケーション制御コードによる識別
　図２０Ａに示したＡＩＴのデータ構造における『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｃｏｄｅ』は、図６のアプリケーション制御コード９０３に対応するパラメータであり、ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションの状態を制御する制御コードが記述される。図２０Ｄにアプリケーション制御コードの一覧を示すように、このパラメータが『０ｘ０８』である場合に補完データストリームの取得を開始するように、アプリケーションの状態を制御して良い。即ち、アプリケーション制御コードの値が『０ｘ０８』である場合、前記制御対象のアプリケーションが本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであると識別されて良い。 (4) Identification by Application Control Code of AIT [application_control_code] in the data structure of AIT shown in FIG. 20A is a parameter corresponding to the application control code 903 of FIG. 6, and controls the state of the application to be controlled by AIT. Control code is described. As shown in the list of application control codes in FIG. 20D, the state of the application may be controlled so as to start acquisition of the complementary data stream when this parameter is “0x08”. That is, when the value of the application control code is “0x08”, the application to be controlled may be identified as the complementary (high image quality processing) processing related application of this embodiment.
　（５）ＡＩＴのアプリケーションプロファイルによる識別
　図２０Ｅにアプリケーション記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。アプリケーション記述子は、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループ内に配置され、アプリケーション毎の基本情報が記述される。同図に示したアプリケーション記述子のデータ構造における『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｐｒｏｆｉｌｅ』は、図６のアプリケーションプロファイル９０４に対応するパラメータであり、ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションの実行に必要な受信機プロファイルを示す。このパラメータにより、アプリケーションが補完（高画質化）処理機能の実装を要求しているか否かを確認することが可能である。即ち、アプリケーションが補完（高画質化）処理機能の実装を要求している場合、前記制御対象のアプリケーションは本実施例の補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであると識別されて良い。 (5) Identification by Application Profile of AIT FIG. 20E shows an example of the data structure of the application descriptor. The application descriptor is placed in the application information descriptor loop of the AIT, and basic information for each application is described. “Application_profile” in the data structure of the application descriptor shown in the figure is a parameter corresponding to the application profile 904 of FIG. 6, and indicates a receiver profile required to execute the application to be controlled by the AIT. By this parameter, it is possible to confirm whether the application requires the implementation of the complement (high image quality) processing function. That is, when the application requires the implementation of the complementary (image quality improvement) processing function, the application to be controlled may be identified as the complement (image quality improvement) processing related application of this embodiment.
　（６）ＡＩＴの予備パラメータによる識別
　図２０Ａに示したＡＩＴのデータ構造における『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ』若しくは『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｏｒ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』等のパラメータは、将来の利用のために予約された予備パラメータである。この予備パラメータにフラグを割り当てることにより、ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションが補完（高画質化）処理関連アプリケーションであるか否かを識別可能としても良い。ＡＩＴの共通記述子ループやアプリケーション情報記述子ループに配置される記述子の予備パラメータにフラグを割り当てても良い。 (6) Identification by AIT Preliminary Parameters The parameters such as “reserved” or “reserved_for_future_use” in the AIT data structure shown in FIG. 20A are preliminary parameters reserved for future use. By assigning a flag to this preliminary parameter, it may be possible to identify whether the application to be controlled by the AIT is a complementary (high image quality) processing related application. A flag may be assigned to a spare parameter of a descriptor placed in the common descriptor loop of the AIT or the application information descriptor loop.
　［補完データストリームの取得］
　前述のように、補完データストリームは、放送局３００Ｂのアプリケーションサーバ等の、インターネット上の所定のサーバ装置に記憶される。放送受信装置１００Ｕは、地上デジタル放送サービスの放送波から取得したロケーション情報に基づいて前記所定のサーバ装置にアクセスし、補完データストリームを取得する。一例として、補完データストリームの取得先を示すロケーション情報がデジタル放送波で伝送されるＡＩＴにより指定され、放送受信装置１００Ｕは、連携アプリ制御部１１０２ｃの制御に基づいて前記ロケーション情報で指定される所定のサーバ装置にアクセスし、補完データストリームを取得する。補完データストリームの取得先を示すロケーション情報は、デジタル放送波で伝送される制御情報等において、以下の形式で指定されて良い。以下の各形式を適宜組み合わせても良い。 [Get complementary data stream]
As described above, the complementary data stream is stored in a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet, such as an application server of the broadcast station 300B. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U accesses the predetermined server apparatus based on the location information acquired from the broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service, and acquires a complementary data stream. As an example, location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is designated by AIT transmitted by digital broadcast waves, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is designated by the location information based on control of the cooperative application control unit 1102c. Access the server device of and obtain a complementary data stream. Location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be designated in the following format in control information or the like transmitted by digital broadcast waves. The following forms may be combined as appropriate.
　（１）ＡＩＴにより直接指定する形式１
　補完データストリームの取得先をＡＩＴにより直接指定する場合、ＡＩＴの共通記述子ループ内またはアプリケーション情報記述子ループ内で、伝送プロトコル記述子を用いて指定すれば良い。 (1) Format 1 directly specified by AIT
When the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is directly specified by AIT, it may be specified using a transmission protocol descriptor in the common descriptor loop of the AIT or in the application information descriptor loop.
　図２１Ａに伝送プロトコル記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ＿ｉｄ』は、アプリケーションを伝送するプロトコルを示すものであり、インターネット上の所定のサーバ装置から補完データストリームを取得する場合には『０ｘ０００３（ＨＴＴＰ／ＨＴＴＰＳ伝送）』とする。図中の『ｓｅｌｅｃｔｏｒ＿ｂｙｔｅ』は、プロトコル識別毎に規定される補足情報を格納する。補完データストリームの取得先を記述するセレクタ領域は、ＨＴＴＰ／ＨＴＴＰＳ伝送の場合、図２１Ｂに示すデータ構造を備える。同図に示した『ＵＲＬ＿ｂａｓｅ＿ｂｙｔｅ』は、アプリケーションを取得するためのＵＲＬのベース部分が記述される。同図に示した『ＵＲＬ＿ｅｘｔｅｎｓｉｏｎ＿ｂｙｔｅ』は、アプリケーションを取得するためのＵＲＬの拡張部分が記述される。したがって、前記補完データストリームの取得先を示すロケーション情報は、前述の『ＵＲＬ＿ｂａｓｅ＿ｂｙｔｅ』と『ＵＲＬ＿ｅｘｔｅｎｓｉｏｎ＿ｂｙｔｅ』の組み合わせにより指定されて良い。 FIG. 21A shows an example of the data structure of the transmission protocol descriptor. “Protocol_id” in the figure indicates a protocol for transmitting an application, and is “0x0003 (HTTP / HTTPS transmission)” when acquiring a complementary data stream from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet. "Selector_byte" in the figure stores supplementary information defined for each protocol identification. The selector area that describes the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream has a data structure shown in FIG. 21B in the case of HTTP / HTTPS transmission. In “URL_base_byte” shown in the figure, the base part of the URL for acquiring the application is described. In “URL_extension_byte” shown in the figure, an extension part of a URL for acquiring an application is described. Therefore, the location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be specified by a combination of the above-mentioned "URL_base_byte" and "URL_extension_byte".
　本形式では、番組（イベント）毎に補完データストリームの取得先を指定することが可能である。 In this format, it is possible to specify the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream for each program (event).
　（２）ＡＩＴにより直接指定する形式２
　補完データストリームの取得先をＡＩＴにより直接指定する場合、ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループ内で、簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子を用いて指定しても良い。 (2) Format 2 directly specified by AIT
When the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is directly specified by AIT, it may be specified using a simplified application location descriptor in the application information descriptor loop of AIT.
　図２１Ｃに簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ＿ｐａｔｈ＿ｂｙｔｅｓ』は、対応するアプリケーションのエントリーポイントのＵＲＬが記述される。前記ＵＲＬは、伝送プロトコル記述子で指定されるアプリケーションの取得可能なロケーションをルートとした相対パスで記述する。即ち、前記補完データストリームの取得先を示すロケーション情報は、伝送プロトコル記述子と簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子の組み合わせにより指定されても良い。 FIG. 21C shows an example of the data structure of the simplified application location descriptor. "Initial_path_bytes" in the figure describes the URL of the entry point of the corresponding application. The URL is described as a relative path whose root is the obtainable location of the application specified by the transmission protocol descriptor. That is, the location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream may be specified by a combination of a transmission protocol descriptor and a simplified application location descriptor.
　本形式では、番組（イベント）毎に補完データストリームの取得先を指定することが可能である。 In this format, it is possible to specify the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream for each program (event).
　（３）ＡＩＴにより直接指定する形式３
　補完データストリームの取得先をＡＩＴにより直接指定する場合、ＡＩＴの共通記述子ループ内またはアプリケーション情報記述子ループ内で、ロケーション情報記述子を用いて指定しても良い。 (3) Format 3 directly specified by AIT
When the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is directly specified by AIT, it may be specified using a location information descriptor in the common descriptor loop of the AIT or in the application information descriptor loop.
　図２１Ｄにロケーション情報記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ』は、ロケーション情報の種類、指定の方法を示す。図２１Ｅにロケーションタイプの一覧を示す。このパラメータが『０ｘ０５』の場合、対応するアプリケーションを取得可能なＵＲＬを『ＵＲＬ＿ｂｙｔｅ』に記述することが可能である。即ち、前記補完データストリームの取得先を示すロケーション情報を、『ＵＲＬ＿ｂｙｔｅ』により指定することができる。 FIG. 21D shows an example of the data structure of the location information descriptor. "Location_type" in the figure indicates the type of location information and the method of specification. FIG. 21E shows a list of location types. When this parameter is "0x05", it is possible to describe a URL that can obtain the corresponding application in "URL_byte". That is, location information indicating the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream can be designated by "URL_byte".
　また、前記パラメータが『０ｘ０１』や『０ｘ０２』の場合、対応するアプリケーションを構成するＩＰパケットの送信元や宛先のＩＰアドレスを『ｉｐｖ４／６＿ｓｒｃ＿ａｄｄｒ』や『ｉｐｖ４／６＿ｄｓｔ＿ａｄｄｒ』で指定することが可能である。 When the parameter is "0x01" or "0x02", it is possible to specify the source or destination IP address of the IP packet that configures the corresponding application with "ipv4 / 6_src_addr" or "ipv4 / 6_dst_addr". is there.
　本形式では、番組（イベント）毎に補完データストリームの取得先を指定することが可能である。 In this format, it is possible to specify the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream for each program (event).
　（４）ＡＩＴにより間接指定する形式
　前述の（１）～（３）と同様の形式で指定されたＵＲＬからＨＴＭＬ５アプリケーションを取得し、前記取得したＨＴＭＬ５アプリケーションのリンク情報に基づくリンク先から前記補完データストリームを取得するようにしても良い。或いは、前述の（１）～（３）と同様の形式で指定されたＵＲＬからＨＴＭＬ５アプリケーションやその他のアプリケーションを取得し、前記ＨＴＭＬ５アプリケーションやその他のアプリケーションを実行することにより、所定のロケーションから前記補完データストリームを取得するようにしても良い。 (4) Format Indirectly Specified by AIT The HTML5 application is acquired from the URL specified in the same format as the above (1) to (3), and the complementary data is acquired from the link destination based on the acquired link information of the HTML5 application. You may make it acquire a stream. Alternatively, the HTML5 application or other application is acquired from the specified URL in the same format as the above (1) to (3), and the HTML5 application or other application is executed to execute the complement from the predetermined location A data stream may be acquired.
　（５）ＡＭＴにより指定する形式
　図２１Ｆにアドレスマップテーブルのデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ＿ｉｄ』は、ＰＳＩのＮＩＴ（Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）で規定される、放送局がどのネットワークに所属しているかを示すためのネットワーク識別である。『ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ＿ｉｄ』は、ＰＳＩのＮＩＴで規定される、放送サービスを識別するためのサービス識別である。『ｓｒｃ＿ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ＿３２／１２８』および『ｓｒｃ＿ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ＿ｍａｓｋ＿３２／１２８』は、サービスを構成するＩＰパケットの送信元ＩＰアドレスを規定するためのパラメータであり、『ｄｓｔ＿ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ＿３２／１２８』および『ｄｓｔ＿ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ＿ｍａｓｋ＿３２／１２８』は、サービスを構成するＩＰパケットの宛先ＩＰアドレスを規定するためのパラメータである。同図に示したＡＭＴに、前記ネットワーク識別およびサービス識別とサービスを構成するＩＰパケットの送信元／宛先ＩＰアドレスを記述することにより、各放送局（サービス）に関連する前記補完データストリームの取得先を指定することができる。 (5) Format Specified by AMT FIG. 21F shows an example of the data structure of the address map table. “Network_id” in the figure is a network identification for specifying to which network a broadcasting station belongs, which is defined by NSI (Network Information Table) of PSI. "Service_id" is a service identification for identifying a broadcast service, which is defined by PSI's NIT. “Src_address_32 / 128” and “src_address_mask_32 / 128” are parameters for specifying the transmission source IP address of the IP packet that configures the service, and “dst_address_32 / 128” and “dst_address_mask_32 / 128” configure the service. It is a parameter for defining the destination IP address of the IP packet. In the AMT shown in the figure, the network identification and the service identification and the transmission source / destination IP address of the IP packet constituting the service are described, thereby obtaining an acquisition destination of the complementary data stream related to each broadcasting station (service). Can be specified.
　なお、図２１Ｆに示したＡＭＴは、各放送局（サービス）に関連する前記補完データストリームの取得先を、ループ記述により、複数同時に指定する場合のデータ構造の例である。放送局（サービス）毎に前記ＡＭＴを用意する場合には、図２１Ｇに示すようなデータ構造としても良い。即ち、自局（サービス）用のＡＭＴを各放送局（サービス）がそれぞれ用意する場合、テーブル内において、サービス識別の個数や、ネットワーク識別およびサービス識別は記述する必要がなく、自局（サービス）に関連する前記補完データストリームの取得先のみを示せば良い。 Note that AMT illustrated in FIG. 21F is an example of a data structure in the case where a plurality of acquisition destinations of the complementary data stream related to each broadcasting station (service) are simultaneously designated by a loop description. When preparing the AMT for each broadcasting station (service), a data structure as shown in FIG. 21G may be used. That is, when each broadcast station (service) prepares an AMT for its own station (service), there is no need to describe the number of service identifications, network identification and service identification in the table, and its own station (service) It is sufficient to indicate only the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream related to.
　本形式では、放送局（サービス）毎に補完データストリームの取得先を指定することが可能である。 In this format, it is possible to specify the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream for each broadcasting station (service).
　［補完データストリームの取得先の記憶］
　補完データストリームの取得先が前述のＡＭＴにより指定される形式である場合、初期スキャン時（または再スキャン時）に、全受信可能チャンネルをサーチしてＡＭＴを取得し、ネットワーク識別やサービス識別に基づく取得先アドレスリストを作成するようにしても良い。前記取得先アドレスリストは、ネットワーク識別および／またはサービス識別とサービスを構成するＩＰパケットの送信元／宛先ＩＰアドレスとが、関連付けて記憶される。前記アドレスリストは不揮発メモリに記憶させる。 [Storage of acquisition source of complementary data stream]
When the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream is in the format specified by the above-mentioned AMT, at initial scan (or re-scan), all receivable channels are searched to acquire AMT, and based on network identification and service identification An acquisition source address list may be created. The acquisition destination address list stores a network identification and / or a service identification in association with a source / destination IP address of an IP packet constituting the service. The address list is stored in a non-volatile memory.
　初期スキャン時（または再スキャン時）であって、放送受信装置１００Ｕがネットワークに接続されていない場合、放送受信装置１００Ｕは放送波にＡＭＴがある場合でも前記ＡＭＴを参照せず、したがって前記取得先アドレスリストを作成しないように動作しても良い。或いは、初期スキャン時（または再スキャン時）、放送受信装置１００Ｕがネットワークに接続されていない場合であっても、放送受信装置１００Ｕは放送波のＡＭＴを参照して前記取得先アドレスリストを作成し、不揮発メモリに記憶するように動作しても良い。或いは、初期スキャン時（または再スキャン時）であって、放送受信装置１００Ｕがネットワークに接続されている場合、放送受信装置１００Ｕは放送波のＡＭＴを参照して、前記ＡＭＴで指定された各放送局（サービス）に関連する前記補完データストリームの取得先がアクセス可能である場合にのみ、前記取得先アドレスリストを作成し、不揮発メモリに記憶するように動作しても良い。 When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is not connected to the network at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U does not refer to the AMT even when there is an AMT in the broadcast wave, and thus the acquisition destination It may operate so as not to create an address list. Alternatively, at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is not connected to the network, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U creates the acquisition destination address list with reference to the AMT of the broadcast wave. , And may be stored in a non-volatile memory. Alternatively, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is connected to the network at the time of initial scanning (or at the time of rescanning), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U refers to the AMT of the broadcast wave and refers to each broadcast designated by the AMT. The acquisition destination address list may be created and stored in the non-volatile memory only when the acquisition destination of the complementary data stream associated with the station (service) is accessible.
　図２２は、放送受信装置１００Ｕの初期スキャン（再スキャン）時の動作シーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an operation sequence at the time of initial scanning (re-scanning) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
　初期スキャンが開始されると、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１に対して周波数初期値を設定し、前記周波数値へのチューニングを行うように指示する（Ｓ８０１）。チューナ／復調部１３１において、前記設定された周波数値へのロックに成功した場合（Ｓ８０２：Ｙｅｓ）、受信機能実行部１１０２は、受信信号からＮＩＴを取得する（Ｓ８０３）。 When the initial scan is started, the reception function execution unit 1102 sets an initial frequency value to the tuner / demodulation unit 131, and instructs tuning to the frequency value (S801). When the tuner / demodulator 131 succeeds in locking to the set frequency value (S802: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires NIT from the reception signal (S803).
　Ｓ８０３の処理で取得したＮＩＴが有効なデータである場合（Ｓ８０４：Ｙｅｓ）、受信機能実行部１１０２は、前記取得したＮＩＴからトランスポートストリーム識別、ネットワーク識別、等の情報を取得する（Ｓ８０５）。更に、ＮＩＴの分配システム記述子から、各トランスポートストリーム識別／ネットワーク識別に対応する放送伝送路の物理的条件に関する分配システム情報を取得し（Ｓ８０６）、サービスリスト記述子からサービス識別の一覧を取得する（Ｓ８０７）。なお、ＮＩＴが、トランスポートストリーム識別、ネットワーク識別、分配システム情報、サービス識別の一覧、等の異なるデータを複数有している場合は、Ｓ８０５～Ｓ８０７の処理を繰り返す。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ８０５～Ｓ８０７の処理で取得したトランスポートストリーム識別、ネットワーク識別、分配システム情報、サービス識別の一覧、等のデータに基づいてサービスリストを作成し、前記作成したサービスリストをＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶（再スキャン時は更新）する（Ｓ８０８）。 If the NIT acquired in the process of S803 is valid data (S804: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires information such as transport stream identification, network identification, etc. from the acquired NIT (S805). Furthermore, distribution system information on the physical conditions of the broadcast channel corresponding to each transport stream identification / network identification is acquired from the distribution system descriptor of the NIT (S806), and a list of service identifications is acquired from the service list descriptor. (S807). If the NIT has a plurality of different data such as transport stream identification, network identification, distribution system information, and a list of service identifications, the processing of S805 to S807 is repeated. Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 creates a service list based on data such as transport stream identification, network identification, distribution system information, list of service identification, etc. acquired in the processing of S805 to S807, The service list is stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated at the time of rescanning) (S808).
　次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、受信信号からＡＭＴを取得し（Ｓ８０９）、更に、前記サービスリストに記憶された各ネットワーク識別やサービス識別に関する補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧を取得する（Ｓ８１０）。なお、ＡＭＴが複数のネットワーク識別やサービス識別に関する補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧を有している場合は、Ｓ８１０の処理を繰り返す。異なるネットワーク識別やサービス識別に関する補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧を有するＡＭＴが複数ある場合には、Ｓ８０９～Ｓ８１０の処理を繰り返す。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ８１０の処理で取得した補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧を、取得先アドレスリストとして、前記ネットワーク識別やサービス識別と関連付けて、ＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶（再スキャン時は更新）する（Ｓ８１１）。 Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires an AMT from the reception signal (S809), and further acquires a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams regarding each network identification and service identification stored in the service list ( S810). If the AMT has a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams related to a plurality of network identifications and service identifications, the processing of S810 is repeated. If there are a plurality of AMTs having a list of information on acquisition destinations of complementary data streams regarding different network identification and service identification, the processing of S809 to S810 is repeated. Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 associates the list of information on the supplemental data stream acquisition destination acquired in the process of S810 with the network identification and the service identification as an acquisition destination address list, in the ROM 103, the storage unit 110, etc. It is stored (updated at the time of rescanning) (S811).
　なお、Ｓ８０２の処理で、チューナ／復調部１３１が前記設定された周波数値へのロックに成功しなかった場合（Ｓ８０２：Ｎｏ）、および、Ｓ８０３の処理で取得したＮＩＴが有効なデータでない場合（Ｓ８０４：Ｎｏ）、Ｓ８０５～Ｓ８１１の処理は行わない。 In the process of S802, when the tuner / demodulator 131 does not succeed in locking to the set frequency value (S802: No), and when the NIT acquired in the process of S803 is not valid data (S802). The processing of S804: No) and S805 to S811 is not performed.
　Ｓ８１１の処理を終えると、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１に設定されている周波数値がチャンネルスキャン範囲の最終周波数値であれば（Ｓ８１２：Ｙｅｓ）、処理を終了する。一方、前記設定されている周波数値がチャンネルスキャン範囲の最終周波数値でなければ（Ｓ８１２：Ｎｏ）、チューナ／復調部１３１に設定された周波数値をアップさせて（Ｓ８１３）、Ｓ８０２～Ｓ８１１の処理を繰り返す。前記繰り返し処理では、Ｓ８０８の処理およびＳ８１１の処理は追記となる。なお、１つのＮＩＴで、当該放送ネットワークを構成する全てのサービスに関するネットワーク識別やサービス識別を取得でき、更に、前記ネットワーク識別やサービス識別に関する補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧を有するＡＭＴを取得できる場合には、Ｓ８１２～Ｓ８１３の処理が不要である。なお、前記サービスリストと取得先アドレスリストは、統合された１つのリストであっても良い。 When the process of S811 is completed, if the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulator 131 is the final frequency value of the channel scan range (S812: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 ends the process. On the other hand, if the set frequency value is not the final frequency value of the channel scan range (S812: No), the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulation section 131 is increased (S813), and the processing of S802 to S811 is performed. repeat. In the repetitive process, the process of S808 and the process of S811 are additional writing. It should be noted that one NIT can acquire network identification and service identification related to all services constituting the broadcast network, and can further acquire AMT having a list of information on acquisition destination of complementary data stream related to the network identification and service identification. In the case, the processing of S812 to S813 is unnecessary. The service list and the acquisition destination address list may be one integrated list.
　前述の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００Ｕは、初期設定の際のチャンネルスキャン時に、或いは、設定変更のための再スキャン時に、放送ネットワークを構成するサービスの一覧（サービスリスト）の作成／更新と同時に、前記各サービスに対応する補完データストリーム取得先の情報の一覧（取得先アドレスリスト）の作成／更新を行い、更に、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０等の不揮発性メモリに記憶させることが可能となる。 According to the above-described series of processes, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U of the present embodiment displays a list of services (service list) that constitute the broadcast network at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change. At the same time as creating / updating, create / update a list of information (acquisition destination address list) of complementary data stream acquisition destinations corresponding to each service, and further store them in nonvolatile memory such as the ROM 103 or storage unit 110 etc. Is possible.
　なお、前記設定変更のための再スキャンは、ＮＩＴやＡＭＴの『ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータを参照することにより、テーブル内の情報に変化があったことを検出した場合に、自動的に行うようにしても良い。ＮＩＴとＡＭＴの一方の『ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータの変化を検出した場合に、前記パラメータの変化が検出されたテーブルに関する情報のみを自動的に更新するようにしても良い。但し、前述の自動更新を行った場合、再スキャンを自動的に行った旨をユーザに通知することが望ましい。また、前記テーブル内の情報に変化があったことをユーザに報知し、ユーザに前記再スキャンを行うか否かを選択させるようにしても良い。 Note that the rescanning for changing the setting is automatically performed when it is detected that the information in the table has been changed by referring to the “version_number” parameter of the NIT or AMT. good. When a change in one of the "version_number" parameters of the NIT and the AMT is detected, only the information on the table in which the change of the parameter is detected may be automatically updated. However, when the above-described automatic update is performed, it is desirable to notify the user that rescanning has been performed automatically. In addition, the user may be notified that there is a change in the information in the table, and the user may select whether to perform the rescanning.
　［２Ｋ信号と補完信号の同期処理］
　前述のように、デジタル放送波を受信して再生した２Ｋ信号とインターネット等を介して取得した補完データストリームから再生した補完信号は、それぞれ秒間６０フレーム程度の連続する画像で構成される。前記再生した２Ｋ信号と補完信号は、放送受信装置１００Ｕにおいて、所定の同期情報に基づいて同期処理がなされ、対応するそれぞれのフレームの各画素間で補完（高画質化）処理が行われる。前記同期処理は、以下の方式により行われて良い。 [Synchronous processing of 2K signal and complementary signal]
As described above, the 2K signal reproduced by receiving the digital broadcast wave and the complementary signal reproduced from the complementary data stream acquired through the Internet or the like are respectively composed of continuous images of about 60 frames per second. The reproduced 2K signal and the complementary signal are subjected to synchronization processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U based on predetermined synchronization information, and complementation (image quality improvement) processing is performed between respective pixels of corresponding frames. The synchronization process may be performed by the following method.
　（１）リファレンスクロックの差分による同期処理１
　図２３Ａは、放送受信装置１００Ｕの仮想デコーダ（Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｔａｒｇｅｔ　Ｄｅｃｏｄｅｒ：ＳＴＤ）の一例を示すブロック図である。 (1) Synchronous processing by difference of reference clock 1
FIG. 23A is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (System Target Decoder: STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U.
　図中の多重化／分離部１３０１は、図１９Ａの分離部１３２に相当する。ＴＳバッファ１３１１と多重用バッファ１３１２とビデオＥＳバッファ１３１３とビデオデコーダ１３１４とリオーダバッファ１３１５と多重化／分離部１３１６は、映像復号部１３３に相当する。ＴＳバッファ１３２１とオーディオバッファ１３２３とオーディオデコーダ１３２４は、音声復号部１３４に相当する。ＴＳバッファ１３３１とシステムバッファ１３３３とシステムデコーダ１３３４とシステム制御部１３３５は、図１９Ａでは図示を省略しているが、主制御部１０１（或いは、受信機能実行部１１０２）に制御されて、各種システム情報（ヘッダ情報等）の処理を行う。 The multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1301 in the figure corresponds to the demultiplexing unit 132 in FIG. 19A. The TS buffer 1311, the multiplexing buffer 1312, the video ES buffer 1313, the video decoder 1314, the reorder buffer 1315, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 correspond to the video decoding unit 133. The TS buffer 1321, the audio buffer 1323, and the audio decoder 1324 correspond to the audio decoding unit 134. The TS buffer 1331, the system buffer 1333, the system decoder 1334, and the system control unit 1335 are not shown in FIG. 19A, but are controlled by the main control unit 101 (or reception function execution unit 1102), and various system information Process (header information etc.)
　多重化／分離部１３０１には、チューナ／復調部１３１から出力されたＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ（Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ）が入力される。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳは、ＴＳヘッダとペイロードで構成される。ＴＳヘッダはアダプテーションフィールドを含む場合があり、アダプテーションフィールドにはＰＣＲ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｃｌｏｃｋ　Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ）が記述される場合がある。ＳＴＣ（Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｃｌｏｃｋ）部１３３６は、放送側で設定した基準に基づく相対時刻であるＰＣＲの値を参照して動作するシステム時計である。ＳＴＣ部１３３６は、３３ビットの上位カウンタと９ビットで０～２９９をカウントする拡張カウンタとで構成される。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに対応するＳＴＤの各構成は、前記システム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作する。即ち、前記システム時計のＳＴＣ値は約２６．５時間の周期を有する。 The MPEG2-TS (Transport Stream) output from the tuner / demodulator 131 is input to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1301. The MPEG2-TS is composed of a TS header and a payload. The TS header may include an adaptation field, and a PCR (Program Clock Reference) may be described in the adaptation field. An STC (System Time Clock) unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of PCR that is a relative time based on a reference set on the broadcast side. The STC unit 1336 includes a 33-bit high-order counter and an extension counter that counts 0 to 299 by 9 bits. Each configuration of STD corresponding to MPEG2-TS operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. That is, the STC value of the system clock has a cycle of about 26.5 hours.
　ペイロードはＰＥＳやセクションで構成される。ペイロードがＰＥＳの場合は、映像ＥＳや音声ＥＳを含み、更に、提示時刻情報（Ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｓｔａｍｐ：ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（Ｄｅｃｏｄｉｎｇ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｓｔａｍｐ：ＤＴＳ）が記述される場合がある。前記提示時刻情報や復号時刻情報は、前記ＰＣＲの値に基づいて設定される相対時刻の情報である。即ち、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式で伝送される映像データや音声データは、相対時刻に対応付けられた状態で伝送される。ビデオデコーダ１３１４やオーディオデコーダ１３２４は、システム制御部１３３５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｔ）やＤＴＳ（Ｔ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの復号タイミングおよび出力タイミングを制御する。 The payload is composed of PES and sections. When the payload is PES, it may include video ES and audio ES, and may further describe presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS). The presentation time information and the decoding time information are information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR. That is, video data and audio data transmitted by the MPEG2-TS system are transmitted in a state associated with relative time. The video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 compare the values of PTS (T) and DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
　また、多重化／分離部１３４１は、図１９Ａの分離部１５２に相当する。ビデオＥＳバッファ１３５３とビデオデコーダ１３５４とリオーダバッファ１３５５と多重化／分離部１３５６は、映像復号部１５３に相当する。オーディオバッファ１３６３とオーディオデコーダ１３６４は、音声復号部１５４に相当する。システム制御部１３７５は、図１９Ａでは図示を省略しているが、主制御部１０１（或いは、受信機能実行部１１０２）に制御されて、各種システム情報（ヘッダ情報等）の処理を行う。 The multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1341 corresponds to the demultiplexing unit 152 in FIG. 19A. The video ES buffer 1353, the video decoder 1354, the reorder buffer 1355, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1356 correspond to the video decoding unit 153. The audio buffer 1363 and the audio decoder 1364 correspond to the audio decoding unit 154. Although not illustrated in FIG. 19A, the system control unit 1375 is controlled by the main control unit 101 (or the reception function execution unit 1102) to process various system information (header information and the like).
　多重化／分離部１３４１には、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１から出力されたＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳ（Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ）が入力される。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳは、ＰＳパックヘッダとシステムヘッダとＰＥＳパケットで構成される。ＰＳパックヘッダには相対時刻であるＳＣＲ（Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　Ｃｌｏｃｋ　Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ）が記述される場合がある。ＳＴＣ部１３７６は、ＳＣＲの値を参照して動作するシステム時計である。ＳＴＣ部１３７６は、３３ビットの上位カウンタと９ビットで０～２９９をカウントする拡張カウンタとで構成される。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳに対応するＳＴＤの各構成は、前記システム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作する。即ち、前記システム時計の相対時刻であるＳＴＣ値は約２６．５時間の周期を有する。 The MPEG2-PS (Program Stream) output from the streaming reception processing unit 151 is input to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1341. The MPEG2-PS is composed of a PS pack header, a system header and a PES packet. In the PS pack header, SCR (System Clock Reference) which is relative time may be described. The STC unit 1376 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of the SCR. The STC unit 1376 includes a 33-bit high-order counter and an extension counter that counts 0 to 299 by 9 bits. Each configuration of STD corresponding to MPEG2-PS operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. That is, the STC value, which is the relative time of the system clock, has a cycle of about 26.5 hours.
　ＰＥＳパケットは、ＰＥＳヘッダと映像ＥＳや音声ＥＳで構成され、更に、提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ）が記述される場合がある。前記提示時刻情報や復号時刻情報は、前記ＳＣＲの値に基づいて設定される相対時刻の情報である。即ち、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳ方式で伝送される映像データや音声データは、相対時刻に対応付けられた状態で伝送される。ビデオデコーダ１３５４やオーディオデコーダ１３６４は、システム制御部１３７５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｐ）やＤＴＳ（Ｐ）とＳＴＣ（Ｐ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの復号タイミングおよび出力タイミングを制御する。 The PES packet is composed of a PES header, a video ES and an audio ES, and may be described with presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS). The presentation time information and the decoding time information are information of relative time set based on the value of the SCR. That is, video data and audio data transmitted by the MPEG2-PS system are transmitted in a state associated with relative time. The video decoder 1354 and the audio decoder 1364 compare the values of PTS (P) and DTS (P) with STC (P) under the control of the system control unit 1375 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
　また、差分検出部１３８１は、主制御部１０１（或いは、受信機能実行部１１０２）の制御に基づいて、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））とＳＴＣ部１３７６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｐ））の差分を検出する。補完（高画質化）部１３８２は映像補完／重畳部１７１Ｕに相当する。補完（高画質化）部１３８２は、差分検出部１３８１で検出したＳＴＣ（Ｔ）とＳＴＣ（Ｐ）の差分に基づいて、多重化／分離部１３１６の出力（即ち、２Ｋ信号）と多重化／分離部１３５６の出力（即ち、補完信号）の同期処理（フレーム単位のタイミング合わせ）を行う。選択／多重化部１３８３は音声選択部１７２に相当するものであり、補完（高画質化）部１３８２と同様の同期処理を行う。差分検出部１３８１と補完（高画質化）部１３８２と選択／多重化部１３８３は、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のシステム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作して良い。 Also, the difference detection unit 1381 controls the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (PC) of the STC unit 1376 based on the control of the main control unit 101 (or the reception function execution unit 1102). )) To detect differences. The complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 corresponds to the video complement / superimposition unit 171U. A complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 outputs the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 (that is, 2K signal) based on the difference between STC (T) and STC (P) detected by the difference detection unit 1381. The synchronization processing (frame-by-frame timing adjustment) of the output (that is, the complementary signal) of the separation unit 1356 is performed. The selection / multiplexing unit 1383 corresponds to the voice selection unit 172, and performs synchronization processing similar to that of the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382. The difference detection unit 1381, the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382 and the selection / multiplexing unit 1383 may operate with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock of the STC unit 1336.
　放送波を介してＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳの形式で伝送される２Ｋ信号とインターネットを介してＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳの形式で伝送される補完信号は、元々同一の４Ｋ放送番組から生成されたデータストリームである。このため、放送局３００Ｂからのデータ送出時点においては、基本的にＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのフレームタイミングとＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳのフレームタイミングは一致しており、同一のリファレンス値が、ＰＣＲおよびＳＣＲとして、各データストリームに与えられる。一方、放送受信装置１００Ｕのデータ取得時点においては、インターネット上のデータ伝送遅延等により、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳの取得タイミングは不定となり、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのフレームタイミングとＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳのフレームタイミングが一致するとは限らない。したがって、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））とＳＴＣ部１３７６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｐ））も一致するとは限らない。しかしながら、差分検出部１３８１で検出した前記ＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））とＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｐ））の差分に基づいたタイミング補償処理を行うことにより、２Ｋ信号と補完信号の、対応するフレームの出力タイミングを同期させることが可能となる。 The 2K signal transmitted in the form of MPEG2-TS via broadcast waves and the complementary signal transmitted in the form of MPEG2-PS via the Internet are data streams originally generated from the same 4K broadcast program. Therefore, at the time of data transmission from the broadcasting station 300B, basically, the frame timing of the MPEG2-TS and the frame timing of the MPEG2-PS coincide with each other, and the same reference value indicates each data stream as PCR and SCR. Given to On the other hand, at the data acquisition time of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U, the acquisition timing of the MPEG2-PS becomes undefined due to the data transmission delay on the Internet etc., and the frame timing of the MPEG2-TS and the frame timing of the MPEG2-PS are limited. Absent. Therefore, the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (P)) of the STC unit 1376 do not always match. However, by performing timing compensation processing based on the difference between the STC value (STC (T)) and the STC value (STC (P)) detected by the difference detection unit 1381, the corresponding frame of the 2K signal and the complement signal It is possible to synchronize the output timing of
　なお、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１から出力されるデータストリームがＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ形式の場合、前述のＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳに対応するＳＴＤの構成は、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに対応するＳＴＤの構成に置き換えられて良い。この場合の放送受信装置１００Ｕの仮想デコーダ（ＳＴＤ）の一例のブロック図を、図２３Ｂに示す。 When the data stream output from the streaming reception processing unit 151 is in the MPEG2-TS format, the configuration of the STD corresponding to the above-mentioned MPEG2-PS may be replaced with the configuration of the STD corresponding to the MPEG2-TS. A block diagram of an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in this case is shown in FIG. 23B.
　同図の構成では、差分検出部１３８１は、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ１）とＳＴＣ部１４３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ２）の差分を検出する。補完（高画質化）部１３８２は、差分検出部１３８１で検出したＳＴＣ１とＳＴＣ２の差分に基づいて、多重化／分離部１３１６の出力（即ち、２Ｋ信号）と多重化／分離部１４１６の出力（即ち、補完信号）の同期処理を行う。 In the configuration of the figure, difference detection section 1381 detects the difference between the STC value (STC1) of STC section 1336 and the STC value (STC2) of STC section 1436. The complement (image quality improvement) unit 1382 outputs the output (that is, 2K signal) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 and the output (multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1416) based on the difference between STC1 and STC2 detected by the difference detection unit 1381. That is, synchronous processing of the complementary signal is performed.
　（２）共通のＰＴＳとＤＴＳによる同期処理１
　図２３Ｃは、放送受信装置１００Ｕの仮想デコーダ（ＳＴＤ）の一例を示すブロック図である。基本的に図２３Ａに示したＳＴＤの例と同様の構成を有する。 (2) Synchronous processing by common PTS and DTS 1
FIG. 23C is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. Basically, the configuration is the same as that of the STD example shown in FIG. 23A.
　ＳＴＣ部１３３６は、チューナ／復調部１３１から出力されるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳが有する相対時刻であるＰＣＲの値を参照して動作するシステム時計である。また、同図の全構成は、前記システム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作する。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのペイロードがＰＥＳの場合に記述される提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ）は、前記ＰＣＲの値に基づいて設定される相対時刻の情報である。また、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳのＰＥＳパケットに記述される提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ）も、前記ＰＣＲの値に基づいて設定される相対時刻の情報である。 The STC unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the value of PCR that is the relative time of the MPEG2-TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131. Also, the whole configuration of FIG. 6 operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described when the payload of the MPEG2-TS is PES is information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR. Further, presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described in the PES packet of MPEG2-PS are also information of relative time set based on the value of the PCR.
　ビデオデコーダ１３１４やオーディオデコーダ１３２４は、システム制御部１３３５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｔ）やＤＴＳ（Ｔ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの出力タイミングを制御する。また、ビデオデコーダ１３５４やオーディオデコーダ１３６４は、システム制御部１３７５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｐ）やＤＴＳ（Ｐ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの出力タイミングを制御する。システム制御部１３３５とシステム制御部１３７５は、統合されても良い。 The video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 control the output timing of the video data and the audio data by comparing the value of PTS (T) or DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335. Do. Also, the video decoder 1354 and the audio decoder 1364 compare the values of PTS (P) and DTS (P) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1375 to output video data and audio data. Control. The system control unit 1335 and the system control unit 1375 may be integrated.
　前述のような構成／設定とすることにより、補完（高画質化）部１３９２では、補完（高画質化）部１３８２のようなＳＴＣ値の差分に基づく同期処理を行う必要はなく、多重化／分離部１３１６の出力（即ち、２Ｋ信号）と多重化／分離部１３５６の出力（即ち、補完信号）を同期させることが可能となる。選択／多重化部１３９３も同様である。 With the configuration / setting as described above, the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1392 does not need to perform synchronization processing based on the difference in STC value such as the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1382, and It is possible to synchronize the output of the separating unit 1316 (ie, 2K signal) and the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1356 (ie, the complementary signal). The same applies to the selection / multiplexing unit 1393.
　（３）リファレンスクロックの差分による同期処理２
　図２３Ｄは、放送受信装置１００Ｕの仮想デコーダ（ＳＴＤ）の一例を示すブロック図である。チューナ／復調部１３１から出力されたＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに対応するＳＴＤ部の構成は、図２３Ａに示したＳＴＤの例と同様である。 (3) Synchronous processing by difference of reference clock 2
FIG. 23D is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. The configuration of the STD unit corresponding to the MPEG2-TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131 is the same as that of the STD shown in FIG. 23A.
　図２３Ｄの例では、補完データストリームは、放送局３００Ｂのアプリケーションサーバから、インターネットを介して、例えば、トランスポート方式にＭＭＴ方式を用いたＩＰ（Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）パケットのストリームとして伝送される。 In the example of FIG. 23D, the complementary data stream is transmitted from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet as a stream of IP (Internet Protocol) packets using, for example, the MMT method as the transport method.
　ＩＰパケットバッファ１４４１は、図１９Ａのストリーミング受信部１５１の構成に含まれる。多重化／分離部１４４２は分離部１５２に相当する。ＭＭＴＰバッファ１４５１と復号前バッファ１４５３とビデオデコーダ１４５４とリオーダバッファ１４５５と多重化／分離部１４５６は、映像復号部１５３に相当する。ＭＭＴＰバッファ１４６１と復号前バッファ１４６３とオーディオデコーダ１４６４は、音声復号部１５４に相当する。ＭＭＴＰバッファ１４７１と復号前バッファ１４７３とシステムデコーダ１４７４とシステム制御部１４７５は、図１９Ａでは図示を省略しているが、主制御部１０１（或いは、受信機能実行部１１０２）に制御されて、各種システム情報（ヘッダ情報等）の処理を行う。 The IP packet buffer 1441 is included in the configuration of the streaming reception unit 151 of FIG. 19A. The multiplexing / separation unit 1442 corresponds to the separation unit 152. The MMTP buffer 1451, the pre-decoding buffer 1453, the video decoder 1454, the reorder buffer 1455, and the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 correspond to the video decoding unit 153. The MMTP buffer 1461, the pre-decoding buffer 1463 and the audio decoder 1464 correspond to the speech decoding unit 154. The MMTP buffer 1471, the pre-decoding buffer 1473, the system decoder 1474, and the system control unit 1475 are not shown in FIG. 19A, but are controlled by the main control unit 101 (or reception function execution unit 1102). Process information (header information etc.).
　多重化／分離部１４４２には、ストリーミング受信処理部１５１（ＩＰパケットバッファ１４４１）から出力されたＩＰパケットが入力される。多重化／分離部１４４２で分離されたＮＴＰ（Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）形式のＩＰパケットはＳＴＣ部１４７６に入力される。また、ＩＰパケットのペイロードにはＭＭＴＰ（ＭＭＴ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）パケットが格納される。ＭＭＴＰパケットのＭＭＴＰペイロードは、映像信号および音声信号のＭＦＵ（Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｆｒａｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｕｎｉｔ）／ＭＰＵ（Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）やデータコンテンツ等のＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵやＭＭＴ－ＳＩ（Ｓｉｇｎａｌｉｎｇ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ）等の制御情報を含む。 The IP packet output from the streaming reception processing unit 151 (IP packet buffer 1441) is input to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1442. The IP packet in NTP (Network Time Protocol) format separated by the multiplexing / separation unit 1442 is input to the STC unit 1476. Further, an MMTP (MMT Protocol) packet is stored in the payload of the IP packet. The MMTP payload of the MMTP packet includes control information such as MFU (Media Fragment Unit) / MPU (Media Processing Unit) of video and audio signals, MFU / MPU such as data content, and MMT-SI (Signaling Information).
　ＳＴＣ部１４７６は、ＮＴＰに記述された絶対時刻である協定世界時（Ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｄ　Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓａｌ　Ｔｉｍｅ：ＵＴＣ）を参照して動作するシステム時計である。ＳＴＣ部１４７６は、秒単位をカウントする３２ビットの上位カウンタと秒以下をカウントする２４ビット程度の下位カウントとで構成される。ＭＭＴに対応するＳＴＤの各構成は、前記システム時計に同期した約１６．８Ｍ（２の２４乗）Ｈｚの基本クロックで動作する（前記下位カウンタのビット数がｎの場合、基本クロックは（２のｎ乗）Ｈｚであって良い。）。 The STC unit 1476 is a system clock that operates with reference to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is an absolute time described in the NTP. The STC unit 1476 is composed of a 32-bit high-order counter that counts seconds and a 24-bit low-order count that counts seconds or less. Each configuration of STD corresponding to MMT operates with a basic clock of about 16.8 M (2 to the power of 24) Hz synchronized with the system clock (when the number of bits of the lower counter is n, the basic clock is (2 N) may be Hz).
　ＭＭＴＰペイロードのＭＭＴ－ＳＩ等には、映像ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵや音声ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵの提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ）が記述される場合がある。前記提示時刻情報や復号時刻情報は、図２３Ｅに示すＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子の『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータや、図２３Ｆに示すＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子の『ｍｐｕ＿ｄｅｃｏｄｉｎｇ＿ｔｉｍｅ＿ｏｆｆｓｅｔ』パラメータや『ｄｔｓ＿ｐｔｓ＿ｏｆｆｅｓｔ』パラメータや『ｐｔｓ＿ｏｆｆｓｅｔ』パラメータ等から算出される絶対時刻情報である。特に『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータは、６４ビットのＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式で設定される情報である。即ち、ＭＭＴ方式で伝送される映像データや音声データは、絶対時刻に対応付けられた状態で伝送される。ビデオデコーダ１４５４やオーディオデコーダ１４６４は、システム制御部１４７５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｍ）やＤＴＳ（Ｍ）とＳＴＣ（Ｍ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの復号タイミングおよび出力タイミングを制御する。 Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) of video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU may be described in MMT-SI or the like of the MMTP payload. The presentation time information and the decoding time information are the "mpu_presentation_time" parameter of the MPU time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 23E, the "mpu_decoding_time_offset" parameter and the "dts_pts_offest" parameter of the MPU extended time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 23F, and "pts_offset". It is absolute time information calculated from parameters and the like. In particular, the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter is information set in the 64-bit NTP timestamp format. That is, video data and audio data transmitted by the MMT method are transmitted in a state associated with absolute time. The video decoder 1454 and the audio decoder 1464 compare the values of PTS (M) and DTS (M) with STC (M) under the control of the system control unit 1475 to decode and output video data and audio data. Control the timing.
　また、ずれ検出部１４８１は、主制御部１０１（或いは、受信機能実行部１１０２）の制御に基づいて、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））とＳＴＣ部１４７６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｍ））とを参照して、２Ｋ信号と補完信号のずれ量を検出する。補完（高画質化）部１４８２は映像補完／重畳部１７１Ｕに相当する。補完（高画質化）部１４８２は、ずれ検出部１４８１で検出したずれ量に基づいて、多重化／分離部１３１６の出力（即ち、２Ｋ信号）と多重化／分離部１４５６の出力（即ち、補完信号）の同期処理を行う。選択／多重化部１４８３は音声選択部１７２に相当するものであり、補完（高画質化）部１４８２と同様の同期処理を行う。ずれ検出部１４８１と補完（高画質化）部１４８２と選択／多重化部１４８３は、ＳＴＣ部１３３６のシステム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作して良い。 In addition, based on the control of main control unit 101 (or reception function execution unit 1102), deviation detection unit 1481 determines the STC value (STC (T)) of STC unit 1336 and the STC value (STC (MTCC) of STC unit 1476. And) to detect the deviation between the 2K signal and the complementary signal. The complement (image quality improvement) unit 1482 corresponds to the video complement / superimposition unit 171U. The complement (image quality improvement) unit 1482 outputs the output (that is, 2K signal) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1316 and the output (that is, complementation) of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 based on the shift amount detected by the shift detection unit 1481. Synchronization processing). The selection / multiplexing unit 1483 corresponds to the voice selection unit 172, and performs the same synchronization processing as the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1482. The shift detection unit 1481, the complement (high image quality formation) unit 1482 and the selection / multiplexing unit 1483 may operate with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock of the STC unit 1336.
　なお、前述のようにＳＴＣ部１３３６は、３３ビット＋９ビットのカウンタで構成され、約２６．５時間の周期を有する。ＳＴＣ部１３３６のカウンタ値は、放送側で設定した基準に基づく相対時刻を示すものである。一方、ＳＴＣ部１４７６は、３２＋２４ビットのカウンタで構成され、約１１９３０４６．５時間（約１３６年）の周期を有する。ＳＴＣ部１４７６のカウンタ値は、絶対時刻を示すものである。このため、ずれ検出部１４８１において、ＳＴＣ部１３３６から出力されるＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））とＳＴＣ部１４７６から出力されるＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｍ））とを単純比較したのみでは、２Ｋ信号と補完信号のずれ量を検出することはできない。 As described above, the STC unit 1336 is composed of a 33-bit + 9-bit counter and has a cycle of about 26.5 hours. The counter value of the STC unit 1336 indicates relative time based on the standard set on the broadcast side. On the other hand, the STC unit 1476 is configured of a 32 + 24-bit counter and has a cycle of about 1193046.5 hours (about 136 years). The counter value of the STC unit 1476 indicates an absolute time. Therefore, the deviation detecting unit 1481 can simply compare the STC value (STC (T)) output from the STC unit 1336 with the STC value (STC (M)) output from the STC unit 1476. It is not possible to detect the amount of deviation of the and complementary signals.
　したがって、本実施例では、ＮＴＰに記述された絶対時刻であるＵＴＣ値と、放送側で設定した基準に基づく相対時刻であるＰＣＲの対応関係を示す情報を放送局３００Ｂのサーバから配信するＩＰストリームで伝送する情報（例えば、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩ等）に追加し、受信機で、当該情報を更に参照することにより、前記ずれ量の検出を可能としている。具体的には、絶対時刻を伝送するＮＴＰ自体に相対時刻であるＰＣＲの対応関係を示す情報を格納する方式、またはＮＴＰに記述された絶対時刻であるＵＴＣ値と、放送側で設定した基準に基づく相対時刻であるＰＣＲに基づくカウンタ値の対応関係を示す情報を新たな記述子に格納する方式等が考えられる。以下これらの時刻の対応関係情報を『時刻対応関係情報』と総称し、それぞれの具体的な内容について説明する。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, an IP stream is delivered from the server of the broadcasting station 300 B that indicates the correspondence between the UTC value, which is the absolute time described in NTP, and the PCR, which is the relative time based on the criteria set on the broadcast side. In addition to the information (for example, MMT-SI etc.) to be transmitted, the receiver can detect the amount of deviation by further referring to the information. Specifically, according to a method of storing information indicating the correspondence of PCR which is relative time in NTP itself transmitting absolute time, or a UTC value which is absolute time described in NTP, and a standard set on the broadcasting side. It is conceivable to store information indicating the correspondence of counter values based on PCR, which is relative time based on, in a new descriptor. Hereinafter, the correspondence relationship information of these times is generically called "time correspondence relationship information", and the specific content of each is demonstrated.
　当該『時刻対応関係情報』をＮＴＰに記述する場合は、システム制御部１４７５が、ＳＴＣ部１４７６を介して取得したＮＴＰから『時刻対応関係情報』を読み取り、ずれ検出部１４８１に『時刻対応関係情報』の内容自体またはその内容に基づく制御情報を送信すれば良い。 When the “time correspondence relationship information” is described in NTP, the system control unit 1475 reads “time correspondence relationship information” from the NTP acquired via the STC unit 1476, and the deviation detection unit 1481 reads “time correspondence relationship information”. The control information may be transmitted on the basis of the content itself or the content.
　また、当該『時刻対応関係情報』を新たな記述子に格納する場合は、システム制御部１４７５が、システムデコーダ１４７４を介して『時刻対応関係情報』を取得し、ずれ検出部１４８１に『時刻対応関係情報』の内容自体またはその内容に基づく制御情報を送信すれば良い。 In addition, when the “time correspondence relationship information” is stored in a new descriptor, the system control unit 1475 acquires “time correspondence relationship information” via the system decoder 1474, and the shift detection unit 1481 selects “time correspondence”. The content itself of the relationship information or control information based on the content may be transmitted.
　なお、ＩＰストリームで伝送するＭＭＴ－ＳＩの構成は、本発明の実施例で追加等の説明を行った部分以外は、高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスで採用されているＭＭＴ－ＳＩの構成を用いれば良い。 The configuration of the MMT-SI for transmission in the IP stream is the same as that of the MMT-SI employed in the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcast service except for the part described in the embodiment of the present invention. good.
　図２３ＧにＮＴＰのデータ構造の一例を示す。また、同図に示したＮＴＰのデータ構造における『ｍｏｄｅ』は、図２３Ｈに示すようにＮＴＰの動作モードを示すパラメータである。 FIG. 23G shows an example of the data structure of NTP. Further, “mode” in the data structure of the NTP shown in the figure is a parameter indicating the operation mode of the NTP as shown in FIG. 23H.
　ＭＭＴ方式を用いた高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスで用いるＮＴＰでは、動作モードを『５（ブロードキャスト）』に設定する。更に、『ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』にシステム時刻が最後に補正された時刻をＮＴＰ長形式で記述し、『ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｔ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』にクライアントへの応答を送出したサーバの時刻をＮＴＰ長形式で記述する。『ｏｒｉｇｉｎ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』および『ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』は『０』を格納する。 In the NTP used in the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service using the MMT method, the operation mode is set to "5 (broadcast)". Furthermore, the time when the system time was last corrected is described in “reference_timestamp” in NTP long format, and the time of the server that has sent the response to the client is described in “NTP long format” in “transmit_timestamp”. "Origin_timestamp" and "receive_timestamp" store "0".
　一方、本実施例において、補完データストリームで用いるＮＴＰに、『時刻対応関係情報』として、絶対時刻であるＵＴＣ値と相対時刻であるＰＣＲの対応関係を示す情報を格納する場合は、以下のとおりに構成すれば良い。ＮＴＰの動作モードを『７（ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ　ｆｏｒ　ｐｒｉｖａｔｅ　ｕｓｅ）』や『０（ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ）』等に設定し、更に、『ｏｒｉｇｉｎ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』にＰＣＲに基づいて動作するシステム時計が所定の基準値（例えば、３３＋９ビットが全て『０』）になるタイミングの時刻をＮＴＰ長形式で記述するようにすれば良い。即ちこの情報は、ＰＣＲの所定の基準値と絶対時刻の対応関係を示す情報であり、本実施例の『時刻対応関係情報』の一例である。なお、本説明では一例として、この『時刻対応関係情報』を『ｏｒｉｇｉｎ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』の部分に格納したが、ＮＴＰの他の使用されていないパラメータ部分に格納しても構わない。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when storing the information indicating the correspondence between the UTC value, which is an absolute time, and the PCR, which is a relative time, as “time correspondence information” in NTP used in the complementary data stream, It should be configured to The operation mode of NTP is set to "7 (reserved for private use)" or "0 (reserved)" etc. Furthermore, the system clock that operates based on PCR at "origin_timestamp" has a predetermined reference value (for example, 33 + 9 bits) It is sufficient to describe the time of the timing when all become “0”) in the NTP long form. That is, this information is information indicating a correspondence between a predetermined reference value of PCR and an absolute time, and is an example of “time correspondence information” in the present embodiment. In the present description, the “time correspondence information” is stored in the “origin_timestamp” portion as an example, but may be stored in other unused parameter portions of the NTP.
　これにより、ずれ検出部１４８１は、当該『時刻対応関係情報』を参照することにより、絶対時刻であるＳＴＣ部１４７６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｍ））を、ＰＣＲに基づく相対時刻に換算することが可能となる。なお、後段の処理構成によっては、ずれ検出部１４８１は、当該相対時刻の基準値と絶対時刻の対応関係情報を参照することにより、相対時刻であるＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））を絶対時刻に換算するように構成しても良い。 Thereby, the deviation detection unit 1481 may convert the STC value (STC (M)) of the STC unit 1476, which is an absolute time, into a relative time based on PCR by referring to the "time correspondence relationship information". It becomes possible. Note that the deviation detection unit 1481 refers to the correspondence information between the reference value of the relative time and the absolute time, depending on the processing configuration of the latter stage, to obtain the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336, which is the relative time. May be converted to an absolute time.
　したがって、ずれ検出部１４８１は、相対時刻であるＳＴＣ部１３３６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））と絶対時刻であるＳＴＣ部１４７６のＳＴＣ値（ＳＴＣ（Ｍ））を参照し、更に、前記『ｏｒｉｇｉｎ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』に記述された『時刻対応関係情報』（例えば、『ＰＣＲに基づいて動作するシステム時計（ＳＴＣ（Ｔ））が所定の基準値になるタイミングの時刻』）を参照することにより、２Ｋ信号と補完信号のずれ量を検出することが可能となる。 Therefore, the deviation detection unit 1481 refers to the STC value (STC (T)) of the STC unit 1336 that is relative time and the STC value (STC (M)) of the STC unit 1476 that is absolute time, and further, the above-mentioned “origin_timestamp By referring to “time correspondence information” described in (for example, “the time of the timing when the system clock (STC (T) operating based on PCR becomes a predetermined reference value”) It becomes possible to detect the amount of deviation of the complementary signal.
　なお、上述の例では、『時刻対応関係情報』の一例である『ＰＣＲに基づいて動作するシステム時計が所定の値になるタイミングの時刻』をＮＴＰのデータ構造の１つのパラメータを利用して記述する方式について説明した。 In the above example, “time at which the system clock operating based on PCR becomes a predetermined value”, which is an example of “time correspondence information,” is described using one parameter of NTP data structure. Described the method.
　次に、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩに新たな記述子を設けて『時刻対応関係情報』を格納して伝送する例を説明する。 Next, an example will be described in which a new descriptor is provided in MMT-SI, and "time correspondence relationship information" is stored and transmitted.
　図２３Ｉは、当該新たな記述子（ＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子）の構成を説明する図である。同図における『ＵＴＣ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』は、『ＰＣＲ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』の値に対応する絶対時刻である協定世界時（ＵＴＣ）の値を記述するパラメータである。『ＰＣＲ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』は、協定世界時（ＵＴＣ）が『ＵＴＣ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』に示される値になった時の相対時刻であるＰＣＲの値を記述するパラメータである。即ち、放送局側で、当該ＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子内に、時刻を対応させたい絶対時刻と相対時刻の組み合わせのそれぞれの時刻を『ＵＴＣ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』と『ＰＣＲ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』に記述することにより、受信機側で、放送局側の意図どおりに絶対時刻と相対時刻の対応関係を把握することが可能となる。 FIG. 23I is a diagram for describing a configuration of the new descriptor (UTC-PCR reference descriptor). “UTC_Reference” in the figure is a parameter that describes the value of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is an absolute time corresponding to the value of “PCR_Reference”. “PCR_Reference” is a parameter that describes the value of PCR, which is the relative time when Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) reaches the value indicated in “UTC_Reference”. That is, at the broadcast station side, the receiver side is described by describing each time of a combination of an absolute time and a relative time in the UTC-PCR reference descriptor to which the time is to correspond, in “UTC_Reference” and “PCR_Reference”. Thus, it becomes possible to grasp the correspondence between the absolute time and the relative time as intended by the broadcasting station.
　なお、『ＰＣＲ＿Ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ』の５６ビットのデータは、４０ビットの上位データと１６ビットの下位データとで構成される。前記４０ビットの上位データには、ＰＣＲ値の上位３３ビットが記述され、残り７ビットは『０』または『１』の固定値として良い。前記１６ビットの下位データには、ＰＣＲ値の下位９ビットが記述され、残り７ビットは『０』または『１』の固定値として良い。『ＵＴＣ＿ＰＣＲ＿ｌｅａｐ＿ｉｎｄｉｃａｔｏｒ』は、送出システムのシステムクロックに対し閏秒調整を実施する際、協定世界時（ＵＴＣ）参照時刻が、日本時間で閏秒挿入日前日の午前９時０分０秒から閏秒挿入日の１回目の午前８時５９分５９秒の場合には『１』を、閏秒削除日前日の午前９時０分０秒から閏秒削除日の午前８時５９分５８秒の場合には『２』を、その他の場合は『０』を記述する。このＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子により、前記『ＰＣＲに基づいて動作するシステム時計が所定の値になるタイミングの時刻』を設定することが可能である。 The 56-bit data of “PCR_Reference” is composed of 40-bit upper data and 16-bit lower data. The upper 33 bits of the PCR value may be described in the 40-bit upper data, and the remaining 7 bits may be a fixed value of “0” or “1”. The lower 9 bits of the PCR value may be described in the lower 16 bits of data, and the remaining 7 bits may be a fixed value of “0” or “1”. “UTC_PCR_leap_indicator” inserts Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) reference time from 9:00:00 am on the day before the leap second insertion day in Japan time when leap second adjustment to the transmission system clock is performed. In the case of 8:59:59 on the first day of the day, “1” in the case of 8:59:58 on the deletion day from 9:00:00 on the day before the leap second day Describes "2", and "0" otherwise. By this UTC-PCR reference descriptor, it is possible to set the "time of the timing when the system clock operating based on PCR becomes a predetermined value".
　なお、ＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子等の新たな記述子を用いて、『時刻対応関係情報』を伝送する場合は、ＮＴＰでは、『時刻対応関係情報』を記述する必要はない。この場合は、高度広帯域衛星デジタル放送サービスで採用されているＮＴＰと同様のＮＴＰを用いれば良い。 When “time correspondence relationship information” is transmitted using a new descriptor such as a UTC-PCR reference descriptor, NTP does not need to describe “time correspondence relationship information”. In this case, the same NTP as that employed in the advanced broadband satellite digital broadcasting service may be used.
　ＵＴＣ－ＰＣＲ参照記述子は、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩを構成する何れかのテーブルに含まれて良い。また、所定のテーブルのプライベートセクション（『ｐｒｉｖａｔｅ＿ｄａｔａ＿ｂｙｔｅ』等のパラメータ）を利用して、前記『時刻対応関係情報』を記述しても良い。例えば、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩのテーブルの１つのＭＰＴ（ＭＭＴパッケージテーブル）に格納すれば、放送局側で番組単位で相対時刻と絶対時刻の対応関係が設定可能である。また、例えば、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩのテーブルの１つのＭＨ－ＳＤＴ（ＭＨ－サービス記述テーブル）に格納すれば、放送局側でサービス単位で相対時刻と絶対時刻の対応関係が設定可能である。但し、ＭＨ－ＳＤＴでは、放送局側と受信機側での更新処理の頻度が高くない運用が考えられるため、番組単位で必ず更新処理が必要なＭＰＴ（ＭＭＴパッケージテーブル）に格納する方式の方がより好ましい。 The UTC-PCR reference descriptor may be included in any of the tables that make up the MMT-SI. Further, the "time correspondence relationship information" may be described using a private section (a parameter such as "private_data_byte") of a predetermined table. For example, if it is stored in one MPT (MMT package table) of the table of MMT-SI, the correspondence between relative time and absolute time can be set on the broadcast station side on a program basis. Further, for example, if it is stored in one MH-SDT (MH-service description table) of the table of MMT-SI, the correspondence between relative time and absolute time can be set in service unit on the broadcast station side. However, in MH-SDT, since the frequency of update processing on the broadcast station side and the receiver side may not be high, there is a method of storing in MPT (MMT package table) that requires update processing on a program basis. Is more preferred.
　また、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子やＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子等に前記『時刻対応関係情報』を示すパラメータを追加しても良い。 In addition, a parameter indicating the “time correspondence relationship information” may be added to the MPU time stamp descriptor, the MPU extended time stamp descriptor, and the like.
　或いは、前記『時刻対応関係情報』は、ＭＭＴＰペイロードの映像信号のＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵを構成するＨ．２６４／ＡＶＣやＨ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣのデータストリームのフレーム単位のユーザデータ領域に記述されても良い。 Alternatively, the “time correspondence information” may be an H. H. MMU that constitutes the MFU / MPU of the video signal of the MMTP payload. H.264 / AVC and H.264. It may be described in the frame-based user data area of the H.265 / HEVC data stream.
　（４）共通のＰＴＳとＤＴＳによる同期処理２
　図２３Ｊは、放送受信装置１００Ｕの仮想デコーダ（ＳＴＤ）の一例を示すブロック図である。基本的に図２３Ｄに示したＳＴＤの例と同様の構成を有する。 (4) Synchronization processing by common PTS and DTS 2
FIG. 23J is a block diagram showing an example of a virtual decoder (STD) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U. Basically, the configuration is the same as that of the STD example shown in FIG. 23D.
　ＳＴＣ部１３３６は、チューナ／復調部１３１から出力されるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳが有するＰＣＲの値を参照して動作するシステム時計である。また、同図の全構成は、前記システム時計に同期した２７ＭＨｚの基本クロックで動作する。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのペイロードがＰＥＳの場合に記述される提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ）や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ）は、前記ＰＣＲの値に基づいて設定される情報である。 The STC unit 1336 is a system clock that operates with reference to the PCR value of the MPEG2-TS output from the tuner / demodulation unit 131. Also, the whole configuration of FIG. 6 operates with a 27 MHz basic clock synchronized with the system clock. Presentation time information (PTS) and decoding time information (DTS) described when the payload of the MPEG2-TS is PES is information set based on the value of the PCR.
　一方、ＭＭＴ方式を用いて伝送される補完データストリームには、ＭＭＴＰペイロードのＭＭＴ－ＳＩ等に記述される映像ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵや音声ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵの提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ（Ｍ））や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ（Ｍ））の他、映像／音声符号化ストリームのフレーム単位のユーザデータ領域にも映像ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵや音声ＭＦＵ／ＭＰＵの提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ（Ｈ））や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ（Ｈ））が記述されて良い。前記提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ（Ｍ））や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ（Ｍ））はＵＴＣ値に基づいて設定されている時刻情報であり、一方、前記提示時刻情報（ＰＴＳ（Ｈ））や復号時刻情報（ＤＴＳ（Ｈ））は前記ＰＣＲの値に基づいて設定される情報である。 On the other hand, in the complementary data stream transmitted using the MMT method, presentation time information (PTS (M)) of the video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU described in the MMT-SI etc. of the MMTP payload, and decoding time information In addition to (DTS (M)), presentation time information (PTS (H)) of video MFU / MPU or audio MFU / MPU and decoding time information (DTS (DTS H)) may be described. The presentation time information (PTS (M)) and the decoding time information (DTS (M)) are time information set based on the UTC value, while the presentation time information (PTS (H)) and the decoding time Information (DTS (H)) is information set based on the value of the PCR.
　ビデオデコーダ１３１４やオーディオデコーダ１３２４は、システム制御部１３３５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｔ）やＤＴＳ（Ｔ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの出力タイミングを制御する。また、ビデオデコーダ１４５４やオーディオデコーダ１４６４は、システム制御部１４７５の制御に基づき、ＰＴＳ（Ｈ）やＤＴＳ（Ｈ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値を比較することにより、映像データや音声データの出力タイミングを制御する。この場合、ＰＴＳ（Ｍ）やＤＴＳ（Ｍ）とＳＴＣ（Ｔ）の値（即ち、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子やＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子の各パラメータ）を参照する必要はない。また、ＮＴＰも無視して良い。システム制御部１３３５とシステム制御部１４７５は、統合されても良い。 The video decoder 1314 and the audio decoder 1324 control the output timing of the video data and the audio data by comparing the value of PTS (T) or DTS (T) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1335. Do. In addition, the video decoder 1454 and the audio decoder 1464 compare the values of PTS (H) and DTS (H) with STC (T) under the control of the system control unit 1475 to output video data and audio data. Control. In this case, it is not necessary to refer to the values of PTS (M) or DTS (M) and STC (T) (that is, the respective parameters of the MPU timestamp descriptor and the MPU extended timestamp descriptor). You can also ignore NTP. The system control unit 1335 and the system control unit 1475 may be integrated.
　前述のような構成／設定とすることにより、補完（高画質化）部１４９２では、補完（高画質化）部１４８２のようなＳＴＣ値の差分に基づく同期処理を行う必要はなく、多重化／分離部１３１６の出力（即ち、２Ｋ信号）と多重化／分離部１４５６の出力（即ち、補完信号）を同期させることが可能となる。選択／多重化部１４９３も同様である。 With the configuration / setting as described above, the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1492 does not need to perform synchronization processing based on the difference of STC values like the complementation (image quality improvement) unit 1482, and It is possible to synchronize the output of the separating unit 1316 (ie, 2K signal) and the output of the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit 1456 (ie, the complementary signal). The same applies to the selection / multiplexing unit 1493.
　以上説明した本実施例の構成によれば、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機のユーザはこれまでと同じ視聴環境で視聴を継続可能であり、且つ、ＵＨＤ放送番組の提供が可能な地上波デジタル放送サービスのシステムを実現可能である。即ち、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能となる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and can provide the UHD broadcast program. System of various digital terrestrial broadcasting services can be realized. That is, it is possible to execute functions with higher added value.
　（実施例３）
　以下では、本発明の実施例３に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例２と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例２との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。実施例２では、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）に関して説明したが、本実施例では、音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に関して説明する。 (Example 3)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The configuration, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as in Embodiment 2 unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, the difference between the present embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication. In the second embodiment, the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal has been described, but in the present embodiment, the extension processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal is described.
　［システム構成］
　本実施例の放送システムの構成は、図１８Ａに一例を示したシステム構成図と同様であるが、放送受信装置１００Ｕは図２５Ａに示す放送受信装置１００Ｕ２で代替される。図２４Ａは、放送局３００Ｂで行われる（Ａ）追加用音声データ生成処理、および、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２で行われる（Ｂ）多チャンネル化処理の一例を示す概念図である。 [System configuration]
The configuration of the broadcast system of this embodiment is the same as the system configuration shown in FIG. 18A, but the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U is replaced by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 shown in FIG. 25A. FIG. 24A is a conceptual diagram showing an example of (A) additional audio data generation processing performed by the broadcast station 300B and (B) multi-channeling processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2.
　本実施例の放送システムでは、放送局３００Ｂで制作された放送番組は２２．２ｃｈの音声データを有する。また、放送局３００Ｂでは、前記２２．２ｃｈの音声データから、放送波で送出する５．１ｃｈの音声データとネットで配信する追加用音声データとを生成するダウンミックス＋追加用音声データ生成処理を行う。２２．２ｃｈの音声データをダウンミックスして生成した５．１ｃｈの音声データは、電波塔３００ｔを介して放送波として送出される。追加用音声データ生成処理で生成した追加用音声データは、追加用音声データストリームに変換されてアプリケーションサーバに記憶され、インターネット等を介して配信される。放送受信装置１００Ｕ２では、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信して、５．１ｃｈの音声データを再生する。また、インターネット等を介して取得した追加用音声データストリームに対して、復号等の処理を施し、追加用音声データを再生する。更に、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２は、前記再生した５．１ｃｈの音声データと追加用音声データを用いて多チャンネル化処理を行うことにより、２２．２ｃｈの音声データを生成する。 In the broadcast system of this embodiment, the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 22.2 channels of audio data. In the broadcast station 300B, downmix + additional audio data generation processing is performed to generate 5.1ch audio data to be transmitted by broadcast waves and additional audio data to be distributed by net from the 22.2ch audio data. Do. The 5.1 ch audio data generated by downmixing 22.2 ch audio data is transmitted as a broadcast wave via the radio wave tower 300t. The additional audio data generated in the additional audio data generation process is converted into an additional audio data stream, stored in the application server, and distributed via the Internet or the like. The broadcast reception apparatus 100U2 receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t, and reproduces 5.1 ch audio data. Further, processing such as decoding is performed on the additional audio data stream acquired via the Internet or the like to reproduce additional audio data. Furthermore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 generates 22.2 ch audio data by performing multi-channel processing using the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and additional audio data.
　ここで、２２．２ｃｈの音声データを出力する際のスピーカ配置の一例を図２４Ｂに示す。なお、図中のスクリーン１００ｓはテレビ受信機等であって良い。即ち、前記テレビ受信機等が本実施例の放送受信装置１００Ｕ２となる。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２がＤＶＤレコーダやＳＴＢ等である場合、スクリーン１００ｓは、前記ＤＶＤレコーダやＳＴＢ等の出力映像を表示するモニタ装置等であって良い。 Here, an example of a speaker arrangement at the time of outputting audio data of 22.2 ch is shown in FIG. 24B. The screen 100s in the figure may be a television receiver or the like. That is, the television receiver or the like is the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 of this embodiment. When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 is a DVD recorder, STB or the like, the screen 100s may be a monitor apparatus or the like for displaying an output image of the DVD recorder, STB or the like.
　本実施例では、２２．２ｃｈ音声出力を行う場合、２４個のスピーカを立体的に三層に配置するものとする。上層（Ｔｏｐ　Ｌａｙｅｒ）には、前方左側（ＴｐＦＬ）のスピーカ８０１、前方中央（ＴｐＦＣ）のスピーカ８０３、前方右側（ＴｐＦＲ）のスピーカ８０５、左側方（ＴｐＳｉＬ）のスピーカ８１１、中央（ＴｐＣ）のスピーカ８１３、右側方（ＴｐＳｉＲ）のスピーカ８１５、後方左側（ＴｐＢＬ）のスピーカ８２１、後方中央（ＴｐＢＣ）のスピーカ８２３、後方右側（ＴｐＢＲ）のスピーカ８２５、が配置される。中層（Ｍｉｄｄｌｅ　Ｌａｙｅｒ）には、前方左側（ＦＬ）のスピーカ８３１、前方左中央（ＦＬｃ）のスピーカ８３２、前方中央（ＦＣ）のスピーカ８３３、前方右中央（ＦＲｃ）のスピーカ８３４、前方右側（ＦＲ）のスピーカ８３５、左側方（ＳｉＬ）のスピーカ８４１、右側方（ＳｉＲ）のスピーカ８４５、後方左側（ＢＬ）のスピーカ８５１、後方中央（ＢＣ）のスピーカ８５３、後方右側（ＢＲ）のスピーカ８５５、が配置される。下層（Ｂｏｔｔｏｍ　Ｌａｙｅｒ）には、前方左側（ＢｔＦＬ）のスピーカ８６１、前方中央（ＢｔＦＣ）のスピーカ８６３、前方右側（ＢｔＦＲ）のスピーカ８６５、が配置され、更に、低域効果用（ＬＦＥ１、ＬＦＥ２）のスピーカ８７２およびスピーカ８７４が配置される。 In this embodiment, when 22.2 ch audio output is performed, 24 speakers are three-dimensionally arranged in three layers. In the upper layer (Top Layer), a speaker 801 at the front left (TpFL), a speaker 803 at the front center (TpFC), a speaker 805 at the front right (TpFR), a speaker 811 at the left side (TpSiL), and a speaker at the center (TpC) 813, a right side (TpSiR) speaker 815, a rear left side (TpBL) speaker 821, a rear center (TpBC) speaker 823, and a rear right side (TpBR) speaker 825 are arranged. In the middle layer, the speaker 831 at the front left (FL), the speaker 832 at the front left center (FLc), the speaker 833 at the front center (FC), the speaker 834 at the front right center (FRc), the front right (FR) ) Speaker 835, left side (SiL) speaker 841, right side (SiR) speaker 845, rear left side (BL) speaker 851, rear center (BC) speaker 853 and rear right side (BR) speaker 855, Is placed. In the lower layer (Bottom Layer), a speaker 861 at the front left (BtFL), a speaker 863 at the front center (BtFC), and a speaker 865 at the front right (BtFR) are disposed, and further for low frequency effects (LFE1 and LFE2) Speakers 872 and 874 are arranged.
　図２４Ｃは、放送局３００Ｂで行われる追加用音声データ生成処理の具体的な処理の一例を示す概念図である。本実施例の放送システムでは、放送局３００Ｂで制作された放送番組は２２．２ｃｈの音声データを有する。映像解像度は、２Ｋであっても４Ｋ（８Ｋ）であっても良い。放送局３００Ｂでは、前記２２．２ｃｈの音声データから、放送波で送出する５．１ｃｈの音声データとネットで配信する追加用音声データとを生成する。 FIG. 24C is a conceptual diagram showing an example of a specific process of the additional sound data generation process performed by the broadcast station 300B. In the broadcast system of this embodiment, the broadcast program produced by the broadcast station 300B has 22.2 channels of audio data. The video resolution may be 2K or 4K (8K). From the audio data of 22.2 ch, the broadcasting station 300 B generates 5.1 ch of audio data to be transmitted by broadcast wave and additional audio data to be distributed by net.
　放送波で送出する５．１ｃｈの音声データは、２２．２ｃｈの音声データを用いた演算処理（ダウンミックス処理）により算出される。５．１ｃｈの音声データを算出する演算式の一例を下記に示す。 The 5.1 ch audio data to be transmitted by broadcast waves is calculated by an arithmetic processing (downmix processing) using 22.2 ch audio data. An example of an arithmetic expression for calculating 5.1ch audio data is shown below.
　前方左側ch：L=FL+αFLc+βSiL+ε(TpFL+βTpSiL+BtFL)
　前方右側ch：R=FR+αFRc+βSiR+ε(TpFR+βTpSiR+BtFR)
　前方中央ch：C=FC+αFLc+αFRc+ε(TpFC+δTpC+BtFC)
　低域効果ch：LFE=ζ(LFE1+LFE2)
　後方左側ch：LS=BL+γBC+βSiL+ε(δTpC+TpBL+βTpSiL+γTpBC)
　後方右側ch：RS=BR+γBC+βSiR+ε(δTpC+TpBR+βTpSiR+γTpBC)
　　　　　　　(α,β,γ,δ,ε,ζ：ダウンミックス係数)
　前記算出した５．１ｃｈの音声データ（Ｌ／Ｒ／Ｃ／ＬＦＥ／ＬＳ／ＲＳ）は、現行の地上波デジタル放送のシステムと同様に、圧縮符号化、パケット化、各種制御信号の付加、変調、等の処理を施され、図１８Ａの電波塔３００ｔからデジタル放送波として送出される。このデジタル放送波は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機でも受信可能である。 Front left ch: L = FL + αFLc + βSiL + ε (TpFL + βTpSiL + BtFL)
Front right ch: R = FR + αFRc + βSiR + ε (TpFR + βTpSiR + BtFR)
Front center ch: C = FC + αFLc + αFRc + ε (TpFC + δTpC + BtFC)
Low range effect ch: LFE = ζ (LFE1 + LFE2)
Rear left ch: LS = BL + γBC + βSiL + ε (δTpC + TpBL + βTpSiL + γTpBC)
Rear right ch: RS = BR + γBC + βSiR + ε (δTpC + TpBR + βTpSiR + γTpBC)
(α, β, γ, δ, ε, ζ: downmix coefficient)
The calculated 5.1 ch audio data (L / R / C / LFE / LS / RS) is compressed and encoded, packetized, addition of various control signals, modulation as in the current terrestrial digital broadcasting system. , Etc., and sent out as a digital broadcast wave from the radio tower 300t of FIG. 18A. This digital broadcast wave can also be received by a television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service.
　ネットで配信する追加用音声データは、２２．２ｃｈの音声データのうちの、前記算出した５．１ｃｈの音声データとスピーカ配置で対応する位置の音声データを除く１７．１ｃｈ分の音声データである。即ち、５．１ｃｈの音声データ（Ｌ／Ｒ／Ｃ／ＬＦＥ／ＬＳ／ＲＳ）とスピーカ配置で対応する位置の２２．２ｃｈ音声データ（ＦＬ／ＦＲ／ＦＣ／ＬＦＥ１／ＢＬ／ＢＲ）を除く１７．１ｃｈ分（ＦＬｃ／ＦＲｃ／ＢＣ／ＳｉＬ／ＳｉＲ／ＴｐＦＬ／ＴｐＦＲ／ＴｐＦＣ／ＴｐＣ／ＴｐＢＬ／ＴｐＢＲ／ＴｐＳｉＬ／ＴｐＳｉＲ／ＴｐＢＣ／ＢｔＦＣ／ＢｔＦＬ／ＢｔＦＲ／ＬＦＥ２）の音声データである。追加用音声データは、必要に応じて、圧縮符号化、パケット化、各種制御信号、前記演算に使用したダウンミックス係数の付加、等の処理を施されて追加用音声データストリームに変換される。追加用音声データストリームは、前述のアプリケーションサーバに記憶され、インターネット等を介して配信される。前記インターネット等を介した配信は、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳやＭＰＥＧ２－ＰＳの形式で行われても良いし、ＭＭＴ形式で行われても良い。 The additional audio data distributed via the net is audio data for 17.1 ch excluding audio data of a position corresponding to the calculated 5.1 ch audio data and the speaker arrangement among the 22.2 ch audio data . That is, it excludes the sound data of 5.1ch (L / R / C / LFE / LS / RS) and 22.2ch of voice data (FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR) corresponding to the speaker arrangement 17 It is the audio data of 1ch (FLc / FRc / BC / SiL / SiR / TpFL / TpFC / TpC / TpBL / TpBR / TpSiL / TpSiR / TpBC / BtFC / BtFL / BtFR / LFE2). The audio data for addition is subjected to processing such as compression coding, packetization, various control signals, addition of the downmix coefficient used for the above-described operation, etc., as necessary, and converted into an audio data stream for addition. The additional audio data stream is stored in the above-mentioned application server and distributed via the Internet or the like. The distribution via the Internet or the like may be performed in the form of MPEG2-TS or MPEG2-PS, or may be performed in the MMT form.
　なお、音声データは映像データと比較してそのデータ量が少ないため、追加用音声データは、放送番組が有する２２．２ｃｈの音声データの全てをそのまま配信しても良い。 Since audio data has a smaller data amount than video data, the additional audio data may be delivered as it is all of the 22.2 ch audio data of the broadcast program.
　図２４Ｄは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２で行われる多チャンネル化処理の一例を示す概念図である。放送受信装置１００Ｕ２は、アンテナ１００ａ２を介して、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信する。更に、前記受信したデジタル放送波に対して、復調、選局、復号、等の処理を施して、５．１ｃｈの音声データを再生する。前記復調、選局、復号、等の処理は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機と同様の処理で良い。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２は、図示を省略したインターネットやルータ装置等を介して、放送局３００Ｂのアプリケーションサーバから追加用音声データストリームを取得する。更に、前記取得した追加用音声データストリームに対して、復号等の処理を施し、追加用音声データを再生する。放送受信装置１００Ｕ２は、更に、前記再生した５．１ｃｈの音声データと追加用音声データを用いて多チャンネル化処理を行うことにより、２２．２ｃｈ音声データを生成する。 FIG. 24D is a conceptual diagram showing an example of multi-channeling processing performed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a2. Further, the received digital broadcast wave is subjected to processing such as demodulation, channel selection, and decoding to reproduce 5.1 ch audio data. The processing such as demodulation, tuning, decoding, etc. may be the same processing as the current television receiver compatible with terrestrial digital broadcasting service. Also, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 acquires the additional audio data stream from the application server of the broadcast station 300B via the Internet, a router device, etc. (not shown). Furthermore, processing such as decoding is performed on the acquired additional audio data stream to reproduce additional audio data. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 further generates 22.2 ch audio data by performing multi-channel processing using the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and additional audio data.
　多チャンネル化処理においては、追加用音声データとしてインターネット等を介して配信される音声データ（１７．１ｃｈ分の音声データ）に不足する音声データ（５．１ｃｈ分の音声データ：ＦＬ／ＦＲ／ＦＣ／ＬＦＥ１／ＢＬ／ＢＲ）は、放送波から再生した５．１ｃｈの音声データと前記追加用音声データを用いた演算処理（混合処理）により算出される。前記演算処理（混合処理）により算出された５．１ｃｈ分の音声データと追加用音声データの１７．１ｃｈ分の音声データを合わせることによって、２２．２ｃｈの音声データが生成される。２２．２ｃｈの音声データのうちのＦＬ／ＦＲ／ＦＣ／ＬＦＥ１／ＢＬ／ＢＲを算出する演算式の一例を下記に示す。 In multi-channel processing, voice data (voice data for 5.1 ch: voice data for 5.1 ch: FL / FR / FC) is lacking in voice data (voice data for 17.1 ch) delivered as voice data for addition via the Internet etc. / LFE1 / BL / BR) is calculated by arithmetic processing (mixing processing) using 5.1ch of audio data reproduced from the broadcast wave and the additional audio data. The sound data of 22.2 ch is generated by combining the sound data of 5.1 ch calculated by the calculation processing (mixing processing) and the sound data of 17.1 ch of the addition sound data. An example of an arithmetic expression for calculating FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR of 22.2 ch audio data is shown below.
　前方左側ch：FL=L-{αFLc+βSiL+ε(TpFL+βTpSiL+BtFL)}
　前方右側ch：FR=R-{αFRc+βSiR+ε(TpFR+βTpSiR+BtFR)}
　前方中央ch：FC=C-{αFLc+αFRc+ε(TpFC+δTpC+BtFC)}
　第１低域効果ch：LFE1=LFE/ζ-LFE2
　後方左側ch：BL=LS-{γBC+βSiL+ε(δTpC+TpBL+βTpSiL+γTpBC)}
　後方右側ch：BR=RS-{γBC+βSiR+ε(δTpC+TpBR+βTpSiR+γTpBC)}
　　　　　　　(α,β,γ,δ,ε,ζ：ダウンミックス係数)
　別の構成例としては、図２４Ｅに示すように、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２において、混合処理演算によるＦＬ／ＦＲ／ＦＣ／ＬＦＥ１／ＢＬ／ＢＲの各音声データの算出を行わない構成としても良い。例えば、５．１ｃｈの音声データ（Ｌ／Ｒ／Ｃ／ＬＦＥ／ＬＳ／ＲＳ）をそれぞれ２２．２ｃｈのＦＬ／ＦＲ／ＦＣ／ＬＦＥ１／ＢＬ／ＢＲの各音声データの代替として、そのまま音声出力するようにしても良い。この場合、音像の正確性が多少劣化するが、不具合を生じる程ではなく、また、混合処理演算のための回路構成や演算にかかる電力等を削減することが可能となる。２２．２ｃｈの残りのチャンネルについては、追加用音声データとして取得し、元の５．１ｃｈの音声データと追加用音声データとを用いて、２２．２ｃｈの音声データとする多チャンネル化処理を行えば良い。 Front left ch: FL = L- {αFLc + βSiL + ε (TpFL + βTpSiL + BtFL)}
Front right ch: FR = R-{αFRc + βSiR + ε (TpFR + βTpSiR + BtFR)}
Front center ch: FC = C− {αFLc + αFRc + ε (TpFC + δTpC + BtFC)}
1st low range effect ch: LFE1 = LFE / ζ-LFE2
Rear left ch: BL = LS-{γBC + βSiL + ε (δTpC + TpBL + βTpSiL + γTpBC)}
Rear right ch: BR = RS-{γBC + βSiR + ε (δTpC + TpBR + βTpSiR + γTpBC)}
(α, β, γ, δ, ε, ζ: downmix coefficient)
As another configuration example, as shown in FIG. 24E, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 may be configured not to calculate each audio data of FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR by mixing processing calculation. For example, 5.1ch of audio data (L / R / C / LFE / LS / RS) is output as it is as an alternative to each 22. 2ch of FL / FR / FC / LFE1 / BL / BR audio data You may do so. In this case, although the accuracy of the sound image is somewhat deteriorated, it is not so large as to cause a problem, and it is possible to reduce the circuit configuration for the mixing process calculation and the power required for the calculation. The remaining channels of 22.2 ch are acquired as additional audio data, and the multi-channeling process is performed to convert it to audio data of 22.2 ch using the original 5.1 ch audio data and the additional audio data. It is good.
　また、別の例として、追加用音声データとして、放送番組が有する２２．２ｃｈの音声データの全てが配信される場合、放送波から再生した５．１ｃｈの音声データとネットを介して取得した２２．２ｃｈの音声データの何れを使用するかを選択することによって音声信号の拡張処理を行っても良い。 Further, as another example, when all of the 22.2 ch audio data of a broadcast program is delivered as additional audio data, the audio data of 5.1 ch reproduced from the broadcast wave and 22 acquired via the net The extension processing of the audio signal may be performed by selecting which of the 2ch audio data is to be used.
　また、放送波で送出される５．１ｃｈの音声データとインターネットを介して配信される追加用音声データとの同期処理は、実施例２と同様に、所定の同期情報に基づいて同期処理がなされて良い。追加用音声データストリームの取得先も実施例２と同様に指定されて良い。 Further, as in the second embodiment, the synchronization process between the 5.1ch audio data sent out by broadcast wave and the additional audio data delivered via the Internet is performed based on predetermined synchronization information. It is good. The acquisition destination of the additional audio data stream may be designated as in the second embodiment.
　電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波は、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービスを受信可能なテレビ受信機（放送受信装置１００Ｓ）でも受信可能である。放送受信装置１００Ｓは、アンテナ１００ａ１を介して、電波塔３００ｔから送出された地上波デジタル放送サービスのデジタル放送波を受信し、前記受信したデジタル放送波に対して、復調、選局、復号、等の処理を施し、５．１ｃｈの音声データを再生する。放送受信装置１００Ｓは、前記再生した５．１ｃｈの音声データに所定の音声処理を施してスピーカ等から出力可能である。即ち、２２．２ｃｈの音声データの出力に非対応である放送受信装置であっても、本実施例の放送システムのデジタル放送波を受信可能である。 The digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t can be received by a television receiver (broadcast receiver 100S) capable of receiving the current terrestrial digital broadcast service. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S receives the digital broadcast wave of the terrestrial digital broadcast service transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a1, and demodulates, selects, decodes, etc. the received digital broadcast wave. To process 5.1ch of audio data. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100S can perform predetermined audio processing on the reproduced 5.1 ch audio data and can output it from a speaker or the like. That is, even a broadcast receiving apparatus that is not compatible with the output of audio data of 22.2 ch can receive the digital broadcast wave of the broadcast system of this embodiment.
　［放送受信装置の構成］
　図２５Ａは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。本実施例の放送受信装置１００Ｕ２は、実施例２における放送受信装置１００Ｕと基本的に同等の構成を有するが、音声選択部１７２に代替して音声混合／選択部１７２Ｍが用意される。音声混合／選択部１７２Ｍは、音声選択部１７２の有する機能に加えて、第一音声復号部１３４から出力される５．１ｃｈの音声データと第二音声復号部１５４から出力される追加用音声データとに対して多チャンネル化処理を行うことにより２２．２ｃｈの音声データを生成する機能を備える。多チャンネル化処理に用いる追加用音声データストリームは、アプリケーション制御部１６１および／またはアプリケーションエンジン１６２の制御に基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット上の所定のサーバ装置から取得する。また、音声出力部１７６は、２２．２ｃｈの音声データをデジタルアンプ等に出力可能なデジタルインタフェースであって良い。 [Configuration of broadcast receiving apparatus]
FIG. 25A is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in the second embodiment, but a voice mixing / selection unit 172M is prepared instead of the voice selection unit 172. The voice mixing / selection unit 172M adds the 5.1ch voice data output from the first voice decoding unit 134 and the additional voice data output from the second voice decoding unit 154 in addition to the function of the voice selection unit 172. And 22.2 channels of audio data by performing multi-channel processing on the The additional audio data stream used for multi-channel processing is acquired from a predetermined server apparatus on the Internet via the LAN communication unit 121 based on the control of the application control unit 161 and / or the application engine 162. Also, the audio output unit 176 may be a digital interface capable of outputting 22.2 ch audio data to a digital amplifier or the like.
　図２５Ｂは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ２のソフトウェア構成図の一例であり、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４およびストレージ部１１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。放送受信装置１００Ｕ２のソフトウェア構成は、実施例２における放送受信装置１００Ｕのソフトウェア構成と基本的に同等であるが、ストレージ部１１０に記憶された受信機能プログラム１００２をＲＡＭ１０４に展開した際に、放送番組再生部１１０２ａ、通信コンテンツ再生部１１０２ｂ、連携アプリ制御部１１０２ｃ、端末連携管理部１１０２ｄ（但し、図示省略）、補完（高画質化）処理部１１０２ｕの他に、多チャンネル化処理部１１０２ｍを構成する。多チャンネル化処理部１１０２ｍは、音声混合／選択部１７２Ｍで実行される多チャンネル化処理を、主に制御する。 FIG. 25B is an example of a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage unit 110. The software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U2 is basically the same as the software configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U in the second embodiment, but when the receiving function program 1002 stored in the storage unit 110 is expanded in the RAM 104, the broadcast program In addition to the reproduction unit 1102a, communication content reproduction unit 1102b, cooperation application control unit 1102c, terminal cooperation management unit 1102d (not shown), complementary (image quality improvement) processing unit 1102u, multichannel processing unit 1102m is configured. . The multi-channeling processing unit 1102 m mainly controls multi-channeling processing that is executed by the audio mixing / selection unit 172 M.
　以上説明した本実施例の構成によれば、現行の地上波デジタル放送サービス対応のテレビ受信機のユーザはこれまでと同じ視聴環境で視聴を継続可能であり、且つ、２２．２ｃｈ音声データによる高品位な音響効果の提供が可能な地上波デジタル放送サービスのシステムを実現可能である。即ち、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能となる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the user of the television receiver compatible with the current terrestrial digital broadcasting service can continue viewing in the same viewing environment as before, and the height by the 22.2 ch audio data is high. It is possible to realize a terrestrial digital broadcast service system capable of providing high quality sound effects. That is, it is possible to execute functions with higher added value.
　（実施例４）
　以下では、本発明の実施例４に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例２や実施例３と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例２や実施例３との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。実施例２や実施例３では、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に関して説明したが、本実施例では、前記各処理を行う際のユーザインタフェースに関して説明する。 (Example 4)
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The configuration, effects, and the like in the present embodiment are the same as in the second embodiment and the third embodiment unless otherwise noted. Therefore, in the following, differences between the present embodiment and the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible in order to avoid duplication. In the second and third embodiments, the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal and the extension processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal have been described, but in the present embodiment, regarding the user interface when performing each processing described above explain.
　［放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面］
　図２６Ａは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）における電子番組表（ＥＰＧ）表示画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｆは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が取得した番組情報データ列に基づいて作成した、デジタル放送サービスにおける放送番組の配信予定表である。図１０Ａに示した連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの番組表キー７４１ａ７や図示を省略した専用リモコンのＥＰＧキー等を選択（押下）することにより、映像表示部１７３にＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｆが表示される。 [EPG screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 26A is a screen display diagram showing an example of an electronic program guide (EPG) display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2). The EPG display screen 173 f is a distribution schedule of broadcast programs in digital broadcasting service created based on the program information data string acquired by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 U (100 U 2). The EPG display screen 173f is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting (pressing) the program guide key 741a7 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application shown in FIG. 10A or the EPG key of the dedicated remote controller (not shown). .
　ＥＰＧ表示画面１７３ｆは、図１６Ａと同様に、縦軸を時間表示、横軸をサービスＩＤ（チャンネル）表示としたマトリクス形状で、各時間帯に各チャンネルで放送される各放送番組の詳細情報を表示する。各放送番組の詳細情報１７３ｆ１は、主としてタイトル領域１７３ｆ２と詳細説明領域１７３ｆ３で構成される。タイトル領域１７３ｆ２には、各放送番組が実施例２で説明した映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）に対応した番組である場合に、その旨を意味する『４Ｋ（８Ｋ）　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ４等が表示されて良い。また、各放送番組が実施例３で説明した音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に対応した番組である場合に、その旨を意味する『２２．２ＣＨ　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ５等が表示されて良い。 The EPG display screen 173f has a matrix shape in which the vertical axis represents time and the horizontal axis represents service ID (channel) as in FIG. 16A, and detailed information of each broadcast program broadcasted on each channel in each time zone is displayed. indicate. The detailed information 173f1 of each broadcast program mainly includes a title area 173f2 and a detailed explanation area 173f3. In the title area 173f2, in the case where each broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal described in the second embodiment, "4K (8K) Available" is encoded to mean that. The mark 173f4 may be displayed. In addition, when each broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (multi-channeling) of the audio signal described in the third embodiment, the mark 173f5 etc. which symbolizes "22.2CH Available" May be displayed.
　なお、タイトル領域１７３ｆ２に表示される前記『４Ｋ（８Ｋ）　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ４や『２２．２ＣＨ　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ５等は、追加用の各種データ（前述の補完データストリーム、追加用音声データストリーム、等）がアプリケーションサーバ上に用意されている場合であっても、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認の結果、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）での補完（高画質化）処理や多チャンネル化処理の実行が不可の場合には表示しないように制御しても良い。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）での前記各処理の実行が可能な場合であっても、ネットワーク接続がされていない（即ち、追加用の各種データの取得ができない）場合には表示しないように制御しても良い。 Note that the mark 173f4 obtained by symbolizing the "4K (8K) Available" displayed in the title area 173f2 and the mark 173f5 obtained by symbolizing "22.2CH Available" are various data for addition (the above-described complementary data stream , Even if an additional audio data stream, etc.) is prepared on the application server, as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, the complementation (image quality improvement) processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) or many It may be controlled not to display when the execution of the channelization process is not possible. In addition, even when the above-described respective processes can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2), display is not performed when there is no network connection (that is, various data for addition can not be acquired). You may control it.
　［番組情報データ列の取得処理］
　番組情報データ列は、ＥＩＴ（Ｅｖｅｎｔ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）の形式で配信されて良い。図２６Ｂにイベント情報テーブル（ＥＩＴ）のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｉｄ』はイベント（放送番組）の識別番号であり、同一サービス内で一意に割り当てられるイベント識別情報である。ＥＩＴは、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｉｄ』の異なるイベントに関する情報を複数記述することが可能であり、更に、それぞれのイベントに関する情報は、短形式イベント記述子や拡張形式イベント記述子（図示省略）等の複数の記述子で構成されて良い。図２６Ｃに短形式イベント記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』は番組名（タイトル）が記述されるパラメータであり、『ｔｅｘｔ＿ｃｈａｒ』は番組の説明（詳細説明）が記述されるパラメータである。拡張形式イベント記述子を用いて、項目毎の詳細な記述を行うようにしても良い。 [Process of acquiring program information data string]
The program information data string may be distributed in the form of an EIT (Event Information Table). FIG. 26B shows an example of the data structure of the event information table (EIT). In the figure, "event_id" is an identification number of an event (broadcast program), and is event identification information uniquely assigned within the same service. EIT can describe multiple pieces of information on different events of “event_id”, and furthermore, information on each event can be divided into multiple descriptions such as short-form event descriptors and extended-form event descriptors (not shown). May be composed of children. FIG. 26C shows an example of the short event descriptor data structure. "Event_name_char" in the figure is a parameter in which a program title (title) is described, and "text_char" is a parameter in which a program description (detailed description) is described. A detailed description for each item may be made using an extended event descriptor.
　前述のように、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）では、各放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）に対応した番組である場合、補完（高画質化）処理を実行可能であるか否か、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか否か、等に応じて、『４Ｋ（８Ｋ）　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ４等の表示の有無が制御されて良い。同様に、各放送番組が音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に対応した番組である場合、多チャンネル化処理を実行可能であるか否か、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか否か、等に応じて、『２２．２ＣＨ　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ５等の表示の有無が制御されて良い。前記各印の表示の有無の制御は、以下の何れかの方法で番組情報データ列を取得することにより行われて良い。 As described above, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2), when each broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal, it is possible to execute the complementation (image quality improvement) process or not Depending on whether or not the network connection is established, the presence or absence of the display of the mark 173f4 or the like that is obtained by symbolizing "4K (8K) Available" may be controlled. Similarly, if each broadcast program is a program compatible with audio signal expansion processing (multi-channeling), whether multi-channeling processing can be performed or if it is network-connected, etc. Accordingly, the presence or absence of the display of the mark 173f5 or the like which is obtained by symbolizing "22.2CH Available" may be controlled. The control of the presence or absence of the display of each mark may be performed by acquiring the program information data string by any of the following methods.
　（１）二重構造のＥＩＴを放送波から取得する方法
　放送波で送信するＥＩＴが二重構造を有しており、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、前記各処理（映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化処理）、音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化処理）、等）を実行可能であるか、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか、等に応じて、前記ＥＩＴの第一のデータ構造を解釈してＥＰＧの生成／表示を行うか、第二のデータ構造を解釈してＥＰＧの生成／表示を行うか、を制御すれば良い。 (1) Method of acquiring double-structured EIT from broadcast waves EITs transmitted by broadcast waves have a double-structure, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) performs each of the above processes (the extension process of the video signal ( Interprets the first data structure of the EIT depending on whether it is possible to execute high-quality image processing, expansion processing of audio signals (multi-channel processing), etc., or whether it is connected to a network etc. Then, it may be controlled whether to generate / display an EPG or interpret the second data structure to generate / display an EPG.
　例えば、放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組である場合、ＥＩＴは、前記放送番組のイベントに関する情報として、例えば、第一の短形式イベント記述子と第二の短形式イベント記述子を備えるようにする。第一の短形式イベント記述子は、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』に印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５を含む番組名が記述され、第二の短形式イベント記述子は、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』に印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５を含まない番組名が記述される。他の記述子に関しても、それぞれ第一の記述子と第二の記述子を備えるようにしても良い。前記第一の記述子群がＥＩＴの第一のデータ構造であり、前記第二の記述子群がＥＩＴの第二のデータ構造である。 For example, when the broadcast program is a program corresponding to an expansion process (image quality enhancement) of a video signal, an expansion process (multichannelization) of an audio signal, etc., the EIT is, for example, A short form event descriptor and a second short form event descriptor are provided. The first short-form event descriptor describes the program title including the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 in "event_name_char", and the second short-form event descriptor does not include the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 in "event_name_char" The name is described. The other descriptors may also be provided with a first descriptor and a second descriptor, respectively. The first descriptor group is a first data structure of EIT, and the second descriptor group is a second data structure of EIT.
　放送受信装置１００（１００Ｕ２）は、前記各処理を実行可能であるか、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか、等に応じて、ＥＩＴの第一のデータ構造である前記第一の記述子群（第一の短形式イベント記述子等）を解釈してＥＰＧを生成／表示するか、ＥＩＴの第二のデータ構造である前記第二の記述子群（第二の短形式イベント記述子等）を解釈してＥＰＧを生成／表示するか、を制御されて良い。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (100U2) can execute the respective processes, or is connected to a network, etc., according to the first descriptor group (the first data structure of the EIT) Interprets one short event descriptor etc.) and generates / displays an EPG, or interprets the second descriptor group (second short event descriptor etc.) which is a second data structure of EIT It may be controlled to generate / display an EPG.
　（２）異なるＥＩＴを放送波とネットワークから取得する方法
　放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組である場合に使用する第一のＥＩＴをネットワークで配信し、放送番組が前記各処理に対応した番組でない場合に使用する第二のＥＩＴを放送波で送信するようにしても良い。第一のＥＩＴは、第一のデータ構造を有しており、前述の第一の記述子群で構成される。例えば、第一のＥＩＴは、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』に印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５を含む番組名が記述された第一の短形式イベント記述子を備える。第二のＥＩＴは、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』に印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５を含まない番組名が記述された第二の短形式イベント記述子を備える。 (2) A method for acquiring different EITs from broadcast waves and a network If the broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of a video signal or the expansion processing (multichannelization) of an audio signal One EIT may be distributed via a network, and a second EIT used when the broadcast program is not a program corresponding to each of the above processes may be transmitted by broadcast wave. The first EIT has a first data structure, and is composed of the above-described first descriptor group. For example, the first EIT is provided with a first short-form event descriptor in which a program name including a mark 173 f 4 and a mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”. The second EIT includes a second short event descriptor in which a program title not including the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”.
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）は、放送番組が前記各処理に対応した番組である場合、前記各処理を実行可能であるか、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか、等に応じて、ネットワークから取得した第一のＥＩＴの第一の記述子群を解釈してＥＰＧを生成／表示するか、放送波から取得した第二のＥＩＴの第二の記述子群を解釈してＥＰＧを生成／表示するか、を制御されて良い。 When the broadcast program is a program corresponding to each of the above processes, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) acquires from the network according to whether or not each of the above processes can be performed or whether it is connected to the network. Is the first descriptor group of the first EIT interpreted to generate / display an EPG, or is the second descriptor group of the second EIT acquired from the broadcast wave generated / displayed the EPG? , May be controlled.
　（３）放送受信装置で印を追加する方法
　放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組でない場合に使用する第二のＥＩＴのみを放送波で送信する。第二のＥＩＴは、『ｅｖｅｎｔ＿ｎａｍｅ＿ｃｈａｒ』に印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５を含まない番組名が記述された第二の短形式イベント記述子を備える。『４Ｋ（８Ｋ）　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ４や『２２．２ＣＨ　Ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ』を記号化した印１７３ｆ５等は、外字等の形式で、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）がＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ１１０等に記憶しておく。前記印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５等は、予め放送波やネットワークを介してダウンロードして、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ１１０等に記憶しておけば良い。 (3) A method of adding a mark by the broadcast receiving apparatus A second EIT used when the broadcast program is not a program compatible with the extension processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the extension processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal. Transmit only on the airwaves. The second EIT includes a second short event descriptor in which a program title not including the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 is described in “event_name_char”. The broadcast reception apparatus 100U (100U2) stores the ROM 173, the storage 110, and the like in the form of an external character, etc., and the mark 173f4 and the mark 173f5 and the like, which are symbols "4K (8K) Available" and "22.2CH Available". Keep it. The marks 173f4 and the marks 173f5 may be downloaded in advance via a broadcast wave or a network and stored in the ROM 103, the storage 110, or the like.
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）は、常に放送波から取得した第二のＥＩＴの第二の記述子群を解釈してＥＰＧを生成／表示する。但し、放送番組が前記各処理に対応した番組である場合、前記各処理を実行可能であるか、或いは、ネットワーク接続されているか、等に応じて、例えば、第二の短形式イベント記述子から取得した番組名にＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ１１０等から読み出した印１７３ｆ４や印１７３ｆ５等を適宜追加編集するか否かを制御されて良い。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) always interprets the second descriptor group of the second EIT acquired from the broadcast wave to generate / display an EPG. However, if the broadcast program is a program corresponding to each of the above processes, for example, from the second short form event descriptor, depending on whether or not each of the above processes can be executed or connected to a network. It may be controlled whether or not the mark 173 f 4 or the mark 173 f 5 read from the ROM 103 or the storage 110 is appropriately added to the acquired program name.
　［映像／音声信号拡張処理時の画面表示］
　図２７は、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）における番組情報表示画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。番組情報表示画面１７３ｇは、放送番組の視聴中に、図示を省略した専用リモコンの画面表示キー等を押下することにより、映像表示部１７３に表示される。番組情報表示画面１７３ｇでは、放送番組の視聴画面に番組情報表示１７３ｇ１が重畳表示される。 [Display on screen during video / audio signal expansion processing]
FIG. 27 is a screen display diagram showing an example of a program information display screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2). The program information display screen 173 g is displayed on the video display unit 173 by pressing a screen display key or the like of a dedicated remote controller (not shown) while viewing a broadcast program. On the program information display screen 173g, the program information display 173g1 is superimposed and displayed on the viewing screen of the broadcast program.
　番組情報表示１７３ｇ１には、放送番組のタイトルや放送開始／終了時間、サービスＩＤ（チャンネル）、放送局ロゴ、等が表示されて良い。更に、放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組である場合には、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）が適用された映像信号を表示中である旨を意味する『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　４Ｋ』を記号化した印や、音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）が適用された音声信号を出力中である旨を意味する『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　Ａｕｄｉｏ』を記号化した印（図示省略）、等が表示されて良い。 The program information display 173g1 may display a title of a broadcast program, a broadcast start / end time, a service ID (channel), a broadcast station logo, and the like. Furthermore, if the broadcast program is a program compatible with video signal expansion processing (image quality improvement), audio signal expansion processing (multichannelization), etc., the video signal expansion processing (image quality improvement) is applied. "Extended 4K" which means that the displayed video signal is being displayed as a symbol, or that the audio signal to which the extension processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal is applied is being output, "Extended A mark (not shown) obtained by symbolizing “Audio” may be displayed.
　なお、前記『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　４Ｋ』を記号化した印や『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　Ａｕｄｉｏ』を記号化した印等は、放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組であっても、アプリケーションプロファイル９０４の確認の結果、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）での補完（高画質化）処理や多チャンネル化処理の実行が不可の場合には表示しないように制御しても良い。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）での前記各処理の実行が可能な場合であっても、ネットワーク接続されていない（即ち、追加用の各種データの取得ができない）場合には表示しないように制御しても良い。即ち、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等が適用されていない映像信号や音声信号を出力中の場合には、前記『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　４Ｋ』を記号化した印や『Ｅｘｔｅｎｄｅｄ　Ａｕｄｉｏ』を記号化した印等を表示しない。 Note that the above-mentioned "Extended 4K" symbolized marks and "Extended Audio" symbolized marks, etc. are for broadcast programs such as video signal extension processing (high image quality) and audio signal extension processing (multichannel) Even if the program is compatible with the above, as a result of confirmation of the application profile 904, display is not performed if execution of complementation (image quality improvement) processing or multichannelization processing in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is not possible. You may control it. In addition, even when the above-described respective processes can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2), display is not performed when the network connection is not made (that is, various data for addition can not be acquired). You may control it. That is, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is outputting a video signal or an audio signal to which the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal or the extension processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal is not applied. , Do not display the mark "Extended 4K" or the mark "Extended Audio".
　［映像／音声信号拡張処理の実行制御］
　放送番組が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した番組である場合、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）において前記映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等を実行可能である場合に前記各処理を自動実行するようにしても良いが、前記各処理を実行するか否かをユーザの選択により制御するようにしても良い。即ち、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）に係るネットワーク環境が好適でない場合に、前記各処理の実行を拒否して放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）の動作の安定化を図ることが選択可能となる。 [Execution control of video / audio signal expansion processing]
When the broadcast program is a program corresponding to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal, the expansion processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal, etc., the expansion processing (image quality high) of the video signal in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) May be performed automatically when it is possible to execute the expansion processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal, etc., but it is controlled by the user's selection whether or not each processing is to be executed. You may do it. That is, when the network environment related to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is not suitable, it is possible to choose to refuse the execution of each process to stabilize the operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2).
　図２８Ａは、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）における拡張処理実行制御画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。拡張処理実行制御画面１７３ｈは、放送番組の視聴中に、図１０Ａに示した連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８や図示を省略した専用リモコンのｄキー等（以下、ｄａｔａキーと総称す）を選択（押下）することにより、映像表示部１７３に表示される。 FIG. 28A is a screen display diagram showing an example of the extended process execution control screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2). The extended process execution control screen 173 h is a data key 741 a 8 of the basic screen 741 a of the cooperation control application shown in FIG. 10A, a d key of a dedicated remote controller (not shown), etc. Is displayed on the video display unit 173 by selecting (pressing).
　この場合、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）は、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等に対応した放送番組を受信する場合であっても、直ちに前記各処理の実行を開始せず、前記各処理の施されていない通常の映像信号および音声信号の出力を継続する。この状態で、ユーザがｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）すると、映像表示部１７３に拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ１が表示される。 In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) immediately receives the broadcast program corresponding to the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal, the expansion process (multichannelization) of the audio signal, etc. The execution of each process is not started, and the output of normal video and audio signals not subjected to each process is continued. In this state, when the user selects (depresses) the data key, the extended processing execution control box 173h1 is displayed on the video display unit 173.
　拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ１において、『映像拡張』を選択すると、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）が開始される。『音声拡張』を選択すると、音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）が開始される。『映像／音声拡張』を選択すると、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）と音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）が開始される。また、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）を実行中にｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）すると、拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ２が表示される。拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ２では、『映像拡張』が実行中を示す表示となる。拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ２において、再度『映像拡張』を選択すると、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）の実行が停止される。同様に、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）と音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）を実行中にｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）すると、拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ３が表示される。拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ３では、『映像拡張』、『音声拡張』、『映像／音声拡張』が実行中を示す表示となる。 When "image extension" is selected in the extension process execution control box 173h1, the extension process (image quality improvement) of the image signal is started. When "audio expansion" is selected, expansion processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal is started. When "video / audio expansion" is selected, the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal and the expansion processing (multichanneling) of the audio signal are started. In addition, when the data key is selected (pressed) while the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal is being performed, the expansion processing execution control box 173h2 is displayed. In the extension process execution control box 173h2, "image extension" is displayed to indicate that it is being executed. When "image extension" is selected again in the extension process execution control box 173h2, the execution of the extension process (image quality improvement) of the image signal is stopped. Similarly, when the data key is selected (pressed) while the expansion processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal and the expansion processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal are being performed, the expansion processing execution control box 173h3 is displayed. In the expansion process execution control box 173h3, “video expansion”, “audio expansion”, and “video / audio expansion” are displayed to indicate that execution is in progress.
　拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ１において、『データ放送』を選択すると、通常のデータ放送画面が表示されて良い。また、受信中の放送番組がＨｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に対応しており、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）がＨｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送画面を表示可能である場合、ユーザがｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）すると、映像表示部１７３に拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ４が表示されて良い。拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ４では、『データ放送』に代替して『Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送』が表示される。『Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送』を選択すると、Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送画面が表示されて良い。 When "data broadcast" is selected in the extension process execution control box 173h1, a normal data broadcast screen may be displayed. When the broadcast program being received corresponds to Hybridcast broadcast and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) can display the Hybridcast broadcast screen, when the user selects (depresses) the data key, the video display unit 173 is displayed. The extended process execution control box 173h4 may be displayed. In the extended process execution control box 173 h 4, “Hybridcast broadcast” is displayed in place of “data broadcast”. If "Hybridcast broadcast" is selected, the Hybridcast broadcast screen may be displayed.
　なお、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）にのみ対応している場合は、拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ１において、『音声拡張』と『映像／音声拡張』は表示されないか無効化されて良い。放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）にのみ対応している場合は、『映像拡張』と『映像／音声拡張』は表示されないか無効化されて良い。また、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に対応していないか、或いは、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）に対応している場合であっても、ネットワーク接続されていない場合には、拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｄ１を表示せずに、通常のデータ放送画面やＨｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送画面の表示を開始しても良い。 When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) supports only the extension processing (image quality enhancement) of the video signal, “audio extension” and “video / audio extension” are displayed in the extension processing execution control box 173h1. It may not be or may be invalidated. If the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) supports only audio signal expansion processing (multichanneling), "video expansion" and "video / audio expansion" may not be displayed or may be disabled. In addition, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) does not correspond to the expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the expansion processing (multichannelization) of the audio signal, or the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal And even if it is compatible with audio signal expansion processing (multichanneling), when it is not connected to the network, the normal data broadcast screen or Hybridcast is not displayed without displaying the expansion processing execution control box 173d1. The display of the broadcast screen may be started.
　また、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）を実行中にｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）し、表示された拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ２で『データ放送』を選択した場合、通常のデータ放送画面を表示すると同時に、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）の実行を停止しても良い。即ち、データ放送画面における放送番組の表示領域は通常表示状態よりも狭くなることが一般的であり、したがって、高画質化を行わなくとも視聴上の不具合を感じ難いからである。データ放送画面の表示を終了した際に、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）の実行を再開すれば良い。Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に関しても同様の処理を行って良い。 In addition, when the data key is selected (pressed) while expansion processing (image quality improvement) of the video signal is being performed, and “data broadcasting” is selected in the displayed expansion processing execution control box 173h2, a normal data broadcasting screen is displayed. At the same time as the display, the execution of the extension process (image quality improvement) of the video signal may be stopped. That is, the display area of the broadcast program on the data broadcast screen is generally narrower than that in the normal display state. Therefore, it is difficult to feel viewing problems even if the image quality is not improved. When the display of the data broadcast screen is ended, the execution of the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal may be resumed. The same process may be performed for Hybridcast broadcasting.
　図２８Ｂに、前記ｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）した際の、放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）の拡張処理選択制御の動作一覧を示す。 FIG. 28B shows an operation list of extended process selection control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) when the data key is selected (pressed).
　（１）拡張処理実行可能／ネットワーク接続有の場合
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、映像／音声拡張処理を実行可能であり、ネットワーク接続されている場合には、ｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）した際に、以下の動作となる。 (1) When expansion processing is possible / network connection is present When the broadcast reception apparatus 100U (100U2) is capable of executing the video / audio expansion processing and is connected to the network, the data key is selected (pressed). The following operations are performed.
　受信中の放送番組が映像／音声の拡張処理に対応した番組である場合は、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）により、拡張処理実行制御ボックス１７３ｈ１を表示する。受信中の放送番組が映像／音声の拡張処理に対応した番組ではなく、Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に対応した番組である場合は、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）により、Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送画面の表示を開始する。受信中の放送番組が映像／音声の拡張処理に対応した番組ではなく、Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に対応しない番組である場合は、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）により、データ放送画面の表示を開始する。 If the broadcast program being received is a program corresponding to the video / audio expansion process, the expansion process execution control box 173h1 is displayed by selection (depression) of the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with video / audio extension processing but a program compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, the display of the Hybridcast broadcast screen is started by selecting (pressing) the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with video / audio expansion processing but a program not compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, display of a data broadcast screen is started by selecting (pressing) the data key.
　（２）拡張処理実行可能／ネットワーク接続無の場合
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、映像／音声拡張処理を実行可能であり、ネットワーク接続されていない場合には、ｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）した際には、データ放送画面の表示を開始する。 (2) When expansion processing is possible / without network connection If the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is capable of executing video / audio expansion processing and is not connected to the network, the data key is selected (pressed). At the time, the display of the data broadcast screen is started.
　（３）拡張処理実行不可／ネットワーク接続有の場合
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、映像／音声拡張処理を実行可能ではなく、ネットワーク接続されている場合には、ｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）した際に、以下の動作となる。 (3) When extension processing can not be performed / network connection is present When the broadcast reception apparatus 100U (100U2) is not capable of executing the video / audio extension processing but is connected to the network, the data key is selected (pressed). The following operations are performed.
　受信中の放送番組がＨｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に対応した番組である場合は、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）により、Ｈｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送画面の表示を開始する。受信中の放送番組がＨｙｂｒｉｄｃａｓｔ放送に対応しない番組である場合は、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）により、データ放送画面の表示を開始する。 If the broadcast program being received is a program compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, the display of the Hybridcast broadcast screen is started by selection (depression) of the data key. If the broadcast program being received is not a program compatible with Hybridcast broadcast, the data broadcast screen is displayed by selecting (pressing) the data key.
　（４）拡張処理実行不可／ネットワーク接続無の場合
　放送受信装置１００Ｕ（１００Ｕ２）が、映像／音声拡張処理を実行可能ではなく、ネットワーク接続されていない場合には、ｄａｔａキーを選択（押下）した際には、データ放送画面の表示を開始する。 (4) When extension processing can not be performed / no network connection If the broadcast receiving apparatus 100U (100U2) is not capable of executing the video / audio extension processing and is not connected to the network, the data key is selected (pressed). At the time, the display of the data broadcast screen is started.
　なお、前述の『ネットワーク接続されていない場合』とは、ネットワークケーブルが接続されている状態であっても、ユーザ設定によりネットワーク通信が許可されていない場合や、劣悪な通信環境により好適な通信速度の維持ができない場合も含むものとする。 The above-mentioned "when not connected to a network" means that even if a network cable is connected, a communication speed suitable for a case where network communication is not permitted by user setting or a poor communication environment. This includes cases where it is impossible to maintain
　また、映像信号の拡張処理（高画質化）や音声信号の拡張処理（多チャンネル化）等は、前述のように、ｄａｔａキーの選択（押下）の都度、実行の可否をユーザが選択するようにしても良いが、メニュー等の設定により予め各処理の実行の可否をユーザが選択しておくようにしても良い。 In addition, as described above, the user can select whether to execute the expansion process (image quality improvement) of the video signal or the expansion process (multichanneling) of the audio signal each time the data key is selected (pressed). However, the user may select whether to execute each process in advance by setting a menu or the like.
　以上、本発明の実施形態の例を、実施例１～４を用いて説明したが、言うまでもなく、本発明の技術を実現する構成は前記実施例に限られるものではなく、さまざまな変形例が考えられる。例えば、ある実施例の構成の一部を他の実施例の構成と置き換えることが可能であり、また、ある実施例の構成に他の実施例の構成を加えることも可能である。これらは全て本発明の範疇に属するものである。また、文中や図中に現れる数値やメッセージ等もあくまでも一例であり、異なるものを用いても本発明の効果を損なうことはない。 As mentioned above, although the example of the embodiment of the present invention has been described using the first to fourth embodiments, it goes without saying that the configuration for realizing the technology of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. Conceivable. For example, part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment. These are all within the scope of the present invention. Further, numerical values, messages, etc. appearing in sentences and figures are merely examples, and the effects of the present invention are not impaired even if different ones are used.
　前述した本発明の機能等は、それらの一部または全部を、例えば集積回路で設計する等によりハードウェアで実現しても良い。また、マイクロプロセッサユニット等がそれぞれの機能等を実現する動作プログラムを解釈して実行することによりソフトウェアで実現しても良い。ハードウェアとソフトウェアを併用しても良い。 The functions and the like of the present invention described above may be realized in hardware by designing part or all of them, for example, by an integrated circuit. The program may be realized by software by the microprocessor unit or the like interpreting and executing an operation program for realizing the respective functions or the like. Hardware and software may be used together.
　なお、放送受信装置１００を制御する前記ソフトウェアは、製品出荷の時点で予め放送受信装置１００のＲＯＭ１０３および／またはストレージ部１１０等に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後にインターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記ソフトウェアを、拡張インタフェース部１２４等を介して取得しても良い。同様に、携帯情報端末７００を制御する前記ソフトウェアは、製品出荷の時点で予め携帯情報端末７００のＲＯＭ７０３および／またはストレージ部７１０等に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後にインターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部７２１若しくは移動体電話網通信部７２２等を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記ソフトウェアを、拡張インタフェース部７２４等を介して取得しても良い。 The software for controlling the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after product shipment. Also, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disc, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like. Similarly, the software for controlling the portable information terminal 700 may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 at the time of product shipment. After product shipment, it may be acquired from the other application server 500 or the like on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722 or the like. In addition, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
　また、図中に示した制御線や情報線は説明上必要と考えられるものを示しており、必ずしも製品上の全ての制御線や情報線を示しているとは限らない。実際には殆ど全ての構成が相互に接続されていると考えても良い。 Further, control lines and information lines shown in the drawing indicate those which are considered to be necessary for explanation, and not all control lines and information lines on the product are necessarily shown. In practice, almost all of the configurations may be considered to be mutually connected.
　１００、１００Ｓ、１００Ｕ、１００Ｕ２：放送受信装置、１００ａ、１００ａ１、１００ａ２：アンテナ、１０１：主制御部、１０２：システムバス、１０３：ＲＯＭ、１０４：ＲＡＭ、１１０：ストレージ部、１２１：ＬＡＮ通信部、１２４：拡張インタフェース部、１２５：デジタルインタフェース部、１３１：チューナ／復調部、１３２：第一分離部、１３３：第一映像復号部、１３４：第一音声復号部、１３５：第一字幕復号部、１４１：データ放送受信処理部、１４２：データ放送エンジン、１５１：ストリーミング受信処理部、１５２：第二分離部、１５３：第二映像復号部、１５４：第二音声復号部、１５５：第二字幕復号部、１６１：アプリケーション制御部、１６２：アプリケーションエンジン、１７１：映像重畳部、１７１Ｕ：映像補完／重畳部、１７２：音声選択部、１７２Ｍ：音声混合／選択部、１７３：映像表示部、１７４：スピーカ、１７５：映像出力部、１７６：音声出力部、１８１：提示同期制御部、１９１端末連携制御部、２００：インターネット、２１０：ルータ装置、３００ｔ：電波塔、３００：放送局サーバ、３００Ｂ：放送局、４００：サービス事業者サーバ、５００：その他のアプリケーションサーバ、６００：移動体電話通信サーバ、６００ｂ：基地局、７００：携帯情報端末。 100, 100S, 100U, 100U2: broadcast receiver, 100a, 100a1, 100a2: antenna, 101: main control unit, 102: system bus, 103: ROM, 104: RAM, 110: storage unit, 121: LAN communication unit, 124: extended interface unit 125: digital interface unit 131: tuner / demodulator 132: first separator 133: first video decoder 134: first audio decoder 135: first subtitle decoder 141: data broadcast reception processing unit 142: data broadcast engine 151: streaming reception processing unit 152: second separation unit 153: second video decoding unit 154: second audio decoding unit 155: second subtitle decoding Part 161: Application control part 162: Application engine 171: Video superimposing part 171 U: video complementation / superimposition unit 172: audio selection unit 172 M: audio mixing / selection unit 173: video display unit 174: speaker 175: video output unit 176: audio output unit 181: presentation synchronization control unit , 191 terminal cooperation control unit, 200: Internet, 210: router device, 300t: radio tower, 300: broadcast station server, 300B: broadcast station, 400: service provider server, 500: other application server, 600: mobile body Telephone communication server, 600b: base station, 700: portable information terminal.

Claims (3)

  1. 　相対時刻情報と対応付けられた映像データを第１のトランスポート方式で伝送する第１の伝送路のデータを受信する第１のデータ受信部と、
    　絶対時刻情報と対応付けられた補完映像データを、前記第１のトランスポート方式とは異なる第２のトランスポート方式で伝送する第２の伝送路のデータを受信する第２のデータ受信部と、
    　前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した映像データを、前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した補完映像データを用いて高画質化する映像処理部と、
    　を備え、
    　前記映像処理部での該高画質化処理は、前記第２の伝送路で伝送される、前記相対時刻情報と前記絶対時刻情報の対応関係に関する情報に基づいて処理が実行される、受信装置。     A first data receiving unit that receives data of a first transmission path that transmits video data associated with relative time information according to a first transport method;
    A second data receiving unit that receives data of a second transmission path that transmits complementary video data associated with absolute time information by a second transport method different from the first transport method;
    A video processing unit for converting the video data received by the first data receiving unit into high image quality using the complementary video data received by the second data receiving unit;
    Equipped with
    A receiver according to the present invention, wherein the image quality improvement processing in the video processing unit is executed based on information related to the correspondence between the relative time information and the absolute time information, which is transmitted through the second transmission path.
  2. 　相対時刻情報と対応付けられた映像データと所定のチャンネル数の音声データを第１のトランスポート方式で伝送する第１の伝送路のデータを受信する第１のデータ受信部と、
    　絶対時刻情報と対応付けられた補完映像データと追加音声データを、前記第１のトランスポート方式とは異なる第２のトランスポート方式で伝送する第２の伝送路のデータを受信する第２のデータ受信部と、
    　前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した映像データを、前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した補完映像データを用いて高画質化する映像処理部と、
    　前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した音声データと前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した追加音声データとを用いて、前記所定のチャンネル数よりも多い第２のチャンネル数の音声データを生成する多チャンネル化部と、
    　を備え、
    　前記映像処理部での該高画質化処理は、前記第２の伝送路で伝送される、前記相対時刻情報と前記絶対時刻情報の対応関係に関する情報に基づいて処理が実行される、受信装置。     A first data receiving unit that receives data of a first transmission path that transmits video data associated with relative time information and audio data of a predetermined number of channels according to a first transport method;
    Second data for receiving data of a second transmission line transmitting complementary video data and additional audio data associated with absolute time information by a second transport method different from the first transport method A receiver,
    A video processing unit for converting the video data received by the first data receiving unit into high image quality using the complementary video data received by the second data receiving unit;
    Using the voice data received by the first data receiving unit and the additional voice data received by the second data receiving unit, voice data of a second number of channels larger than the predetermined number of channels is generated Multi-channeling unit,
    Equipped with
    A receiver according to the present invention, wherein the image quality improvement processing in the video processing unit is executed based on information related to the correspondence between the relative time information and the absolute time information, which is transmitted through the second transmission path.
  3. 　放送番組に関するデータである、映像データと所定のチャンネル数の音声データを第１のトランスポート方式で伝送可能な第１の伝送路のデータを受信する第１のデータ受信部と、
    　補完映像データまたは追加音声データを、前記第１のトランスポート方式とは異なる第２のトランスポート方式で伝送可能な第２の伝送路のデータを受信する第２のデータ受信部と、
    　前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した映像データを、前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した補完映像データを用いて高画質化処理を行う映像処理部と、
    　前記第１のデータ受信部で受信した音声データと前記第２のデータ受信部で受信した追加音声データとを用いて、前記所定のチャンネル数よりも多い第２のチャンネル数の音声データを生成する多チャンネル化処理を行う多チャンネル化部と、
    　リモートコントローラーからの操作信号を受信する操作入力部と、
    　制御部と、
    　を備え、
    　前記第１の伝送路では、前記放送番組が前記高画質化処理または前記多チャンネル化処理に対応しているか否かを示す識別情報が伝送されており、
    　前記操作入力部にリモートコントローラーの所定のボタンが押し下げられたことを示す操作信号が入力された場合、前記制御部は、前記識別情報に応じて、前記高画質化処理、前記多チャンネル化処理、およびその他の処理の何れの処理を行うか選択する、受信装置。     A first data receiving unit for receiving data of a first transmission path capable of transmitting video data and audio data of a predetermined number of channels by a first transport method, which is data relating to a broadcast program;
    A second data receiving unit that receives data of a second transmission path that can transmit complementary video data or additional audio data by a second transport method different from the first transport method;
    A video processing unit that performs high image quality processing using the complementary video data received by the second data receiving unit, with the video data received by the first data receiving unit;
    Using the voice data received by the first data receiving unit and the additional voice data received by the second data receiving unit, voice data of a second number of channels larger than the predetermined number of channels is generated A multi-channeling unit that performs multi-channeling processing;
    An operation input unit that receives an operation signal from a remote controller;
    A control unit,
    Equipped with
    In the first transmission path, identification information indicating whether the broadcast program corresponds to the high image quality processing or the multi-channel processing is transmitted.
    When an operation signal indicating that a predetermined button of the remote controller is pressed is input to the operation input unit, the control unit performs the image quality improvement processing, the multi-channeling processing, according to the identification information. And a receiver for selecting which processing to perform and other processing.
PCT/JP2018/022507 2017-06-21 2018-06-13 Receiving device WO2018235685A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-121606 2017-06-21
JP2017121606A JP2019009532A (en) 2017-06-21 2017-06-21 Receiving device
JP2017-121822 2017-06-22
JP2017121822A JP2019009538A (en) 2017-06-22 2017-06-22 Receiving device
JP2017-122719 2017-06-23
JP2017122719A JP2019009580A (en) 2017-06-23 2017-06-23 Receiving device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018235685A1 true WO2018235685A1 (en) 2018-12-27

Family

ID=64735583

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/022507 WO2018235685A1 (en) 2017-06-21 2018-06-13 Receiving device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018235685A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014120809A (en) * 2012-12-13 2014-06-30 Toshiba Corp Electronic apparatus, and control method and control program therefor
JP2015050769A (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-16 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカＰａｎａｓｏｎｉｃ Ｉｎｔｅｌｌｅｃｔｕａｌ Ｐｒｏｐｅｒｔｙ Ｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ Ａｍｅｒｉｃａ Transmission method and reception method
WO2016084591A1 (en) * 2014-11-26 2016-06-02 ソニー株式会社 Transmission device, transmission method, reception device, and reception method
JP2016116076A (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-23 株式会社東芝 Electronic apparatus and signal processing method
JP2016146574A (en) * 2015-02-09 2016-08-12 シャープ株式会社 Receiver, broadcast system, reception method, and program

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014120809A (en) * 2012-12-13 2014-06-30 Toshiba Corp Electronic apparatus, and control method and control program therefor
JP2015050769A (en) * 2013-08-29 2015-03-16 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカＰａｎａｓｏｎｉｃ Ｉｎｔｅｌｌｅｃｔｕａｌ Ｐｒｏｐｅｒｔｙ Ｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ Ａｍｅｒｉｃａ Transmission method and reception method
WO2016084591A1 (en) * 2014-11-26 2016-06-02 ソニー株式会社 Transmission device, transmission method, reception device, and reception method
JP2016116076A (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-23 株式会社東芝 Electronic apparatus and signal processing method
JP2016146574A (en) * 2015-02-09 2016-08-12 シャープ株式会社 Receiver, broadcast system, reception method, and program

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6301849B2 (en) Display and temporary storage processing method
WO2016125654A1 (en) Broadcast receiver, broadcast receiving method and content output method
JP2017098736A (en) Broadcast receiver
TWI578776B (en) Broadcast receiving device, broadcast receiving method and content output method
JP2016144020A (en) Broadcast reception device and broadcast reception method
WO2017022281A1 (en) Broadcast receiving device, output video information generating method, broadcast receiving method and video recording method
JP6222781B2 (en) Control method
JP6523003B2 (en) Broadcast receiver and content output method
JP2019009538A (en) Receiving device
JP6317861B1 (en) Broadcast program content transmission, reception and storage control method
JP6283145B2 (en) Control method
WO2018235685A1 (en) Receiving device
JP2019146248A (en) Broadcast receiver and content output method
JP2018121363A (en) Method for transmission, reception and storage control of broadcast program content
JP2019009580A (en) Receiving device
JP2019009532A (en) Receiving device
JP6892490B2 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP6546326B2 (en) Broadcast receiver and video display method
JP6753973B2 (en) Broadcast receiver and display method
WO2015098375A1 (en) Broadcast reception device and portable information terminal
WO2015072492A1 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP2017153103A (en) Broadcast receiving device and portable information terminal
JP6283146B2 (en) How to control recording reservation
JP2017038288A (en) Broadcast receiver and output video information generation method
JP6487243B2 (en) Broadcast receiving apparatus and content output method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18820905

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18820905

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1